0% found this document useful (0 votes)
2K views186 pages

As 131210 TM-X5000 Um D64GB WW GB 2023 1

Uploaded by

Liêm Hiếu
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
2K views186 pages

As 131210 TM-X5000 Um D64GB WW GB 2023 1

Uploaded by

Liêm Hiếu
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

D64GB

Telecentric Measurement System 1 Preparation for Use

2 Installing
TM-X5000 Series the TM-X5000 Series

3 Setup/Run

User’s Manual 4 System Settings/


Utilities

5 I/O Control and


Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time. Timing Charts

6 Specifications

7 TM-X Navigator

A Appendix
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Introduction

Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.

Symbols
The following symbols are alerts to important messages.
Be sure to read these messages carefully.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.

Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Indicates the reference pages and items in this manual.

Precautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3) A
 n utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any mistakes or questions, please contact a
KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
(6) The screens in this manual are examples for the explanations. The numbers and other values may differ to the actual state of the device.
(7) This manual is created using Windows 10.
(8) T
 his manual describes procedures in most cases with the presumption that the controller is connected to the dedicated display. However, Chapter 7
describes procedures with the presumption that the controller is connected to the TM-X Navigator.

Trademarks
• SD Memory Card is a registered trademark of the SD Association.
• EtherCAT® is a patented technology and registered trademark licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH of Germany.
• Other company names and product names noted in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The ™ mark and
® mark have been omitted in this manual.

Software information
This product incorporates the software files developed independently by or for Keyence Corporation, software files owned and licensed by a third party, and
software files subject to certain open source license agreements.
• The open source software files are subject to the notices and additional terms and conditions. For information about such open source software files, please
refer to the “License” information in the “System information” menu under “Global”.
• Such open source software files are provided on an “AS IS” basis to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law.
• If there is any discrepancy between the terms and conditions of the applicable open source license agreement and the “License”, the terms and conditions of
the applicable open source license agreement prevail with respect to the applicable open source software.
• A copy may be obtained of the source code corresponding to the binaries for GPL/LGPL-licensed file by sending a request to Keyence customer service at
“soft-license@keyence.co.jp”. There will be a charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Safety Information for TM-X5000 Series

Safety Information for TM-X5000 Series


General Cautions
• Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of a human body.
• Do not use this product in a hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
• Do not use this product in an application that may cause death, serious injury or serious property damage due to a failure with
this product should occur, such as nuclear power plants, on aircraft, trains, ships, or vehicles, used within medical equipment,
playground equipment, roller coasters and other rides, etc.

• If the product is used in a manner not specified by this manual, the protection provided by the product may be impaired.
• You must perform a sufficient risk assessment for the machine where this product is to be installed prior to installing this product.
Provide appropriate protective fail-safe measures on the machine independent from this product in case a failure with this product should occur.

• Before starting or operating the system, check to make sure all system functions are working properly.
• If any Keyence product fails, take all safety precautions to prevent damage before using the system again.

• If the system is operated beyond its published specifications or if the system is modified, its functions and performance cannot be guaranteed.
• Please note that when the system is used in combination with other instruments, its functions and performance may be degraded.
• Do not subject the controller or connected devices to a sudden change in temperature. There is the risk of condensation occurring.

Precautions for use


• Use the specified voltage. Failure to do so may cause fire, electric shock or malfunction.
• Do not disassemble or modify the unit. Failure to do so may cause fire or electric shock.
• Turn the main power supply off when performing cable connection or maintenance work etc. Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
• Pay attention to prevent foreign matter such as metal particles, dust, paper or wood chips from entering the inside of this unit.
Failure to follow this may result in a fire, electric shock, malfunction or accidents.

• Do not apply any vibration or shock. When a strong vibration or shock is applied to the head, malfunction or the deterioration of
measurement accuracy can occur.
• Before making any connections/disconnection, be sure to turn off the power of this unit and connected devices. Failure to do so
may result in a malfunction of the controller or connected devices.
• Do not turn off this instrument when settings are being modified. Otherwise, all or part of the program settings may be lost.
• Do not block the ventilation holes of the unit or surrounding devices. An increase of internal temperature could cause failure.
• It is advised to back up the settings to the SD memory card or TM-X Navigator to prevent data loss in the event of system trouble or failure.

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs


Turn the power off immediately in the following cases. Using the unit in an abnormal condition could cause fire, electric shock, or accident.
Contact a local KEYENCE office for repair.
• If liquid, including water or chemicals, or debris enters the unit.
• If the system is dropped or the case is damaged.
• If abnormal smoke or odor is present.

Operating environment and conditions (precautions on installation/transportation)


To use the unit properly and safely, avoid installing this unit in the following locations. Failure to do so may cause fire, electric shock or malfunction.
• Locations that contain moisture or dust, or that are poorly ventilated.
• Locations where the unit is exposed to direct sunlight or temperature increases.
• Locations where there are flammable or corrosive gases.
• Locations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact.
• Locations where water, oil or chemicals may splash onto the unit.
• Locations that are prone to static electricity.

When installing or transporting the TM-X5120, hold both handles to prevent injuries or
damage due to the head falling.

• Keep the machine and cables as far as possible from high voltage lines and power lines. Otherwise, noise may cause malfunction or accidents.
• When connecting the cables, make sure to bundle the protective material, such as a spiral tube from outside. If they are bundled
directly, the load applied to the cables may be concentrated on the connector, which may cause a disconnection or short.
• The controller and other devices are precision components. To maintain performance, do not subject them to vibration or shock.

D64GB
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Safety Information for TM-X5000 Series

Maintenance
• Do not wipe the unit with a wet wipe, benzene, or thinner.
• If the unit has any dirt on it, wipe it off with a cloth moistened with a mild detergent, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.

Caution on wiring
Some of the I/O circuits of the controller are common internal terminals.
Exercise caution to avoid a potential difference between the common internal terminals due to the wiring or potential difference
between the external devices. There is a risk of fire occurring.

Insulated condition between each I/O circuit


Input terminal (IN2 to 6) Input circuit
COM_IN1
Input terminal (parallel I/O connector 2 to 16) Input circuit
COMIN2 (parallel I/O connector 1)
Poly Switch
Output terminal (OUT connector 1 to 2) Output circuit
COMOUT1
Poly Switch
Output terminal (OUT connector 3 to 4, 6 to 7) Output circuit
COMOUT_F
Poly Switch
Output terminal (parallel I/O connector 18 to 39) Output circuit
COMOUT2 (parallel I/O connector 17, 40)
RS-232C signal line RS-232C driver circuit
SG of RS-232C
Connector shield for Ethernet port
0V DC
Connector shield and signal GND for USB port
Connector shield and signal GND for RGB output
Earth terminal
Head connector shield Insulation resistance
10 MΩ
Head (FG)
Insulation resistance Internal GND
10MΩ
(*) Cable box Connector shield

0V DC, Connector shield and signal GND for USB port, Connector shield and signal GND for RGB output, and Head connector shield are all common via a
choke coil. Ensure that no potential difference occurs with the PC, PLC, etc. If a potential difference occurs, insulate the power supply of the controller (TM-X5000)
from the external device side.
* The cable box of the TM-X5120 is built into the head.

Cautions to take in an positive ground environment


When using TM-X Navigator with a PC connected via USB in a positive ground environment, ensure that the USB terminal is not grounded via the external
device. Make sure that the connectors (metallic part) of repeaters and cables, which are between the cable box and the controller, are not grounded.

(1) External devices Ground (2)


TM-X5000
such as PC
(3)
Earth USB USB cable USB GND
terminal GND

Head Head
connector
Cable box shield
(*) DC 24V

DC 24V
DC 0V

External devices such as a PC (1), the power supply of TM-X5000 (2), or the head connector shield (3) should be insulated from the positive ground terminal.
* The cable box of the TM-X5120 is built into the head.

2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Safety Information for TM-X5000 Series

For Optimal Performance of the TM-X5000 Series

Influence of ambient temperature


A change in the ambient temperature may cause the measurement to fluctuate. Be sure to keep it stabilized.
When the ambient temperature changes by 10 °C, it takes 60 minutes for the distribution of internal temperature to equalize.

Warming up
Wait approximately 30 minutes after the power is turned on before using the TM-X5000 Series. Otherwise, the measured value may gradually fluctuate
because the circuit is not immediately stable after the power is turned on.

Operating ambient light intensity level


Do not operate this device near lighting fixtures. If the unit must be used in such a location, install a light shielding board or similar device so that the light will
not affect the measurement.

Influence of dust or dirt


The measurement may fluctuate due to dirt, dust, or fluid such as water or oil in the following cases:
• Adhesion on the protective glass plate:
Blow the dirt off with clean air. If dirt persists, wipe the glass surface gently using a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
• Adhesion on the surface of the measuring target:
Blow the dirt off with clean air or wipe it off.
• Intrusion of floating or sprinkled dust or dirt into the light-axis range:
In this case, take corrective action with a protective cover or air purge.

Influence of vibration
When the measuring target is vibrating, the measured value may fluctuate.
In this case, increase the number of moving averages to achieve a more accurate value.

Measuring target
The measured value may fluctuate if the shapes or surfaces of the measuring targets vary.
In this case, use a target with known dimensions to perform appropriate correction using the scaling function.

Effect of atmospheric motions


Slow atmospheric motions may affect the measurement and result in fluctuation of the measured value.
In such a case, take the following countermeasures.
• Enclose the measurement area with an appropriate enclosure.
• Agitate the air between the measurement point and the workpiece more strongly with a fan.

3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Precautions on Regulations and Standards


CE and UKCA Marking (Controller/Head)
KEYENCE Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EU Directive(s) and UK regulations, based
on the following specifications.
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member States of European Union and in the United Kingdom.

z EMC Directive (CE) and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations (UKCA)


• Applicable standard : (BS) EN61326-1, Class A
• This product is designed for use in industrial environments.
• All of the cables used to connect the controller and external device should not exceed 30 m.
• Be sure to connect the ground terminal to a grounding.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that an end-product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive
and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations.
The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive and Electromagnetic
Compatibility Regulations.

CE and UKCA Marking (Hardware Key)


KEYENCE Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EU Directive(s) and UK regulations, based
on the following specifications.
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member States of European Union and in the United Kingdom.

z EMC Directive (CE) and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations (UKCA)


• Applicable Standard EMI : (BS) EN55032 :2015
EMS : (BS) EN55035 :2017
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that an end-product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive
and Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations.
The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive and Electromagnetic
Compatibility Regulations.

CSA Certificate
This product complies with the following CSA and UL standards and has been certified by CSA.
• Applicable Standard : CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
UL61010-1
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a product certified by CSA.
• Use the power supply below.
CSA/UL Listing certified power supply with Class 2 output specified by CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and NEC (National Electrical Code)
• Overvoltage category I
• Use this product under pollution degree 3.
• Use this product at the altitude of 2000 m or less.
• Mount the head on a metallic plate.
• Indoor use only.

North American Regulations


This product complies with the following North American regulations.
• Applicable regulation : FCC Part15 Subpart B, Class A Digital Device
ICES-003, Class A Digital Apparatus
• Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interface, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
• FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Best Management Practice for Perchlorate Materials - California only


This product uses components containing perchlorate material. When shipping this product or installing end-product containing this product to California,
you must label or mark the following statement on the exterior of all outer shipping packages and on consumer packages or you must include the following
statement in an instruction manual or MSDS accompanied with the product.
“Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

KC mark (Republic of Korea) (for Dedicated monitor for TM-X only)


사용자안내문
이 기기는 업무용 환경에서 사용할 목적으로 적합성평가를 받은 기기로서
가정용 환경에서 사용하 는 경우 전파간섭의 우려가 있습니다 .

4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Safety Precautions on LED product

Safety Precautions on LED product


The degree of risk of this product is shown below.
Light source Risk Group *
InGaN Green LED Exempt Group
* LED product is classified as shown below according to IEC 62471.
• Exempt Group Does not pose any photobiological hazard.
• Risk Group 1 (Low-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to normal behavioral limitations on exposure.
• Risk Group 2 (Moderate-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to the aversion response to ver bright light sources or due to thermal discomfort.
• Risk Group 3 (High-Risk) May pose a hazard even for momentary or brief exposure.

Software License Agreement


NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“THIS AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF
THE TM-X Navigator (“THIS SOFTWARE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU
DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE.

If you install, copy and or use all or a portion of this Software on a device or computer, you will be deemed to have agreed to all the terms of this Agreement,
and this Agreement will come into effect.

1. Definitions
1.1. “Use” or “using” refers to the accessing, installing, downloading, copying, operating and or otherwise benefiting from the utilization of this Software.
1.2. “This Software” denotes the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.
1.3. “User” or “User’s” infers the company or persons who have had the license to use this Software granted to them by KEYENCE.

2. Grant of License.
2.1. In compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE grants the nonexclusive and non-transferable license to install and use
this Software.
2.2. The granting of the license permits the single reproduction and or copying of this Software for the User’s backing up or archiving purposes.
2.3. This Software maybe installed on multiple devices and computers for the User’s benefit and use.
2.4. The transfer of this Software via devices and computers with this Software installed on them by the User to third parties is permitted. In such a case, the
third party who receives this Software may continue to use this Software in the same manner as the previous User.
2.5. With the transfer of this Software to a third party, the original User may install this Software to additional devices and computers for further use as
required. In such a case, the third party who receives this Software may continue to use this Software in the same manner as the previous User.
2.6. The User maintains and guarantees that any thirdparties (as detailed in the previous two sections) who receive and use this Software agree to this
license Agreement and comply with all the terms and conditions.

3. Restrictions.
3.1. This Software may not be modified by the User in any form except from the installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE.
3.2. The reverse engineering, decompiling or disassembling of this Software by any persons are not permitted.
3.3. Without the prior permission of KEYENCE, the User may not reproduce or copy this Software for selling or distributing to a third party.

4. Intellectual Property Rights.


Except as stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all rights, titles and interests in this Software, along with all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other
intellectual property rights.

5. Disclaimer.
This Software is licensed to the User “AS IS” and without any warranty of any kind. In no event does KEYENCE or its suppliers accept or assume any liability
for any damages, claims, costs or profit loss as a result of operating this Software.

6. Termination.
6.1. Under this Agreement the User’s license will automatically terminate if this Software and any associated copies of this Software are destroyed or
voluntarily returned to KEYENCE.
6.2. Under this Agreement the User’s license will terminate immediately and automatically without any notice from KEYENCE if there is any failure to comply
with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Upon termination, the using of this Software shall cease, and all copies (full or partial) of this
Software should be destroyed or returned to KEYENCE.
6.3. Compensation will be sought by KEYENCE should any violation or breach of this Agreement result in any incurred costs or lost profit to KEYENCE.

7. Governing Law.
7.1. This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of Japan.
7.2. If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, the rest of this Agreement will remain intact, valid and enforceable according to the
associated terms and conditions.

5
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Changes to each version of the TM-X5000 Series

Changes to each version of the TM-X5000 Series


Major Changes to Ver. 1.1 Main Changes to Ver. 1.2

Additions/changes related to tools Additions/changes related to head settings


• The following tools were added: • Added “Trigger Multiple Times” to the external trigger (Page 3-10).
• Element: Gauge line • 25 µs, 50 µs, and 100 µs can now be selected for the exposure time
• Auxiliary: Line through point, approximate line, median circle, (Page 3-10).
approximate circle, figure circle • In addition to average image, the image array operations of dark and bright
• Application: Gap composition were added to create “Image Composition” (Page 3-10).
• The [List Editor] function was added to enable tolerance and other
The above functions can be used with the controller of
settings to be edited all at once (Page 3-7).
Ver.1.2.**** and the head of Ver.1.0.0101.
• Zero reset can now be input by tool from the dedicated monitor for TM-X The head can be upgraded by upgrading the controller to
and TM-X Navigator (Page 3-9). which the head is connected.
• The processing time for each tool is now displayed.
• Many tools, such as peak line and center line, can now be selected as
the base line for the width of specific position tool (Page 3-33). Additions/changes related to tools
• The result of [Region Adjustment at Setting] in the [Specify Region] is
• The type of image (standard image/head image/archived image) that is
now kept (Page 3-29).
being displayed on the main screen of the measurement settings screen
• Fitting can now be done on the base line in [Region Adjustment at
in [Setup] mode can be changed. (Page 3-6).
Setting] in the [Specify Region] (Page 3-29).
• Added maximum and minimum widths to the external radius tool
• An [Arbitrary Line] and [Arbitrary Point] can now be fitted on an existing
(Page 3-26).
line and point respectively (Page 3-32).
• [None (absolute value)], [Forward], and [Reverse] can now be selected
for [+/- Direction] in the measurement value for the LN - LN, LN - PT, PT
- PT, CL - CL, CL - LN, and CL - PT tools(Page 3-27).
Additions/changes related to [Utility] • Up to four position correction groups can now be set in one processing
• Measurement no longer stops when the maximum number of points pattern (Page 3-12).
(20,000) is exceeded with the statistics function (Page 3-40). • The elements for the position correction and measurement tools and
• Improved support for CSV output on the dedicated monitor for TM-X, measurement time can now be checked on a list (Page 3-7).
clearing of statistical data accumulated with the clear button, and others • [Batch Test] can now be run for archived images in setup mode
(Page 3-40). (Page 3-39).
• Added a histogram to the statistics function (Page 3-41). • Added [Nearest Hold] and [Other Tool Reference Hold] to hold mode
(Page 3-27).
• [Inscribed] and [Circumscribed] can now be selected for circle diameter,
circle, approximate circle, and combined circle (Page 3-30).
Additions/changes related to [Global] Settings • Added the [Batch LN - PT] tool to the application tools (Page 3-20).
• Added a security function (Page 4-6). • Added [Circle] to the pattern region of a pattern search (Page 3-13).
• Added [Tool Memory Usage] to system information (Page 4-6). • Added [Select List] when selecting an element tool from the
• Added support for Simplified Chinese and German (Page 4-6). measurement tools (Page 3-5).
• Added “Decimal Point Notation” to the system language and enabled • Elements can now be re-selected when editing measurement tools
periods and commas to be selected (Page 4-6). (Page 3-5).

Additions/changes related to the [Edit] menu Additions/changes related to [Utility]


• Added main view numeric display colors and enabled numbers to be • Added [EtherCAT Memory Monitor] in accordance with support for
displayed in green (when OK) and red (when NG) (Page 3-36). EtherCAT (Page 4-10).
• An active processing pattern can now be displayed in Run mode (Page • [Archived Image Settings] can now be configured from utilities (Page 4-11).
3-36). • [Head-to-head Adjustment Execution] and [Head-to-head Adjustment
• Added support for saving display resolution (low and high resolution) in Setting] were added to measure a large object with two heads (Page
Run mode (Page 3-36). 4-11).

Other additions/changes Additions/changes related to [Global] Settings


• Added [PC] (when using TM-X Navigator) to selection for head • The minute and second of arc can now be selected for the angle display
changeover and image output destination and head selection when unit (Page 4-6).
saving with the archived image function (Page 3-38). • EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT units are now supported
• The screen can now be captured on any screen by right-clicking (Page (Page 4-4).
3-7). • Added support for Korean and Thai (Page 4-6).
• Omitted images (1/X omissions) can now be used in the following ways: • Added [Communication Expansion Unit] to [Connection Devices]
• Loaded from import image settings and used to check measurement under [System Information] in accordance with adding support for the
values against the original image (Page 3-38). communication expansion unit (Page 4-6).
• Used in measurement on the image strip (Page 7-4).

Additions/changes related to the [Edit] menu
Added support for [Multiple Copy] and [Inverted Copy] as functions when
copying tools (Page 3-5).

Other additions/changes
• Changed the save format for capture image to JPEG.
• Images can now be displayed in high resolution during a trial run.
• The statistical analysis trend graph can now be enlarged vertically and
horizontally.
• Added support for [Automatic Connection] when connecting from the
dedicated monitor for TM-X (TM-MP120) or TM-X Navigator to the
controller (Page 3-2).

6
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Changes to each version of the TM-X5000 Series

Main Changes to Ver. 1.3 Main Changes to Ver. 1.4

Additions/changes related to tools Additions/changes related to head settings


• The following tools were added: • Added “Mask Region” to optical axis alignment (Page 3-10).
• Element : Pitch element (circle/arc distance),
Pitch element (straight line angle), Contour extraction,
OBD element (Over Ball Diameter) Additions/changes related to tools
• Application : Master difference (contour), Ring thickness, Thread
• Geometrical tolerance : Contour profile • Added [Profile Intersection] and [Tool Reference (Point)] to auxiliary tool.
• The angle and distance from the reference can now be specified in • Changed [Pitch Count] to [Count].
[Region Adjustment at Setting] in [Specify Region] (Page 3-29). • In [Width of Specific Position], the same line can now be set as the basis
• The center line/center of the circle for position correction can now be for multiple positions consecutively (Page 3-33).
specified as a reference in [Region Adjustment at Setting] in [Specify • In [Calculation], [Standard] and [Advanced] can now be selected (Page
Region] (Page 3-29). 3-20). In [Advanced], [Variables], [Measured Value], [Measurement
• Black width ratio can now be specified with [Gauge Width] in the gauge Information], [Judgment Result] and [Position Correction Result] now
line tool (Page 3-28). can be referred to.
• A line, point, circle, chamfer, and corner arc can now be specified as a • In [Gap], the processing mode (Stable/Fast) can now be selected (Page
reference tool (Page 3-29). 3-33).
• Tool position correction can now be changed with the list editor (Page • In [OBD Element], circle in the chamfer can now be set as a range (Page
3-7). 3-33).
• The display color of “Element” and “Auxiliary” tool can now be changed
(Page 3-30).
• In the [Master Difference (Area)], process to include the black frame that
Additions/changes related to [Global] Settings is in the non-measurement range in the measurement range can now be
Added support for Chinese (Traditional), French, Italian, Mexican Spanish, selected (Page 3-28).
Czech, Hungarian, and Polish (Page 4-6).

Additions/changes related to [Utility]


Additions/changes related to the [Edit] menu • The data used in the statistics can now be selected from [Start loading
• The LN - LN tool can now be replaced with the diameter tool (Page 3-5). past data] or [Start from the latest data] (Page 3-40).
• The software now supports the copying of recipes (Page 3-11)/(Page 3-36). • In [Head-to-head Adjustment Execution], the positions between heads
can now be manually adjusted (Page 4-11).

Other additions/changes
• The software now supports the CAD import function (Page 7-6). Additions/changes related to commands.
• The software now supports BMP image output in simple monitor output The following commands were added:
(Page 3-35). • ICCW: write image composition capture cycle (Page 5-16)
• ICCR: read image composition capture cycle (Page 5-16)
• TSW: write tool settings (Page 5-17)
• TSR: read tool settings (Page 5-17)
• TSC: clear tool settings (Page 5-18)
• OASR: obtain optical axis state (Page 5-18)

Additions/changes related to the [Edit] menu


• [Delete All Unreferenced Tools] is now available (Page 3-36).
• The imaging files can now be saved (Page 3-7).
• The settings of [Excel Transfer Setting] can now be saved (Page 3-36).

Other additions/changes
• On the setup screen of [Position Correction], [Image Display] is now
available.
• In [Output Settings] → [Image Output] → [Detailed Settings], JPG can
now be selected for [File Format] (Page 3-35).
• For the thumbnail images displayed in [Archived Image] and [Batch
Test], the accumulated number of images and their image number
are now displayed. In addition, the ID number of the selected image is
displayed (Page 3-38).
• TM-X Navigator is now compatible with Windows11 Pro (Page 7-3).

7
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Changes to each version of the TM-X5000 Series

Main Changes to Ver. 1.5

Additions/changes related to the compatible


hardware
It is now compatible with TM-X5120.

Additions/changes related to tools


• In [Calculation (Advanced)], the row number is now displayed on the left
side of the input field. Additionally, the row number is displayed when a
syntax error occurs.
• Added guides to [Advanced Edge Settings].

Additions/changes related to commands.


The following commands were added:
• S0: switch to setup mode(Page 5-4)
• R0: switch to run mode(Page 5-4)
• STW: replace the externally specified string(Page 5-11)
• STR: read the externally specified string(Page 5-11)

Other additions/changes
In [Output Settings] → [File Naming Rule], [Custom] is now available(Page
3-35).

8
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Compatibility

Compatibility
z Compatibility of controller versions with the dedicated
monitor for TM-X (TM-MP120)*
Dedicated monitor for TM-X (TM-MP120)

Ver.1.0.xxxx Ver.1.1.xxxx Ver1.2.xxxx Ver1.3.xxxx Ver1.4.xxxx Ver1.5.xxxx

Ver.1.0.xxxx ü ü ü ü ü ü

Ver.1.1.xxxx ü ü ü ü ü

Ver1.2.xxxx ü ü ü ü
Controller
Ver1.3.xxxx ü ü ü

Ver1.4.xxxx ü ü

Ver1.5.xxxx ü

ü: Connection possible
: Connection is possible by upgrading the dedicated monitor for TM-X.

* This is the same as when connecting from the TM-X Navigator to the
controller (terminal function).

z Compatibility of controller* versions with program files


Program File

Ver.1.0.xxxx Ver.1.1.xxxx Ver1.2.xxxx Ver1.3.xxxx Ver1.4.xxxx Ver1.5.xxxx

Ver.1.0.xxxx ü

Ver.1.1.xxxx ü ü

Ver1.2.xxxx ü ü ü
Controller
Ver1.3.xxxx ü ü ü ü

Ver1.4.xxxx ü ü ü ü ü

Ver1.5.xxxx ü ü ü ü ü ü

ü: Can be loaded
: Higher version functions are not available, but files can be loaded.

* This is the same for the TM-X Navigator simulator.

9
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual

1
Preparation for Use

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Controller (TM-X5000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Head (TM-X5006 / TM-X5040 / TM-X5065/ TM-X5120) . . . . . . . 1-4
Dedicated monitor for TM-X (TM-MP120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Communication Expansion Unit
(CB-NEC20E/CB-NEP20E/CB-NPN20E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

List of Optional Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1-1
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual System Configuration

System Configuration
• When connecting two heads, different models of the TM-X5000 series heads can be connected to one controller.
• By using the head connection extension cable and the repeater for head connection extension, the distance between the controller and the head
can be extended up to 30 m.
It will be 30m with the following connection;
“Controller” ‒ “CB-C10R (10m)” ‒ “TM-CX10U (Repeater)” ‒ “CB-C10RX(10m)” ‒ “TM-CX10U (Repeater)” ‒ “CB-C10RX (10m)” ‒ “Receiver head”
• The connection cable between the transmitter head and the receiver head can be extended up to 3 m using the transmitter-to-receiver cable.

z System configuration example 1


SD memory card

Controller

USB
TM-X Navigator

USB

24 V DC power supply
Head connection cable
Ethernet (3m/5m/10m)

Dedicated monitor
for TM-X

PLC Head B
Mouse

Head A

When using a USB cable, either the dedicated monitor for TM-X or the PC (TM-X Navigator) will be connected to the controller.

z System configuration example 2


SD memory card

Controller

USB
TM-X Navigator

Head connection cable


(3m/5m/10m)

24 V DC power supply

Dedicated monitor for


TM-X

Ethernet

HUB

Mouse

Head B

Head A

PLC

1-2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Part Names and Functions

Part Names and Functions


Controller (TM-X5000) No Name Function

1 POWER LED Lights green when power is supplied to this unit.


1 2
Indicates the operating state of the controller.
7 2 ERROR LED • Light off : Normal operation
• Light on (Red) : Error
3
12
The port to connect RS-232C cable.
3 RS-232C port
4 (OP-26487: 2.5 m, sold separately)

8 Simple monitor
13 16
4 output The simple screen is output only in the Run mode.
5 (RGB output)
14 9 The port used to connect the second sensor head
10 5 Head B port
cable to the controller.
6
15
The port used to connect the sensor head cable to
11 the controller.
6 Head A port
Use the head A connector if only
using one head.

7 USB connector The connector used to connect the USB cable.

Insert the SD memory card.


8 SD2 slot (for storing inspection settings and measurement
data)

Insert the SD memory card.


(for storing inspection settings and environmental
settings)
The supplied SD memory card (CA-SD1G : 1GB) is
9 SD1 slot inserted as SD card 1.

The SD card 1 is required to operate


this unit.

Connect USB 3.0 or USB 2.0 compatible HDD.

The unit’s power GND (0 V) is


shared in common with the
connector shield and signal GND.
If there is a potential difference
with the connection for the
USB HDD, this may result in
breakdowns or malfunctions of
the unit and the USB HDD.

10 USB HDD port If there are concerns about the potential difference
with the connections, then use a USB HDD which
supports bus-powered drives.
• The bus power supply capability of this unit is
900 mA (USB 3.0 compliant).
• Contact the manufacturer of the USB HDD to
check whether the USB HDD works on bus
power.
• Do not use a USB hub as it may lead to
insufficient power supply and/or lower data
transfer rate.

11 Ethernet port Use to connect an Ethernet cable.

Parallel I/O Parallel I/O interface (40 pins) used for signal input/
12
connector output.

13 Output terminal Terminal for signal output (9-pin).

14 Input terminal Terminal for signal input (6-pin).

Power and ground Used to connect power (24 VDC) and the ground
15
terminals wire to the system.

Communication
expansion unit Used to connect the communication expansion
16
connector unit.
(right side)

1-3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Part Names and Functions

Head (TM-X5006 / TM-X5040 / TM-X5065/ Dedicated monitor for TM-X (TM-MP120)


TM-X5120)

z TM-X5006
2 3
4 1
2

1
6
3
7

8
9

z TM-X5040 / TM-X5065 / TM-X5120


2 3
4

1
6

5 9
6 4 5 7

No Name Function

Displays the screen image output from the


No Name Function 1 Display
controller.
The part that receives the light from the 2 POWER indicator Light illuminates when power is input. (Green)
1 Receiver head
Transmitter head.
3
Receiver cover
2 Protects the inside of the receiver head.
glass 4 USB Connect a controller or mouse.
Transmitter cover 5
3 Protects the inside of the transmitter head.
glass
Used when connecting to the controller via
4 Transmitter head The part that emits the light for measurement. Ethernet.
• Orange : Lights on when operating at 1 Gbps.
• Connect to the transmitter-to-receiver cable of 6 LAN
• Green : Lights on when linked with the other
the transmitter head.
Transmitter-to- device. Flashes when data is being
5 (TM-X5006)
receiver cable sent or received.
• Connect to the transmitter head connector.
(TM-X5040, TM-X5065, TM-X5120) Power and ground Used to connect power (24 VDC) and the ground
7
terminals wire to the system.
Transmitter/receiver Attach and fix the transmitter head and the
6
base receiver head.

The measurement range in the light transmitting


7 Focus mark to receiving direction is shown when the head is
attached to the transmitter/receiver base.

Connect to the transmitter-to-receiver cable of the


Transmitter-to-
8 receiver head.
receiver cable
(TM-X5006 only)

• Connect the head connection cable.


(Other than TM-X5120)
9 Cable box
• The TM-X5120 connects the head connection
cable directly to the receiver head.

1-4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Part Names and Functions

Communication Expansion Unit (CB-NEC20E/CB-NEP20E/CB-NPN20E)


The communication expansion unit can be used with the controller of Ver.1.2.****.

z EtherCAT Unit (CB-NEC20E: Optional)


No Name Function

2 Install the communication expansion unit on the right-hand side of the controller.
Connector on
1
3 controller side Only one EtherCAT unit can be connected to the controller.

This indicates the state of EtherCAT communication (green).


On: In the OPERATIONAL state.
PDO and mailbox communications are functioning normally.
4
1 RUN indicator • Single flash*1: In the safe-operational state.
2 • Blinking*2: In the pre-operational state.
5 (RUN)
• OFF: In the INIT state.
*1: The light goes on for 0.2 seconds and then turns off for 1 second repeatedly.
*2: The light goes on for 0.2 seconds and then turns off for 0.2 seconds repeatedly.

This indicates an error in EtherCAT communication (red).


• Double flash*1: Watchdog timeout.
• Check that the unit is connected correctly to the master.
• Make sure the master is operating correctly.
• Blinking*2: Configuration error.
• Check that a non-specified process data object is not assigned to Sync Manager.
ERR indicator
3 • OFF: No error has occurred.
(ERR)
*1: T he light goes on for 0.2 seconds, turns off for 0.2 seconds, turns on for 0.2 seconds, and then
turns off for 1 second repeatedly.
*2: The light goes on for 0.2 seconds and then turns off for 0.2 seconds repeatedly.
If [External Input Request] is not assigned to the process data object, the LED off state
does not change even if the connection to the master is disconnected.

4 IN port Used to connect the LAN cable.

5 OUT port Used to connect the LAN cable.

z EtherNet/IP Unit (CB-NEP20E: Optional)


No Name Function

2 Install the communication expansion unit on the right-hand side of the controller.
Connector on
1
3 controller side Only one EtherNet/IP unit can be connected to the controller.

This indicates the state of the EtherNet/IP communication.


• OFF: The power is turned off or the IP address is not set.
Network Status LED • Green(ON): A connection has been established.
4 2
1 (NS) • Green (blinking): A connection has not been established.
5 • Red (ON): A fatal error (such as IP address duplication) has occurred.
• Red (blinking): The connection timed out.

Indicates the state of the communication expansion unit.


• OFF: The power is turned off.
• Green (ON): The scanner is in the Run state and being controlled.
Module Status LED
3 • Green (blinking): The device is not set or the scanner is in the Idle state.
(MS)
• Red (ON): A critical fault (such as an exception state or a fatal error) occurred.
• Red (blinking): The fault is recoverable. The module is set, but the saved parameter differs to the
parameter currently in use.

4 P1 port Used to connect the LAN cable.

5 P2 port Used to connect the LAN cable.

1-5
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Part Names and Functions

z PROFINET Unit (CB-NPN20E: Optional)


No Name Function

2 Install the communication expansion unit on the right-hand side of the controller.
Connector on
1
3 controller side Only one PROFINET unit can be connected to the controller.

This indicates the state of the PROFINET communication.


• OFF: The power is turned off.
A connection with the I/O controller has not been established.
4
1 • Green (ON): A connection with the I/O controller has been established and the I/O
5 controller is in the Run state.
• Green (flashes once): A connection with the I/O controller was established, but the I/O controller
Network Status LED
2 is in the Stop state or the IO data is corrupt.
(NS)
• Green (flashing): The network node is being identified from the engineering tool.
• Red (ON): A critical internal error has occurred.
(It is used in combination with the red Module Status LED.)
• Red (flashes once): The Station Name is not set.
• Red (flashes twice): The IP address is not set.
• Red (flashes three times): The settings specified from the I/O controller and the actual settings differ.

Indicates the state of the communication expansion unit.


• OFF: The power is turned off or the communication expansion unit has not been
initialized.
• Green (ON): Initialization of the communication expansion unit has completed.
• Green (flashes once): A diagnostic event exists.
Module Status LED
3 • Red (ON) (when the Network Status LED is red (ON)): A critical internal error has occurred.
(MS)
• Red (ON) (when Network Status LED is a state other than red (ON)):
The communication expansion unit is in the Exception state.
• Alternating between solid red and green:
The firmware is updating. Do not turn off the power to this device. Turning
off the power during this phase may damage the device.

4 P1 port Used to connect the LAN cable.

5 P2 port Used to connect the LAN cable.

1-6
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Optional Products

List of Optional Products


Name Model Description

Dedicated mouse OP-87506 Connects to the dedicated monitor (TM-MP120).

Dedicated monitor mount OP-87262 Installation mount for the dedicated monitor (TM-MP120).

Connector extension cable OP-51657 Cable (40 pins) for the parallel I/O interface.

RS-232C communications cable OP-26487 A communications cable (6 pole, 6 core, 2.5 m) for RS-232C.

RS-232C connector OP-26486 D-sub 9-pin connector (female) for RS-232C.

USB 2.0 cable OP-35331 A USB cable (3 m) used to connect to the dedicated monitor or PC (TM-X Navigator).

An Ethernet cable (3 m) used to connect to an external device such as the dedicated


Ethernet cable OP-66843
monitor, PC (TM-X Navigator), or PLC.

CA-SD16G SD memory card (16 GB: Industrial specification)

SD memory card CA-SD4G SD memory card (4 GB: Industrial specification)

CA-SD1G SD memory card (1 GB: Industrial specification)

Protective cover for the TM-X5040.


Screws in to the transmitter head and the receiver head.
OP-88575
• Protective cover unit x 2
• M3 x L8 hexagon socket bolt x 8

Protective cover for the TM-X5065.


Screws in to the transmitter head and the receiver head.
Protective cover OP-88576
• Protective cover unit x 2
• M3 x L8 hexagon socket bolt x 8

Protective cover for the TM-X5120.


Screws in to the transmitter head and the receiver head.
OP-88775
• Protective cover unit x 2
• M4 x L50 hexagon socket bolt x 8

OP-87033 An extension cable (1 m) that connects the transmitter head and receiver head.
Transmitter-to-receiver cable
OP-87034 An extension cable (3m) that connects the transmitter head and receiver head.

1-7
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual

2
Installing
the TM-X5000 Series
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Installing the Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Attaching the Protective Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Installing the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Installing the Communication expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Installing the Dedicated Monitor for TM-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Connecting the Power to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Connecting the Power to the Dedicated monitor for TM-X . . . . . 2-8

How to use the terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2-1
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Installation and Wiring

Installation and Wiring


Installing the Head Installation method

The sensor head can be installed according to the specific environment „ Using the transmitter/receiver base for installation
The transmitter head and receiver head are fixed to the transmitter/
and target.
receiver base at the time of shipment.
This section explains the method to use the supplied transmitter/receiver
This section explains how to install to the device using the transmitter/
base.
receiver base (ex. TM-X5040).
The same method can be used for TM-X5006, TM-X5065, and TM-X5120.
Caution for installation
When installing the sensor heads, make sure the following conditions are z To tighten screws from above
met. Use the hexagon socket bolt (included)
to fix through the installation holes of the
„ Parallel position top of transmitter/receiver base.
• Tightening torque maximum value
TM-X5006 : 1.5 N·m
TM-X5040 : 1.5 N·m
TM-X5065 : 3.0 N·m
TM-X5120 : 15.0 N·m
Receiver head Transmitter head
within ±1 mm

z To tighten screws from below


Fix through the installation holes on the
Receiver head Transmitter head bottom of transmitter/receiver base.
within ±1 mm
• Hole
„ Tilt position TM-X5006 : M4 depth 18mm
TM-X5040 : M4 depth 20mm
TM-X5065 : M5 depth 20mm
TM-X5120 : M8 depth 16mm
• Tightening torque maximum value
TM-X5006 : 1.5 N·m
Receiver head Transmitter head TM-X5040 : 1.5 N·m
within ±0.1° TM-X5065 : 3.0 N·m
TM-X5120 : 15.0 N·m

Receiver head Transmitter head


within ±0.1°

Set the angle of the transmitter head within ±0.1° so that the
light from the transmitter head enters parallel to the main axis
of the receiver head. For installation, use the [Optical axis
alignment] function to install within the range.
“Optical Axis Alignment” (Page 3-10)

Installations for specific environments


„ When a light source is present near the head
The light reflected from the target may enter the receiver and cause a
measurement error.
In such cases, take the following countermeasures.
• Block the light so that the light from the interfering source (fluorescent
light or sunlight) does not hit the target.
• Apply image mask settings as needed.
Light source

Target
Receiver head Transmitter head

Light source

Shielding object

Receiver head Transmitter head

2-2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Installation and Wiring

„ Not using the transmitter/receiver base for


installation Attaching the Protective Cover
This section explains how to use the transmitter head and receiver head
after removing them from the transmitter/receiver base (ex. TM-X5040). Attaching the protective cover (sold separately) reduces the amount of
The same method can be used for TM-X5006, TM-X5065, and TM-X5120. dust that adheres to the glass covers on the transmitter and receiver.
This section describes how to attach the protective cover and handling

1 Loosen the bolts from the bottom of transmitter/receiver


base and remove the heads.
precautions.

Checking the Package Contents


z OP-88575 z OP-88775
(for TM-X5040) (for TM-X5120)
• Protective cover unit x 2 • Protective cover unit x 2

With the head still fixed to the transmitter/receiver base, it is • M3 x L8


also possible to install the head using the mounting holes on hexagon socket bolt x 8
the side.
z OP-88576
2 Install the transmitter head and receiver head.
Use the installation holes on the sides as shown below. Use the hexagon
(for TM-X5065)
• Protective cover unit x 2
socket bolt (included).
• Tightening torque maximum value • M4 x L50
hexagon socket bolt x 8
TM-X5006 : 0.6 N·m TM-X5065 : 3.0 N·m
TM-X5040 : 1.5 N·m TM-X5120 : 15.0 N·m

TM-X5006/5040/5065 TM-X5120

• M3 x L8
hexagon socket bolt x 8

Installation method

1 Blow any grime or dust off the glass with clean air.

2 Attach the protective cover to the transmitter or receiver


on the head with the correct orientation.

The installation holes on the bottom of the head can be used


to mount as shown.
• Hole
TM-X5006 : M4 depth 6mm
TM-X5040 : M4 depth 6mm
TM-X5065 : M4 depth 6mm
TM-X5120 : M8 depth 16mm
• Tightening torque
maximum value
TM-X5006 : 2.5N·m
TM-X5040 : 2.5N·m
TM-X5065 : 2.5N·m
TM-X5120 : 15.0N·m

Align orientation

For TM-X5120, align the pins (x2) on the bottom of the


protective cover with the slot on the head to install the
protective cover.

3 Secure with the four included hexagon screws.


Tightening torque: 0.62 N•m or lower

Maintenance
If any grime or dust has adhered to the glass, blow it off with clean air. If
the soiling is particularly bad, wipe the glass surface gently using a soft
cloth moistened with alcohol (IPA, ethanol, or the like).

2-3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Installation and Wiring

Installing the Controller Installing the Controller

Mount the controller to the DIN rail or use the screw from holes on the
„ Mounting the controller to the DIN rail
The controller is designed to be mounted on a DIN rail. Pull the tab on the
bottom to secure it securely. bottom in the direction of the arrow to mount or dismount the controller.
• Do not install the controller in a location with lots of
dust or water vapor. The controller does not have a
mechanism to protect it from dust or water. Dust or
water entering the controller can cause damage to
the controller.
• Turn off the controller when connecting or
disconnecting a cable or terminal block. Connecting
or disconnecting a cable or terminal block while
connected to a power source may damage the
controller or peripheral devices.

Cautions on the installation direction of the


controller
The controller should be installed in the direction of the circled figure
below. Do not install it in any other direction.
Tab

„ Mounting to the bottom panel

Precautions on cooling of the controller at the


installation location
• For ventilation, secure free space of 50 mm or more above the controller
and 50 mm or more for both sides. In addition, to ensure the safe
connection of the cable, secure 90 mm or more of free space in front of
the connector panel of the controller.
• When two or more controllers are installed side by side, secure free M4 Screw
space of 50 mm or more between controllers, and 50mm or more on top
of both controllers. Mount the controller in a stable location that is free
from vibration.

50 mm 50 mm
Installing the Communication expansion unit
• Turn off the controller when installing or removing
the communication expansion unit. Installing or
50 mm 50 mm 50 mm removing the communication expansion unit while
connected to a power source may damage the
controller or peripheral devices.
• If the communication expansion unit is not
connected, do not remove the connector protection
50 mm 50 mm sticker. Using this unit with the connector exposed
may cause damage to the controller.
Optional Communication Units Available:
*If spaces of 50 mm or more are ensured of even on the underside (EtherCAT: CB-NEC20E, EtherNet/IP: CB-NEP20E, PROFINET: CB-NPN20E)
orientations by DIN rail mounting, etc., then the units can be used at Remove the connector protection sticker from the communication
higher than ambient temperatures. expansion unit connector on the right side of the controller and install the
communication expansion unit.
• Do not block the ventilation holes located on the top
and bottom panels of the controller unit. Doing so
may cause heat to build up inside the unit, which
may result in malfunction.
• If the temperature inside the control panel
(temperature at the top of the controller) exceeds
the rating, use forced air-cooling or increase the
free space around the system to improve ventilation
until the operating ambient temperature decreases
below the rating.
• When installing the controller on a surface, pierce
holes in the surface below the ventilation openings
on the bottom of the controller or take appropriate
action to ensure that ventilation flows from the
bottom of the controller to the top.

2-4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Installation and Wiring

Installing the Dedicated Monitor for TM-X


3 Fix the dedicated monitor for TM-X onto the panel using
the mounting fixtures and tighten the screws on the
mounting fixtures.
Description of how to mount the front side of the dedicated monitor for TM-X. • Mounting fixtures are mounted on the sides (four places on top and
Mounting fixtures (supplied parts) are required for mounting. bottom) of the dedicated monitor.
After attaching all of the mounting fixtures, tighten starting from the short
„ Mounting angle side in the order shown below. (i.e., from (1) to (4))
The mounting angle is restricted by ambient • Please confirm the mounting fixtures is next to the front side (backside
temperature. of dedicated monitor for TM-X) before tightening.
Adjust the mounting angle to suit the mounting
(1)
circumstances.
Vertical direction
Ambient temperature : 0 to 50 °C
(4)
Ambient temperature:
0 to 40 °C

(2)

15° 15°
30°
(3)

• Please ensure to use all the mounting fixtures (x4)


for installing the dedicated monitor for TM-X.
Horizontal direction • In the case that only one of the short sides of
the dedicated monitor for TM-X is mounted or no
sufficient number of fixtures are used, the Protection
„ Panel installation IP65f cannot be guaranteed.
• Tighten with the specified torque (0.3 to 0.5 N·m).
1 Cut open a mounting space at the size shown below for
fitting the dedicated monitor for TM-X.
• Even when tightened with the specified torque
the display sheet may become wrinkled or bent
depending on how it is tightened. This will not affect
operation.

The dedicated monitor for TM-X can not only be installed


to the panel bracket, it can be installed to the monitor stand
(OP-87262 : optional).
+1
227.5 -0

+1
301.5 -0 Unit : mm

2 Insert the dedicated monitor for TM-X into the opening of


the industrial control panel for mounting.

2-5
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Installation and Wiring

Wiring
2 Connect the cable connector between the transmitter
head and receiver head.
The connection cable between the transmitter head and
the receiver head can be extended up to 3 m using the
transmitter-to-receiver cable.
Controller
z TM-X5006
Align the connector and insert, then turn the fixing ring to fix. (They are
connected at the time of shipment.)
Head connection cable
(3m/5m/10m)

Fixing ring
24V DC power
supply

z TM-X5040/TM-X5065/TM-X5120
Align the connector and insert to the transmitter head connector, then turn
the fixing ring to fix. (They are connected at the time of shipment.)
Dedicated
monitor for
TM-X

Mouse Fixing ring

Head B 3 Connect the head to the head connection cable.


Align the connector and insert, then turn the fixing ring to fix.

Head A

• Be sure to turn off the power to the controller before Fixing ring
connecting/disconnecting cables. Failure to do so
may cause malfunction.
• Plug in the connector making sure its orientation
is correct. Inserting the connector in the wrong
orientation may break the connector pins and result
in a malfunction. • Use the screws to fix and install the cable box since
directly damage might be caused if the cable box
connector is accidentally grounded.
• Make sure to connect the frame ground terminal for the
• Since there is no cable box in the TM-X5120, connect
24 VDC power source to a class D ground.
the head connection cable directly to the receiver
• Different models of the TM-X 5000 series heads can be
head.
connected to one controller.
Plug in the connector making sure its orientation is

1 Connect the head connection cable to the head port of


the controller.
correct. Inserting the connector in the wrong orientation
may break the connector pins and result in a malfunction.

If connecting only a single head, connect it to the head A port. z When using a head connection extension cable
Check that a clicking sound is heard, confirming that the cables are The cable that connects the head and the controller can be extended by
securely fixed. When removing the cables, pull them out while pressing using the head connection extension cable.
the buttons on both sides of the connector.

Head connection extension Repeater for head


cable connection extension

Use the screws to fix and install the “Repeater for head
connection extension” since damage might be caused
if the connector of “Repeater for head connection
extension” is accidentally grounded.

By using the head connection extension cable and the


repeater for head connection extension, the distance between
the controller and the head can be extended up to 30 m.
It will be 30m with the following connection;
“Controller” ‒ “CB-C10R (10m)” ‒ “TM-CX10U (Repeater)” ‒
“CB-C10RX(10m)” ‒ “TM-CX10U (Repeater)” ‒
“CB-C10RX (10m)” ‒ “Receiver head”

2-6
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Installation and Wiring

4 Connect the dedicated monitor for TM-X and controller


with a USB cable. Connecting the Power to the Controller
Use wiring with a temperature rating of 80°C or more.

• Use electrical wiring with AWG14 to AWG22.


Round terminal Y-shape terminal

USB cable 5.8 mm or less 5.8 mm or less


• Make sure to connect the frame ground terminal for
the 24 V DC power source to a class D ground.
• Tighten the screws with a torque of 0.5 to 0.75 N·m.

1 Connect 24 V DC and 0 V to the power terminal.

• The dedicated monitor for TM-X and controller can be Connecting to 24V DC
Connecting to 0 V DC

2
connected by using an Ethernet cable.
• When using a USB cable, either the dedicated monitor Connect the ground wire to the grounding terminal.
for TM-X or the PC (TM-X Navigator) will be connected
to the controller.

5 Connect a mouse to the USB connector of the dedicated


monitor for TM-X.

Connect ground wire here

• Ground each device separately.


• Use a Class D ground.
• Keep ground resistance to 100Ω or less.
• Keep the ground wire as short as possible.
• If it is not possible to ground each device separately,
ground them together. However, make sure that the
electrical cables are the same length.

Other Other
Main unit device Main unit device

A B

Ground per Class D A=B


Ground resistance 100Ω
Ground per Class D
Ground resistance 100Ω

Other
Main unit device

B
A

A>B
A<B

2-7
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual How to use the terminal block

Connecting the Power to the Dedicated


monitor for TM-X
How to use the terminal block
This section explains how to use the terminal block.

1 Connect 24 V DC and 0 V to the power terminal. Use wiring with a temperature rating of 80 °C or more.

• Use a flat head screwdriver to connect the power


supply to the input terminals.
• Tighten the screws with a torque of 0.25 N·m or less.
• Use electrical wiring with AWG16 to AWG28.
• Do not solder (pre-solder) the processed end of the
wire.
• The wire should be inserted all the way into the
terminal block.
• Attach the wire to the terminal block directly, without
Connect Connect 0 V DC using a solderless terminal.
24 V DC

2 Connect the ground wire to the grounding terminal. 1 Remove the connector terminal block from the controller.

Connect ground wire here 2 Loosen the screw of the connector terminal block using
a flat head screwdriver.
• Ground each device separately.
• Use a Class D ground.
• Keep ground resistance to 100Ω or less.
• Keep the ground wire as short as possible. Flathead screwdriver
• If it is not possible to ground each device separately,
ground them together. However, make sure that the
electrical cables are the same length.

Other Other
Main unit device Main unit device

A B

3
Ground per Class D A=B
Ground resistance 100Ω After stripping the insulating sheath 7 mm, insert the
Ground per Class D
Ground resistance 100Ω wires and then tighten the screws.

Other
Main unit device

B
A

A>B
A<B

Pull each lead wire gently to confirm that it is properly


secured.

4 After connecting all the necessary wires, securely insert


the connector terminal block into the I/O connector as far
as it will go.

2-8
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual

3
Setup/Run

Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2


Workflow from Connection to Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Basic Operation of the Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Convenient Operation of the Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Layout of the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


[Setup] Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
[Run] Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Program Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10


Head Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Selecting a Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Register Reference Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Position Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Measurement Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36


Program Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Archived Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Operation Menu for Archived Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Batch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Trend graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3-1
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Basic Operation

Basic Operation
Workflow from Connection to Running Creating a program

1 Change to [Setup] mode.


Connecting the display to the controller

1 Turn on the power to the controller and dedicated display.


For details of the connection, refer to “Installation and
Wiring” (Page 2-2).

2 Set the method to connect to the controller.


• When the controller is started for the first time after being
shipped from the factory, select the language displayed on
the [Language select] screen.
• If the display is already connected to the controller, the [Run]
mode or [Setup] mode screen appears.
2 Set [Head Settings] as necessary.

“Head Settings” (Page 3-10)

3 Select the recipe to be used.

3 Connect the display to the controller.

“Selecting a Recipe” (Page 3-11)

4 Place the target and then register the reference image.

4 The [Run] mode or [Setup] mode screen will appear.


• To configure the settings from the PC, start TM-X Navigator,
and then connect the PC to the controller.
“Chapter 7 TM-X Navigator” (Page 7-1)
• When the controller is connected for the first time, it may
perform a restart.
• When a connection cannot be established due to waiting
for the controller to startup or some other reason, selecting “Register Reference Image” (Page 3-11)
[Automatic Connection] will continue to try to connect until
the controller can be connected to. To register a reference image for Head B, select the [Head B]
tab.

3-2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Basic Operation

5 Set [Position Correction] as necessary.


Starting operation

1 Change to [Run] mode to start operation.


Pressing the “R” key on the keyboard also enables toggling
between [Run] mode and [Setup] mode.

“Position Correction” (Page 3-12)


z To stop result output such as judgment output
By turning ON the TEST input terminal, Run mode can be run with only
6 Set the measurement tool. [Result Output] being stopped.
“External Terminal” (Page 4-4)

z To stop image capture and measurement processing


Turn ON the EXT input terminal to stop acceptance of the trigger input.
“Terminal Block Interface (IN)” (Page 5-67)

Stopping operation (power OFF)


To stop the operation, turn off the power to the controller.

Turning off the controller while it is accessing an SD


memory card may damage the card itself and/or corrupt
the data that is being saved on the SD memory card.

“Measurement Settings” (Page 3-15)

7 Configure the output settings.

“Output Settings” (Page 3-34)

3-3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Basic Operation

Basic Operation of the Tool Settings Creating a circle/arc


1
The tools for [Position Correction] and [Measurement Settings] are set
according to a line, point, circle/arc, or rectangle.
2
Creating lines and a measurement area
1

Detected circle

Detected line 3

2 1 Click the 1st point.

1 Click the 1st point.


2 Click the 2nd point.

2 Click the 2nd point.


3 Click the 3rd point.
A circle/arc is detected automatically.
A straight line is detected automatically.
• If a circle/arc cannot be detected, the detected area turns
• If a straight line cannot be detected, the detected area red.
turns red. • Clicking the detected area and operating   enables the
• Clicking the detected area and operating , , area to be adjusted.
or enables the area to be adjusted. • Adjusting the detection area automatically detects circles/
• Adjusting the detection area automatically detects straight arcs in that area.
lines in that area.

Measuring an area by specifying a rectangle


Creating points (Master Difference (Area/Contour), Area, Contour Extraction,
1 Profile)
1

Detected point
2
1 Click the starting point.
Generated rectangle

2 Click the ending point.


A point is detected automatically. 1 Click the 1st point.
• If a point cannot be detected, the detected line turns red.
• Moving the detected line automatically detects points on
2 Click the 2nd point.
A rectangle is automatically generated and lines and points are detected
the detected line after it is moved. automatically.
• If points or lines cannot be detected inside the rectangle,
the detected area turns red.
• Clicking the detected area and operating or enables
the area to be adjusted.
• Adjusting the detection area automatically detects points
and lines in that area.

3-4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Basic Operation

Convenient Operation of the Tool Settings Multiple Copy


Using [Multiple Copy] on the [Edit] menu enables the selected detection
area and measurement tool to be copied with the specified direction
(vertical/horizontal, rotation), quantity, and interval (distance, angle).
Selecting an element
Other than selecting an element directly on the main screen, use one of
the methods below to select an element.
This operation is application to tools to be set with a
combination of multiple elements.

z Select from a list (when creating a new element)


Selecting [Select from List] displays a list of set elements.
Placing the mouse pointer over an element highlights the applicable
element on the main screen.
Select the element to be set and click [Next].

Inverted Copy
Using [Inverted Copy] on the [Edit] menu enables the selected detection
area and measurement tool to be copied inversely on the specified axis.

z Reselect from a list (when editing an element) Replace with Diameter Tool
To edit a set tool, selecting displays the specified element name.
Using [Replace with Diameter Tool] in the [Edit] menu enables [LN - LN] to
Selecting an element name displays a list of set elements.
be replaced with [Diameter].
Placing the mouse pointer over an element highlights the applicable
element on the main screen. For two head configurations, [LN - LN] set across Head A
Select the element to be set and click [Next]. and Head B cannot be replaced with [Diameter].

Bulk Operation (LN - PT)


Measures the distance between a line and multiple points at the same
time.

• The measurement result is the same as when setting


[LN - PT] on multiple places. The setting of lines
individually can be omitted.
• The [LN - PT] detection conditions ([Tolerance
Settings], [Moving Average], [Processing Settings])
can also be batch set.

3-5
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Layout of the Screen

Layout of the Screen


[Setup] Mode
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)
(10)
(7)
(8)

(12)

(11)

(9)

(13) (14) (15) (16)

(1) Head Display (7) View toolbar


Displays the settings for the applicable head.
Changes the display magnification of the main
If two heads are connected, selecting a tab enables the settings to be
screen.
changed to the applicable head.
If only Head A is connected, the [Head B] tab will not be Fits the entire view to the main screen.
displayed.
Toggles between [Rectangular Zoom] and [Element
or
(2) Global/Utility/Edit Select].
Configures the settings for various items. Toggles between [Show Edge Point Trail] or [Show
“Chapter 4 Global Settings/Utility” (Page 4-1) or
Fitting Lines].
“Edit Menu” (Page 3-36)
or Shows or hides the area.
(3) Program Operation
Program operation, backup, and restoration can be performed.
“Program Operation” (Page 3-37) or Changes the resolution of the main screen.

(4) Disconnect Saves the displayed screen to the following


Disconnects the connection to the controller and returns to the location in JPEG format.
connection screen. SD2:\tm-x\capture\
(5) Total Status
(8) Image type
Displays the judgment standby state (- -) when in [Setup] mode.
Displays the type of image (Reference Image/Image Display/Archived
The total status result can also be hidden. Image) that is being displayed on the main screen. Additionally, this
“Display Options” (Page 3-36) option can be used to change the image type displayed on the main
screen.
(6) Settings menu
The menus necessary for Programs are grouped here. The settings for any image type can be changed on the
Programs should be configured by programming from left to right. measurement settings screen.
• When [Image Display] has been selected, the imaging
“Program Settings Menu” (Page 3-10)
file can be saved by right-clicking on the main screen.
• When [Archived Image] has been selected, the
measurement results for an image accumulated from
“Archived Image (13)” can be checked by selecting that
image.

3-6
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Layout of the Screen

(9) Main screen (15) List Editor


Displays the reference image registered in the measurement settings, The set tool and description of the settings are displayed in a list
measurement tools, and measurement results. enabling the descriptions to be edit all at once.
The following can be performed via the right-click menu. Displaying the right-click menu enables [Copy], [Paste], and [Reflect the
• Saving the imaging file (images that can be used in the simulator) Value in Other Tools] to be performed.
• Capturing the screen (full screen capture)
[All/Active] can be selected for the display method of the
Files saved by [Save the Imaging File] can be used in the tool list.
simulator. • Selecting [All] displays all the tools set for the Program.
• When saving a file with a dedicated monitor, the file is • Selecting [Active] only displays the recipe tools currently
saved to SD card (SD2 slot). active.
• When saving a file with TM-X Navigator, the file is saved
to the folder in the PC.
“Edit Menu” (Page 3-36)

(10) Change mode button


Toggles between [Setup] mode and [Run] mode.
(11) Tools List
Adds, edits, and deletes the tools set in the measurement settings.
The set tool and measurement results are displayed in a list.
(12) Changing the display
The display method for the tools set in the measurement settings can be
changed.

Clicking [Open Position Correction Editing] enables the position


correction for each tool to be checked and edited.

• Standard • With Tolerance

• List • Hierarchy

(16) 2 Head Switching


• Speed / Display • Refer to Position Correction This option is displayed when two heads are connected.
The respective head image can be refreshed in real time and the image
displayed on the main screen can be changed.

(13) Archived Image


“Archived Image” (Page 3-38)
(14) Check Operation
Turning this button ON performs a check operation based on the content
of the program.
[Continuous Trigger]/[Trigger] can be input during the trial run.

Check Operation Continuous Trigger


Trigger

3-7
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Layout of the Screen

[Run] Mode
The differences to [Setup] mode are as follows:
• [Output Settings] are enabled and output is performed.
• The [Statistics] function is enabled.
• The archived images are acquired. (The archived images can be viewed in both [Setup] mode and [Run] mode.)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(6)
(7) (10)
(8)
(11)

(12)

(9)

(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(1) Head Display (8) View toolbar


Select the head(s) to be displayed on the main screen (A/B/ALL/ALL2).
Changes the display magnification of the main
If two heads are connected, selecting a tab enables the display to be
screen.
changed to the applicable head.
• If only Head A is connected, the [Head B]/[ALL]/[ALL2] Fits the entire view to the main screen.
tabs will not be displayed.
• The [ALL2] tab is only displayed when [Head-to-head or Shows or hides the area.
Adjustment] is set to [Use] on .
Displays or hides the area frame (that includes the
(2) Utility or mask area) for the position correction tool and the
Configure the settings for the utilities menu. mask area frame for the measurement tool.
“Chapter 4 Global Settings/Utility” (Page 4-1)
or Changes the resolution of the main screen.
(3) Program Operation
Programs can be operated and overwritten. Saves the displayed screen to the following
“Program Operation” (Page 3-37) location in JPEG format.
(4) Disconnect SD2:\tm-x\capture\
Disconnects the connection to the controller and returns to the • Grayed out functions cannot be used.
connection screen. • Selecting a rectangle area on the main screen enlarges
(5) Total Status the display of that area.
Displays the total status result.
(9) Main screen
The total status result can also be hidden. Displays the image for the head currently running, measurement tools,
“Display Options” (Page 3-36)
and measurement results.
If [Position Correction] is set, the active pattern search area (blue frame)
(6) Measurement information
and pattern search area (green frame) are displayed.
Displays the measurement information based on the program currently
The following can be performed via the right-click menu.
being used.
• Saving the imaging file (images that can be used in the simulator)
(7) HOLD display • Capturing the screen (full screen capture)
If [Hold Mode] is set to [ON], <HOLD> is displayed.
Files saved by [Save the Imaging File] can be used in the
“Edit Program” (Page 3-37)
simulator.
• When saving a file with a dedicated monitor, the file is
saved to SD card (SD2 slot).
• When saving a file with TM-X Navigator, the file is saved
to the folder in the PC.
“Edit Menu” (Page 3-36)

(10) Change mode button


Toggles between [Setup] mode and [Run] mode.

3-8
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Layout of the Screen

(11) Change tool display (17) Recipe List


Changes the display method of the tool list. Displays a thumbnail of the latest image for each recipe.
• Display
[Standard]/[With Tolerance]/[List]/[Hierarchy]/[Speed/Display]/[Refer
to Position Correction] can be selected.
“Changing the display” (Page 3-7)
• All/Active
Select the display method of the tool list. Selecting [All] displays all the
tools set for the Program. Selecting [Active] only displays the recipe
tools currently active.
(12) Tools List
Displays the measured values and judgment results for the tools set for
the Program.
a Right-clicking the tool name enables [ZERO ON] and [ZERO
OFF] to be performed.

(18) Excel Transfer (TM-X Navigator only)


The measurement results can be transferred to Excel.
(13) Archived Image
“Archived Image” (Page 3-38)
(14) Statistics
“Statistics” (Page 3-40)
(15) Measurement Control Bar • Displayed when [Enable Excel Transfer (TM-X
Displays the measurement control bar. Navigator only)] is selected in [Display Options].
“Display Options” (Page 3-36)
• Send to Excel supports Microsoft Excel 2016 or later.

z Transfer settings/start
Configure the settings to send measurement results to Excel and then
TIM This command inputs the timing.
start the transfer to Excel.
ZERO ON This command inputs auto zero. Set the destination sheet name, write start cell, items to be transferred,
and function selection (timing data is to be sent).
ZERO OFF This command cancels auto zero input.
Selecting [Output Only Operating Recipe] exports
This command resets the measurement result for only the items set for the recipe in operation to
MSR RESET
the recipe that is currently active. Excel irrespective of whether any of the items to be
This command resets the measurement result for transferred are selected.
RESET ALL
all recipes.

Select the recipe to be used for measurement


Recipe Switching and click [Recipe Switching] to switch to the
selected recipe.

Right-clicking the measurement control bar enables the


[Issue a Reset Command] menu to be displayed.

The items that are executed with the reset command are
as follows:
• Clears all buffers including the image buffer.
• Creates a new file name for the file used to store data.
• Initializes total status output.
• Clears OUT_DATA0 to OUT_DATA15.
• Clears all of history data.
• Clears the measurement count.
z Exit transfer
(16) Latest NG image Ends the transfer of the measurement results to Excel.
Displays the latest NG image on the main screen.
z Start Transfer
Enabled when [Click Logging] is selected for [Logging Selection].
Measurement results (one time) are sent to Excel based on the transfer
settings.

z Delete Prev One


The most recently sent measurement results are deleted from Excel.
(19) Trigger
When [External Trigger] is set for [Trigger Mode] in the head settings, a
trigger is issued every time the button is pressed.

3-9
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Program Settings Menu


Head Settings Head A (B) Settings
• Head B settings are displayed when two heads are
connected.
• When using one head, use HEAD-A connector.

z Measurement Ranges
Set the range to capture images.
Compressing the measurement range (vertical and horizontal sizes)
enables the time taken to capture images to be reduced.
Moving the sliders for [Horizontal Position] and [Vertical Position] changes
the measurement range.

z Binning
Set to ON to speed up image transfer.
Doing so will pixelate the transferred images.

z Rotation
Set to rotate the captured image.
Rotated images can be displayed, measured, and output.
This is useful when the head has been rotated and then installed.

If [Head-to-head Adjustment Setting] is [Use], [Rotation]


cannot be set.

z Exposure Time
Select the exposure time (100 µs (default value), 50 µs, 25 µs).
Shortening the exposure time reduces the light intensity, but enables
blurring to be decreased when a moving object is captured.

z Image Composition
Multiple images are captured for one trigger and image composition
processing (None/Average/Dark Composition/Bright Composition) is
performed.

Images are captured with the specified count


Average for one trigger and the averaged images are
Trigger Setting sent to the controller.

z Trigger Mode • Dark Composition


Images are captured with the specified count
and cycle for one trigger and the processed
Specify the type of the trigger signal.
• Bright Composition image (images composed from the darkest and
• Internal Trigger
brightest elements) are sent to the controller.
Generates a trigger automatically and continuously inside the controller
to measure.
• External Trigger • Setting [Image Composition] increases the capture
Measures by inputting a trigger at the desired timing from an external time.
source (terminal, command, or mouse). • One image is always sent from the head to the
controller. Setting [Image Composition] sends only the
z Trigger Multiple Times image for which image composition was performed.
Can be set when [External Trigger] is selected for the [Trigger Mode]. • If the average frequency differs between Head A and
When this setting is selected, a specified number of imaging triggers are Head B, measurement is performed once averaging is
issued internally by a single external trigger input. complete on the head with the greater frequency.
Measurement processing is performed for each image taken and the
measurement value is determined by the processing specified in [Hold
mode] of the measurement tool.
z Optical Axis Alignment
Align the optical axes of the transmitter head and receiver head.
Specifies the number of imaging triggers to issue internally Follow the on-screen instructions to adjust the transmitter head and
Count
when the external trigger is received. receiver head positions.
Specifies the number of imaging triggers to issue internally.
Images are captured with an imaging trigger issued after
Cycle
capture is enabled.
To capture images at the shortest interval, set to 0 ms.

If [Trigger Multiple Times] is selected, the moving average for


the measurement tool cannot be used.

z Trigger Cycle
Can be set when [Internal Trigger] is selected for the [Trigger Mode].
Sets the internal trigger interval.

z Trigger Delay Continuous


Can be set when [External Trigger] is selected for the trigger mode.
trigger stop button
Specifies the delay time when delaying the start of image capture after
trigger input.

z Image Buffer When a target or a jig can be seen in the measurement


range, optical axis alignment can still be done by using
Select this option to capture the next image without waiting for
measurement processing of the previously captured image. the [Mask Region].
• When half or more of the field of view is covered by the
z Dual Interference Prevention mask, OK/NG judgment may become unstable.
Prevents light that reflects off the target emitted from the transmitter head • Since setting a mask region with a dedicated display
of Head A (B) affecting (dual interference) measurements due to that light slows down this function, it is recommended to
entering the receiver head of Head B (A) when using two connected heads temporarily stop updating the image while the optical
because of the positional relationship of Head A and Head B by shifting axis alignment is being performed.
the capture timing of Head A and Head B.

3-10
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

z Startup Recipe No.


Selecting a Recipe Select the recipe number to be used when the controller starts.

Eight recipes can be set for one Program. z Total Judgment for All Recipes
If multiple recipes are set for one Program, they can be judged as a group.
A reference image, position correction, and measurement settings can be
saved for each recipe. z Switch Recipes Automatically
If multiple recipes are registered, [Recipe] can automatically be changed in
accordance with the captured images of the target.
In [Run] mode, the recipe can be changed by a command or
with [Measurement Control Bar].

Register Reference Image


Place the target and then register the reference image
Check the target position displayed on the main screen with the [Trigger]
or [Continuous Trigger] button, and then click the [Register Image] button.

• To register a reference image for Head B, select the


[Head B] tab first.
• If [2 Head Switching] (Page 3-7) is selected,
the reference images of Head A and B can be
simultaneously registered.

z Recipe 1 to 8
Select the recipe to be configured.
If a reference image is registered, a thumbnail image will appear.
• Name
Clicking the keyboard icon enables the recipe name to be configured.

Trigger button

• Recipe initialization
Clicking on the right of the list displays a confirmation screen.
Clicking [OK] enables the recipe to be initialized.
• Copy Recipe
This function copies the settings of an existing recipe and pastes them
into another recipe.
Specify the source and destination for the recipe number, and then copy
the recipe.
If two heads are connected, the recipes for both heads are
copied.

3-11
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Edges (X direction) inside the edge detection area


Position Correction (green frame) are detected and position adjustment is
performed.
This function adjusts position misalignment or tilt of a target against the
reference image.
Even if differences in target positioning (position and angle misalignment)
occur, the desired measurement areas can be measured stably.
Up to four position correction groups (Nos. 1 to 4) can be set for one
processing pattern.
To set a position correction, the [Register image] is required. Edges (Y direction) inside the edge detection area
(green frame) are detected and position adjustment is
performed.

Multiple edges in the circle detection area (green


frame) are detected to find the center of the circle from
information about the edges of the detected points.
Position adjustment is performed based on the center
of the circle.

• Select the position adjustment group number and then


set the tool.

• Select the position adjustment group number for Multiple edges in the line detection area (green
[Position Correction] in [Specify Region] for the frame) are detected to find the center of the line from
measurement tool. information about the edges of the detected points and
position adjustment is performed. Position adjustment
can be performed in the center of the target for targets
Shapes that are similar to the target are searched
that have a varying thickness.
for in the pattern region (green frame) and position
adjustment is then performed.
A pattern search is performed inside the search region
(blue frame).

Multiple edges in the line detection area (green frame)


are detected to find a line from information about the
edges of the detected points. Position adjustment is
performed based on the position of the found lines and
angle formed by the horizontal axis and that line.

3-12
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Detection conditions for [Position Correction] „ 6. Advanced Settings


This section describes the detection conditions for [Position Correction].
The items that can be set differ depending on the tool.

z Timeout
Sets the maximum time from the start to the finish of pattern search.

z Angle sensitivity
Changes the angle step width when searching and specifies the priority of
stability and speed of the rotation direction.
[Low] prioritizes the search speed and [High] prioritizes stability and
accuracy of the rotating direction.

z Accuracy
Specifies the search accuracy when searching.
[Low] prioritizes the search speed and [High] prioritizes accuracy.

„ 7. Scan Direction
Select a direction to detect edges. The direction is indicated by the
orientation of the pink arrow on the main screen.

z Position and Angle of Line / X Direction / Y Direction


1 Tool Name ü ü ü ü ü ü Select either [Forward] (the direction of the pink arrow) or [Reverse].

Pattern Region z Center of Circle


2 (Rotated Rectangle/ ü Select [Out → Center] or [Center → Out].
Circle)

3 Angle Range ü „ 8. Edge Direction


To detect edges that change from dark to light or light to dark, select [Both],
4 Min. Match (%) ü
[Light to Dark], or [Dark to Light].
5 Search Sensitivity ü

6
Advanced
ü
„ 9. Correction Method
Settings Set a method to adjust edges when performing position adjustment.

7 Scan Direction Use the furthest edge in the direction of the pink arrow
ü ü ü ü FAR
inside the detection area as the adjustment reference.
8 Edge Direction ü ü ü ü ü
Use the closest edge in the direction of the pink arrow
NEAR
Correction inside the detection area as the adjustment reference.
9 ü ü
Method
Use the average value of the X-Position (or Y-Position)
10 Remove Defects ü ü ü Average on the edge in the detection area as the position
adjustment reference.
Advanced Edge
11 ü ü ü ü ü Compress and detect the image inside the detection area
Settings
Fast in the detection and perpendicular directions to speed up
12 Mask Region ü ü ü ü ü ü adjustment.

„ 1. Tool Name
Set the desired tool name. „ 10. Remove Defects
Remove edge points that are away from the edge point trail as abnormal
points when calculating fitting lines. Errors may occur due to the effects of
„ 2. Pattern Region (Rotated Rectangle/Circle) burrs or contamination on the measurement target.
Select the shape of the pattern region. Setting the slider to the [Strong] side judges small gaps as abnormal
points.

„ 3. Angle Range
Specify the angle range by +/- for pattern search where the measurement
target is tilted.
Setting a large angle increases the amount of computing. Hence,
measurement time increases.

„ 4. Min. Match (%)


This figure indicates how similar the pattern image (green frame) and
measurement image are in the search region (blue frame).
Measurement is only performed when the search results exceed the
minimum match value.

„ 5. Search Sensitivity
Changes the compression rate of an image when searching to specify the
priority between the search speed and stability.
[Low] prioritizes the search speed and [High] prioritizes stability.

3-13
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 11. Advanced Edge Settings

z Segment size (line position and angle/circle center/center


line)
Specify the segment size in which an edge is detected.
Enlarging the segment size will degrade the detection sensitivity. However,
the result is less affected by noise.

z Interval
(Position and Angle of Line/Center of Circle/Center Line)
Specify the segment size in which an interval is detected.

z Sensitivity
Set the criteria for recognition of contrast above a certain percentage as
an edge where the contrast variation is most remarkable (100%).
As edges below this edge sensitivity are not recognized, use this setting to
ignore noise.

z Filter Width
When a noise component causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.

z Edge Sensitivity Lower Limit


Set the lower limit for edge detection. Edges below the lower limit are not
detected.

z Out of Image Processing Area


This processing is performed when the position adjustment tool area is
outside the range of the loaded image. Select the check box to speed up
processing (processing is not performed outside of the area).

„ 12. Mask Region


Up to four areas to exclude (mask regions) in the position adjustment area
can be specified.
This is useful when the target has a complicated shape or when an area
needs to be excluded from the measurement.

3-14
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Measure the distance between a circle (or arc) and a


Measurement Settings line.

Set the tool to measure the target.

Basics
A sequential workflow from the edge (element) detection settings
necessary for measurement to the display of the measurement results can
be set.
Measurement settings used for edges (elements) that have already been
detected are also used. Measure the distance between a circle (or arc) and a
point.

Measure the diameter or radius of a circle.

„ Dimensioning Measure the radius of an arc.


Measure the distance between two lines.

Measure the distance between a line and a point. „ Diameter/Caliper


Measure the outside diameter of a target with a
cylindrical shape.
A value that adjusted the end surface
reflection characteristic of the cylindrical
shape will be output.

Measure the distance between two points.

Detect the edges in the specified area and measure the


distance between edges (distance between the caliper
jaws).

Measure the distance between two circles (or arcs).

„ Angle
Measure the angle between two lines.

3-15
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ Position Element
Measures the coordinates with the origin on the left side Detect the elements to be used for the measurement of points, lines, and
of the screen. other features.

„ Automatic Measurement
Automatically detect edges in the specified area and
measure the distance between the edges.

Automatically detect edges in the specified area.


Selecting any two of the detected edges measures the
distance or angle between them. „ Line/Circle
When the angle between the edges is 5° or Detect lines.
less, the distance is measured. If not, the
angle is measured.

Detect peak lines that go through peak points detected


from the inside of the specified rectangular area.

Detect the center line between edges.

Detect lines of the specified width parallel to the


specified rectangular area.

Detect circles.

Detect arcs.

3-16
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Detect peak circles that go through peak points Detect an edge point on the circumference.
detected from the inside of the specified circular area.

„ Pitch Element (Angle)


Detect the elements to measure the pitch angle of the
edges on a line.

Detect peak arcs that go through peak points detected


from the inside of the specified arc area.

Detect the elements to measure the pitch angle of the


edges on the circumference.

„ Point
Detect points on the set line.

„ Tip
Detect tips at the apex from the inside of the specified
rectangular area.

„ Max/Min point
Detect the maximum or minimum point inside the
rectangular area.

„ Defect Element
Detect a foreign object of an indeterminate form that
has adhered to the target compared to the shape
(rotated rectangle, circle, or arc) extracted from the
Detect the maximum or minimum point in the circle or reference image.
arc area.

„ Contour
Automatically detect the target’s edge and extract a
„ Inflection group of contour points from that edge.

Extract points for which the changes in the line of the


extracted edge point trail are above are certain level.

„ Others
Detects the specified circle diameter tangent to the
contour inside the specified area.
„ Pitch Element
Detect an edge point on a line.

3-17
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Auxiliary Draw a line that passes through the selected points.

Detect the elements to be used for the measurement of points, lines, and
other features.

Draw a line that goes through the two selected points.

Draw the approximate line that passes through the


selected points.

Auxiliary cannot be created if no lines (straight line,


circle, or arc) or points are shown on the main screen.
Before creating an auxiliary, measure the target with
[Basics] or use [Element] to create a line, circle, or point
on the main screen. Draw a median circle from two selected circles or arcs.

„ Line/Circle
Draw a median line from two selected lines, circles or
points.

Draw the approximate circle that passes through the


Draw a perpendicular line that goes through the selected points.
selected point on the selected line.

Draw a parallel line at the specified distance or that


goes through the selected point on the selected line.

Draw a circle that passes through the selected point


with the selected point in the center or a circle with the
specified radius.

Draw a line that connects the two selected circles (arcs)


or a point and the circle (arc).

Draw a circle connecting to two selected lines.

3-18
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ Point Application
Draw the intersection of the two selected lines (straight These are various tools that facilitate complicated measurement.
lines, circles or arcs).

Draw the midpoint between the two selected points.

Use the Contour Extraction Tool to draw the


intersection points of the extracted contour, line and
circle/arc.

„ Corner
Measure the corner arc based on the two lines that
form a corner.

Use the OBD element to detect the contact points of


the circle and create points.

Measure the chamfer surface from the two lines that


form a chamfer surface.

„ Connection
Create a circle by combining two or more selected arcs.

„ Master Difference
Measure the target area inside the specified area and
calculate the differences to the reference image.

Create a line by combining two or more selected lines.

Measure the target’s contour inside the specified area


and calculate the differences from the reference image.

„ Arbitrary Line/Point
Draw a line that goes through any two selected points.

Create a point at any selected position.

3-19
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ Pitch Measurement „ Advanced


Measure the pitch (line) distance of the edges on the Measure the distance between edges from any specified
line or circumference. lines.

Measure the pitch angle of the edges on the line or


circumference. „ Thread
Measure the effective, outside or minor diameters of a
target in the shape of a thread.

„ Count
Count the number of pitches between edges for the
specified pitch element tool.

„ Bulk Operation
Measures the distance between one line and multiple
points at the same time.
„ Area
Measure the area of the target inside the specified area.

„ Defect
Detect locations that deviate from the reference line
calculated from the edge information and then measure
that distance.

„ Calculation
Use the measurement result and calculate.
The calculation results from other calculation tools can
be inserted into the formula.
„ Gap There is no compatibility between
Measure whether there is a gap in any specified area. [Standard] and [Advanced]. Copying the
content from one to the other cannot
If there are multiple gaps, the shortest obtain an correct calculation result.
distance between gaps can be measured
by selecting [Stable] for [Processing Mode]. • Standard

„ Thickness
Measure the ring thickness at the specified interval.
The average value or the maximum and/or minimum
values(s) can be output.
• Advanced

3-20
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Geometric Tolerance „ Orientation


Straightness and perpendicularity can be measured. Measure the perpendicularity of the specified line
against the reference line.

Measure the parallelism of the specified line against


the reference line.

„ Form
Measures the straightness of the specified line.

Measures the circularity of the specified circle or arc.

Measure the contour of the specified target range.

„ Location
Measure the concentricity of the two specified circles or
arcs.

3-21
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Detection conditions for measurement settings


This section describes the detection conditions for [Measurement Settings].
The items that can be set differ depending on the tool.

z Basics
Diameter/ Automatic
Dimensioning Angle Position
Caliper measurement

1 Tool Name ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

2 Angle Range ü

3 Measurement Pattern ü ü ü ü

Base Measurement
4 ü ü ü ü
Direction

5 Diameter/Radius ü ü

6 Detection Conditions ü ü

7 Auto Adjust ü

8 Edge Direction ü

10 Tolerance Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

11 Moving Average ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

12 Processing Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

13 Remove Defects ü

15 Remove Isolated Point ü

16 Advanced Edge Settings ü ü ü

17 Specify Region ü ü

18 Mask Region ü ü

19 Width Measurement ü

20 Detect Edge ü

21 Delete Edge ü ü

3-22
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

z Element
Line/Circle Point Max/Min point Inflection

1 Tool Name ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
7 Auto Adjust ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
8 Edge Direction ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
13 Remove Defects ü ü ü ü
14 Remove Isolated Point ü ü ü ü ü
15 Gauge Line ü
16 Advanced Edge Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
17 Specify Region ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
18 Mask Region ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
22 Output Ppattern ü ü ü ü ü ü
23 Scan Direction ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

24 Correction Method ü

25 Shape ü

Detection sensitivity,
26 Lower Limit of Detection Threshold, ü
Upper Limit of Detection Threshold
27 Display Color Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

z Element (Cont.)
Pitch Element Pitch Element Defect
Tip Contour Others
(Distance) (Angle) element

1 Tool Name ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü

7 Auto Adjust ü
8 Edge Direction ü ü
9 Diameter ü
13 Remove Defects ü ü
16 Advanced Edge Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
17 Specify Region ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
18 Mask Region ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
23 Scan Direction ü
27 Display Color Settings ü ü ü ü ü
28 Reference Line ü
29 Pitch pattern settings ü ü ü ü
30 Pitch Interval Value ü ü
31 Half Angle ü
Maximum Permissible Feature
32 ü ü ü ü
Count
Set ALARM as the result when
33 ü
straight line detection fails
34 Defect Detection Conditions ü
35 Contour Best Fit ü
36 Minimum detect size ü
37 Advanced Settings ü
57 Round groove (Ball screws, etc.) ü

3-23
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

z Auxiliary
Line/Circle

1 Tool Name ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
3 Measurement Pattern ü
22 Output Pattern ü ü
27 Display Color Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
37 Distance from Base Elements ü
39 Degrees of Rotation ü
40 Radius ü ü
41 Pattern to Create ü ü

z Auxiliary (Cont.)
Arbitrary
Point Connection
line/Point

1 Tool Name ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
8 Edge Direction ü
22 Output Pattern ü
23 Scan Direction ü
27 Display Color Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
41 Pattern to Create ü ü
42 Point 1/Point 2 ü
43 Point ü
55 Specify Detected Point ü

z Application
Width of
Master Pitch Bulk
Corner Count Area Defect Gap Thickness specific Thread Calculation
Difference Measurement Operation
position

1 Tool Name ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
3 Measurement Pattern ü
6 Detection Conditions ü ü
7 Auto Adjust ü
8 Edge Direction ü ü
10 Tolerance Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
11 Moving Average ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
12 Processing Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
13 Remove Defects ü
16 Advanced Edge Settings ü ü ü ü ü
17 Specify Region ü ü ü ü ü
18 Mask Region ü ü ü ü ü
35 Contour Best Fit ü
36 Minimum Detect Size ü
44 Measurement Type ü ü
Items to be Judged for
45 ü ü
Tolerance
46 Sensitivity ü
47 Dead Band ü
48 Distance from Reference ü
49 Measurement Method ü
50 Exclusion Area Settings ü
Abnormal Segment
51 ü
Tolerance
52 Measurement Item ü
53 Setting the reference axis ü
Display the detection
54 ü
point only when NG.
56 Processing Mode ü

3-24
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

z Geometric tolerance
Form Location Orientation

1 Tool Name ü ü ü ü ü ü
10 Tolerance Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü
11 Moving Average ü ü ü ü ü ü
12 Processing Settings ü ü ü ü ü ü
35 Contour Best Fit ü
36 Minimum detect size ü
Display the detection
54 ü
point only when NG.

3-25
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 1. Tool Name „ 6. Detection Conditions


Set the tool name.
z Circle
Select [Max.], [Min.], [Fitting], [Inscribed], or [Circumscribed].

Set “Center of circle found with fitting” as the center


Maximum based on the detected edge and detect the circle that
passes through the furthest edge point from that center.

Set “Center of circle found with fitting” as the center


Minimum based on the detected edge and detect the circle that
passes through the closest edge point from that center.

Detect a proximate circle using the least square


Fitting
method from the detected edge.
Selecting [Edit All Languages] enables the tool name to be
edited in different languages. Inscribed Detects an inscribed circle from the detected edge.

Circumscribed Detects a circumscribed circle from the detected edge.


„ 2. Angle Range • The center when [Maximum] or [Minimum] is selected is
Select the measurement range for the angle.
the same as the center when [Fitting] is selected.
([360 deg Display] or [+/- 90 deg Display])
• The circle detected in [Fitting] and the center of the circle
detected in [Inscribed] and [Circumscribed] may not match.
„ 3: Measurement Pattern • If [Inscribed] or [Circumscribed] are selected, the
processing speed will be slower than if [Fitting], [Maximum],
Select the measurement pattern.
Selecting measurement patterns updates the measurement values on the or [Minimum] was selected.
main screen.
z Diameter
z CL - CL / CL - LN Select how to measure two detected edges.
Select [Between Centers], [Maximum], or [Minimum].
Detect two proximate lines using the least square
z CL - PT Average method based on the detected edge. Detect the
Select [Center], [Maximum], or [Minimum]. distance between the center of those lines.

z Angle Detect two proximate lines using the least square


Select [Normal], [Supplement], [Complementary Angle 1], or method based on the detected edge. The lines are
[Complementary Angle 2]. Peak tilted and the distance between the center of the two
lines that go through the edge for the outermost lines
z Bisector (furthest point) is detected.
Select [Forward] or [Reverse].
Detect two proximate lines using the least square
z Area method based on the detected edge. The lines are
Select [Black] or [White]. Bottom tilted and the distance between the center of the two
lines that go through the edge for the innermost lines
(closest point) is detected.
„ 4. Base Measurement Direction
Select the measurement direction. Maximum Detects the distance of the maximum width based on
Width the detected edge.
z PT - PT/CL - PT
Minimum Detects the distance of the minimum width based on
Width the detected edge.

Measure the distance between points or a point and


Line Distance
the center of a circle.
Measure the distance between points or a point and
Horizontal * the center of a circle in parallel with the item selected in
[Base Measurement Direction].
Measure the distance between points or a point and
Vertical * the center of a circle in the vertical direction with the
item selected in [Base Measurement Direction]. The tilt of the lines when [Peak] or [Bottom] is selected is the
same as the tilt of the lines when [Ave] is selected.
* If a line is set, clicking specifies the reference line on the main screen.

z CL - CL z Ring Thickness
Select [Maximum Width], [Minimum Width], or [Average].

Measure the ring thickness of the measurement


target at the interval specified in [Interval] for
Maximum Width
[Advanced Edge Setting] to detect the maximum
value.
Center
Measure the distance between the center of circles.
Distance Measure the ring thickness of the measurement
target at the interval specified in [Interval] for
Measure the distance between the center of a circle in Minimum Width
[Advanced Edge Setting] to detect the minimum
Horizontal * parallel with the item selected in [Base Measurement
value.
Direction].
Measure the distance between the center of a circle Measure the ring thickness of the measurement
Vertical * in the vertical direction with the item selected in [Base target at the interval specified in [Interval] for
Average
Measurement Direction]. [Advanced Edge Setting] to detect the average
values.
* 
If a line is set, clicking specifies the reference line on the main screen.

z Point Position „ 7. Auto Adjust


Automatically adjust the tool area and edge detection conditions.
Select whether to use the X- or Y-Position of the specified point.

„ 5. Diameter/Radius
z Circle/Arc
Select whether to output the diameter or radius.

3-26
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 8. Edge Direction z Offset


Add/subtract any value from the display value.
z Caliper Offset processing is performed on a value after measurement mode
Select [Light->Dark] or [Dark->Light] for the edge direction. processing, auto zero processing, and scaling is performed.

z Line, Peak Line, Center Line, Circle, Arc, Peak Circle, z Zero Base Value
Peak Arc, Point, Max/Min Point (Rectangle), Specify the value to subtract from the measured value with “Auto zero
Max/Min Point (Arc), Tip, Defect Element, Corner Arc, Gap processing” when ZERO ON is input. The setting value is automatically
Select whether to detect edges that change from dark to light or light to written to “finalized measured value” when ZERO ON is input.
dark. If the hold value is “10” when the standard value is “10,” the
measured value becomes “0.”
If the [Scan Direction] and [Edge Direction] have not been
appropriately combined, the edge may not be detectable.
z Peak Detection Filter
Sets the peak detection filter.
Selecting [Hold Peak Value] or [Hold Bottom Value] enables [Level] and
„ 9. Diameter [Hysteresis] to be set.
Specify the diameter of the circle used in the [OBD Element] tool with a
numeric value. If [Peak Detection Filter] is set, [Nearest Hold] and [Other
Tool Reference Hold] cannot be selected in [Hold Mode].

z Hold Mode
Set whether to continue sampling during measurement or specify a
sampling period and measure the maximum or minimum value.
„ 10. Tolerance Settings Measure the maximum value in the specified
Set the tolerance to judge the measured value ([Upper Limit] and [Lower Peak Hold
period.
Limit]).
Measure the minimum value in the specified
Bottom Hold
period.

Measure the “maximum value - minimum value”


Peak to Peak Hold
in the specified period.

Measure the average value in the specified


Average Hold
period.
„ 11. Moving Average Sample Hold Measure the value at the specified moment.
Set the count to average the measured values.
Measures the value that is closest to the specified
Nearest Hold
„ 12. Processing Settings value within the specified period.

The value when the reference measurement tool


Other Tool
is at its maximum or minimum is the measured
Reference Hold
value within the specified period.

z Number of Digits
Set the number of decimal points for the measured value.

z +/- Direction
Select [None (absolute value)], [Forward], or [Reverse Direction] for the
sign of the measured value.
This item can be set for [LN - LN], [LN - PT], [PT - PT], [CL - CL], [CL -
LN], and [CL - PT].

• The left side is the plus direction for the direction of


the base line (the element selected first when setting a
tool).
z Alarm Threshold • [None (absolute value)] is set for a measurement
Specify the measurement count to hold the valid data until just before
measurement becomes invalid. element for which there is no line direction such as
[Center Distance].
z Scaling
Scaling is the process of setting a display value for the desired measured
value and correcting any difference between the measured value and the
z Display Unit
Select the unit to be displayed on the main screen.
display value. A display value is set for the two measured values.
The measured value obtained before adjustment when [Input Measured [Display Unit] is not shown if an angle, area, number of
Value] was clicked can be assigned to [Correction Value 1] and [Correction pitches, and master difference (area) have been set.
Value 2].
z Enable DIA correction
Enabling this setting outputs a value that adjusted the end surface
reflection characteristic of the cylindrical shape.
This item can be set for [Outer diameter].

3-27
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 13. Remove Defects „ 16. Advanced Edge Settings


Remove edge points that are away from the edge point trail as abnormal
points when calculating fitting lines. Errors may occur due to the effects of z LN - LN
burrs or contamination on the measurement target. Clear this check box to disable [Keep the Line Parallel].
Setting the slider to the [Strong] side judges small gaps as abnormal
points.

For details of “Keep the Line Parallel”, refer to “Technical


Descriptions”.

z Diameter, Caliper, Line, Peak Line, Center Line,


Gauge Line, Circle, Arc, Peak Circle, Peak Arc, Point,
Max/Min Point (Rectangle), Max/Min Point (Arc),
„ 14. Remove Isolated Point Inflection, Tip, Defect Element, OBD Element,
Set a threshold value to remove edge points in an isolated position from
edge extraction. Pitch Element (Distance), Pitch Element (Angle), Area,
Setting the slider to the [Strong] side judges small gaps as isolated points. Width of Specific Position, Gap, Ring Thickness

„ 15. Gauge Width


Set how to calculate the specified line and the value in the [Gauge Line]
tool.

Specified by
Specify the segment length with a number.
Length

Specified by
Specify the ratio of the black width for the area.
Ratio
• Segment Size
The average of the monochrome ratio of the Specify the segment size in which an edge is detected.
respective crests can be specified as the gauge line Enlarging the segment size will degrade the detection sensitivity.
can be detected across more than black and white However, the result is less affected by noise.
Specified by pairs.
black width ratio • Interval
The monochrome ratio is calculated by Specify the segment interval. Increasing the segment interval omits
the formula: black width/(black width + processing points, which shortens measurement time.
white width).
• Sensitivity
Set the criteria for recognition of contrast above a certain percentage as
an edge where the contrast variation is most pronounced (100%).
As edges of contrast below this edge sensitivity are not recognized use
this setting to ignore noises.
• Filter Width
To detect minute items like narrow lines, decrease the filter width.
Additionally, when noise causes false edge detections, increasing the
filter width can reduce the false detections.
• Edge Sensitivity Lower Limit
Set the lower limit for edge detection. Edges below the lower limit are
not detected.
• Out of Image Processing Area
This processing is performed when the various tool areas are outside
the range of the loaded image. Select the check box to speed up
processing (processing is not performed outside of the area).
• Minimize End-Face Reflection Error
Select this check box to decrease the effects of end surface reflection
from targets that have a parallel depth in the light emission direction.

• There are no segment size, interval, or out of image


settings for the “Pitch Element”.
• [Minimize End-Face Reflection Error] can be set for lines,
circles, and arcs.
• Area can only be set with the settings of [Out of Image
Processing Area].

z Master Difference (Area)


Configure the settings of [Processing Out of Measurement Range].

When a black pixel out of the measurement


Consider as an Alarm range is included in the measurement
range, an alarm is issued.

Compare as Black To compare all the black pixels included in


Pixels the measurement area as black area.

To compare the area excluding the black


Exclude from pixels out of the measurement range in the
Comparison measurement area. The processing time is
longer than the other options.

3-28
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 17. Specify Region „ 20. Detect Edge


Display information for the edge detection area set on the main screen. Automatically extract the target edge.
The displayed items vary depending on the tool. Selecting an extracted edge automatically displays the measurement
A value can also be entered to change the edge detection area. results.
Selecting [Automatically Clear Unused Edges] and clicking [OK] deletes
edges not used in measurement.

„ 21. Delete Edge


Delete edges extracted with [Width Measurement] or [Detect Edge].

z Position Correction
Select the position correction group number to set as the position
correction.
• To exclude position correction as a target, select [None].
• Selecting [Specify Tool] enables set tools (lines, points, circles, chamfer,
and corner arc) to be selected.

z Position Correction Target


If this check box is cleared, position adjustment is not performed on the set
element.

z Region Adjustment at Setting


This function adjusts the orientation of the area when creating settings for
reference images.
The area for the specified [Basis] can be made horizontal or vertical and
aligned with the center or radius.
• If a line or circle is set, clicking specifies the reference on the main
screen.
• Each click of rotates the area 90 degrees.
• The offset angle and distance from the reference can be specified.

„ 18. Mask Region


Up to four areas to exclude (mask regions) in the detection area can be
specified.
This is useful when the target has a complicated shape or when an area
needs to be excluded from the measurement.

„ 19. Width Measurement


Automatically measure the width of the target.
[Measurement Direction] and [Measurement Points] of edges to be
extracted can be selected for [Detailed Settings].

3-29
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 22. Output Pattern „ 23. Scan Direction


Select a direction to detect edges. The direction is indicated by the
z Peak Line orientation of the pink arrow on the main screen.
Select [Maximum] or [Minimum].

Detect the largest edges in the scan direction (the


z Line, Peak Line, Max/Min Point (Rectangle), Inflection,
Maximum direction of the pink arrow) as peaks and create peak
Defect Element
lines with the least square method that go through them. Select either [Forward] (the direction of the pink arrow) or [Reverse]
(opposite direction of the pink arrow).
Detect the smallest edges in the scan direction (the
Minimum direction of the pink arrow) as peaks and create peak z Center Line, Circle, Arc, Peak Circle, Peak Arc,
lines with the least square method that go through them. Max/Min Point (Circle/Arc)
Select [Out → Center] or [Center → Out].
z Circle/Connect Arc
Select [Max.], [Min.], [Fitting], [Inscribed], or [Circumscribed].
„ 24. Correction Method
Set “Center of circle found with fitting” as the center Set the fitting line correction method.
Maximum based on the detected edge and detect the circle that
Calculate a proximate line using the least square method
passes through the furthest edge point from that center.
from the detected edge. The lines are tilted and the line
Set “Center of circle found with fitting” as the center Maximum that goes through the edge of the furtherest (largest) line
Minimum based on the detected edge and detect the circle that in the scan direction (the direction of the pink arrow) is
passes through the closest edge point from that center. detected.

Detect a proximate circle using the least square method Calculate a proximate line using the least square method
Fitting from the detected edge. The lines are tilted and the line
from the detected edge.
Minimum that goes through the edge of the closest (smallest) line
Inscribed Detects an inscribed circle from the detected edge. in the scan direction (the direction of the pink arrow) is
detected.
Circumscribed Detects a circumscribed circle from the detected edge.
Detect a line using the least square method from the
Fitting
detected edge.
z Peak Circle/Peak Arc
Select [Maximum] or [Minimum].

Maximum
Detect the largest edge from the center of the circle to
the outside as peaks and create peak lines with the least
„ 25. Shape
Select whether to detect the convex on the top or the bottom of the
square method that go through them. reference curve as an inflection when detecting inflection.
Detect the smallest edge from the center of the circle to
Minimum the outside as peaks and create peak lines with the least
square method that go through them.
„ 26. Detection sensitivity, Lower Limit of Detection
Threshold, Upper Limit of Detection Threshold
Set the inflection detection sensitivity, and upper and lower threshold
z Max/Min Point (Rectangle) limits.
Select [Max point] or [Min point].
The detection status for inflection is displayed on a graph.
Detect the largest edge point (the furtherest edge point)
Max point
in the scan direction (the direction of the pink arrow).

Detect the smallest edge point (the closest edge point)


Min point
in the scan direction (the direction of the pink arrow).

z Max/Min Point (Circle/Arc)


Select [Max point] or [Min point].

Detects the largest edge point (farthest from the center)


Max point
from the center of the circle to the outside.

Detects the smallest edge point (closest to the center)


Min point
from the center of the circle to the outside.

z Approximate Circle
Select [Max.], [Min.], [Fitting], [Inscribed], or [Circumscribed].

Set “Center of circle found with fitting” as the center


Maximum based on the selected point and detect the circle that „ 27. Display Color Settings
passes through the furthest point from that center. Set the display color of Element and Auxiliary Tool.

Set “Center of circle found with fitting” as the center


Minimum based on the selected point and detect the circle that
passes through the closest point from that center.

Detect the approximate circle using the least square


Fitting
method from the selected point.

Inscribed Detects an inscribed circle from the selected point.

Circumscribed Detects a circumscribed circle from the selected point.

z Figure Circle
When specifying a circle and any point to create a figure circle, select
[Distance from Center] or [Distance from Circumference].

Distance from
Specify the radius of a figure circle with [Radius].
Center

Specify the radius of a figure circle with the radius


Distance from
of the circle specified in STEP 1 and [Radius] as the
Circumference
sum of the specified length.

3-30
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 28. Reference Line „ 35. Contour Best Fit


Select the model line when detecting defect elements. When comparing contours, adjust the position so that the extracted
When [Free Curve Line] is selected for the reference line, specify contour most closely matches the base contour.
[Smoothing Range].
The smoothing range increases the value to draw the free curve smoothly
on the contour of the measurement target. To make it sharper, decrease
the value.

„ 29. Pitch Pattern Settings


When detecting the pitch element, select the pitch pattern from [All Edge
Pitches], [Dark-to-Light Edges], [Light-to-Dark Edges], [Black Width], [White
Width], [Black Center Widths], and [White Center Widths].

„ 30. Pitch Interval Value


Set the desired value of the pitch element.

„ 31. Half Angle


Select this setting when measuring half angles.

„ 32. Maximum Permissible Feature Count „ 36. Minimum Detect Size


Enter the smallest perimeter length to be determined to be an edge.
The number of pitches detected with pitch elements can be restricted to no
more than the designated values. Use this tool to ignore small parts and foreign objects with a
perimeter length less than the set value.

„ 33. Set ALARM as the result when straight line


detection fails „ 37. Advanced Settings
The result is set as an alarm when straight line detection fails with pitch Set the advanced conditions to detect contours.
element (line angle).

„ 34. Defect Detection Conditions


Set the conditions to detect defects.
The detection status based on the conditions is displayed on a graph.

z Extraction Interval
Specify the interval of groups of contour points that are detected as edges.

z Detection Threshold (Brightness)


Specify the detection threshold value for groups of points to be detected
edges.

z Edge Noise Removal


Select or clear the check box for edge noise removal.

z Accuracy
Specify the search accuracy.
This option can be set if Contour Best Fit (Page 3-31) is enabled.

z Timeout
Specify the time until contour extraction ends.

„ 38. Distance from Base Elements


z Setting Method Specify the distance from the first selected element.
Select [+/- Common] or [+/- Individual]. This setting will only be displayed if an arbitrary point was selected.
Selecting [+/- Individual] enables items to be input individually using
[+ Range] and [- Range].

z Detection Threshold (px)


„ 39. Degrees of Rotation
Specify the rotation angle of the line used in the [Line through point] tool
Set the threshold value for flaw detection. with a numeric value.
z Lower Defect Level Filter (px) /
Lower Defect Width Filter(segment) / „ 40. Radius
Lower Defect Size Filter(px2) Specify the radius of a circle used in the [Tangent circle] and [Figure circle]
Set the minimum value of the filter. tools with a numeric value.

3-31
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 41. Pattern to Create „ 44. Measurement Type


Select the position to create an assist element.
z Pitch measurement (Distance)
z Tangent Select [Single Pitch], [Cumulative Pitch Deviation], or [Partial Cumulative
Select [Circumscription1], [Circumscription2], [Inscription1], or Pitch Deviation].
[Inscription2]. • Single pitch
Measure the pitch of the select place on the scan line with the specified
In the case of a circle and point tangent line, only
measurement pattern.
[Circumscription1] or [Circumscription2] can be selected.

z Intersection
Select [1st Point] or [2nd Point].

z Tangent Circle
Select [Pattern 1], [Pattern 2], [Pattern 3], or [Pattern 4].

• Cumulative Pitch Deviation


„ 42. Point 1/Point 2 Measure the value of the total amplitude (Fp) for the cumulative pitch
deviation on the curve.
Specify the coordinates when specifying the desired line.
Vertical and horizontal can also be specified for the coordinates of Point 1 (This value is the maximum minus the minimum of the partial trail pitch
as a reference. errors on all crests.)

• Partial Cumulative Pitch Deviation


Measure the amount of misalignment from the ideal pitch distance with
codes. In order to measure correctly, the pitch design value must be
z Region Adjustment at Setting entered.
This function adjusts the orientation of the line when creating settings for Partial cumulative pitch deviation for Pitch 3 is shown as “Fp3” in the
reference images. below figure.
The line for the specified [Basis] can be made horizontal or vertical and
matched to the reference.
• If a line or circle is set, clicking specifies the reference on the main
screen.
• Each click of rotates the area 90 degrees.
• The offset angle and distance from the reference can be specified.

z Line Color
Specify the color of the line.

„ 43. Point
Specify the coordinates when specifying the desired point.

z Region Adjustment at Setting z Defect Distance


This function adjusts the orientation of the point when creating settings for For the direction to detect an object as a defect, select [Absolute
reference images. Maximum], [Plus], or [Minus].
The points for the specified [Basis] can be matched.
If a line or circle is set, clicking specifies the reference on the main
screen.

z Point Color
Specify the color of the points.

3-32
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

„ 45. Items to be Judged for Tolerance „ 52. Measurement Item


Select the items for tolerance judgment based on the pitch distance Specify the measurement thread item.
selected in [Measurement Type]. • Effective Diameter/PITCHDIA
• Major Diameter/MAJORD
Set the average pitch distance/angle for tolerance • Minor Diameter/MINORD
Average
judgment.
• Crest Angle (Ave., Max., Min.)
Set the maximum pitch distance/angle for tolerance • Pitch (Ave. Max., Min.)
Maximum • Partial Cumulative Pitch Deviation (Final Pitch Deviation, Maximum
judgment.
Deviation, Minimum Deviation)
Set the minimum pitch distance/angle for tolerance The tolerance (upper and lower limits) for the specified items can be set.
Minimum
judgment. Tolerance values can also be loaded from [Use the Tolerance Table].

„ 46. Sensitivity „ 53. Setting the reference axis


Set the sensitivity (Low/Medium/High) to detect edges in the area. Select whether to automatically set a reference axis for a thread or set a
reference axis line.
Selecting [Set the Reference Axis Line] enables set elements to be set as
reference axes. Click to specify the reference on the main screen.

„ 47. Dead Band


This is the area to be ignored if it is misaligned with the master. „ 54. Display the detection point only when NG
The tolerance range can be set for position misalignment adjustment and If this tool is turned on when the tolerance is set, the feature points will be
the amount of misalignment due to individual differences in the target. hidden within the tolerance range.
If the tolerance is not set, the feature points do not appear.

„ 48. Distance from Reference


Specify the distance from the specified reference line to the area to be
measured in the [Width of Specific Position] tool. „ 55. Specify Detected Point
When there are multiple intersection points, specify the number of the
intersection point to detect.
„ 49. Measurement Method
Select the measurement method for [Distance from Reference] in the
[Width of Specific Position] tool. „ 56. Processing mode
• [Line] can measure the distance between two points by setting a point Select the processing mode (Stable/Fast) for the [Gap] tool.
tool on a position away from the reference.
• [Rectangle] can measure the distance between two lines by setting
a rectangle edge detection area on the [Distance from Reference] „ 57. Round groove (Ball screws, etc.)
position. Set the range on the round groove where is regarded as a circle.

„ 50. Exclusion Area Settings


Set the area to be excluded from measurement with the [Gap] tool.
By setting appropriate values for the area and offset, the gap
at the ends of the target can also be measured.

z Area
Set the area to be excluded (OFF/Starting Side/Ending Side/Both Sides).

z Exclusion Range
Specify how many segments are to be excluded from the specified side of
the segments found by the edges (gaps) when searching for edges (gaps)
by segment from the starting side or ending side. The range of edges
specified to be excluded is shown by a light purple circle (¡).

„ 51. Abnormal Segment Tolerance


Set the allowable number of contiguous segments when areas contain
abnormal segments for the [Gap] tool. The alarm will not be triggered if
there are contiguous abnormal segments below this number.
Segments will be processed as abnormal segments in the following cases:
• Dark (light) widths are detected with the settings that measure light (dark)
widths.
• There are no edges in the segment.

3-33
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

Output Settings

Total Status Results Output

Select the output destination for the judgment and measurement results,
and the items to be output.

• [SD Card] and [USB HDD] cannot be selected as the


z Judgment Target output destination at the same time.
• [USB HDD] and [FTP Server] cannot be selected as the
Select the tool to be a judgment target of total status.
output destination at the same time.
z Terminal Output Conditions • If images are being output to [USB HDD], [FTP Server]
cannot be selected as the output destination.
Outputs the total status result for an NG
NG Judgment • If images are being output to [FTP Server], [USB HDD]
judgment.
cannot be selected as the output destination.
Outputs the total status result for an OK
OK Judgment
judgment. z SD Card/USB HDD
[Saving Folder] and [Results File Name] are fixed.
(Example)
z Output Mode The save destination for the results of SD1 Program No. 001 when output
Outputs the judgment result every time the total to the SD memory card is “SD2:\tm-x\result\SD1_001”.
Update Every Judge
status result is finalized. In addition, the output file name is [yymmdd]_[hhmmss].csv.
(Example: 201215_051128.csv)
When the judgment result is output, the status
is held regardless of the subsequent total Output to an SD memory card was assessed when adjusting
Hold Status
status. start-up and operations over a short period of time.
It will not be turned off until the counter is reset.

Outputs the total status result for only the time z FTP Server
One Shot Output Any [Saved folder name] can be specified.
set for [One Shot Time].
[Results file name] is [yymmdd]_[hhmmss].txt.
(Example: 201215_051128.txt)
Global settings to connect to an FTP server need to be configured.
Terminal “Communications & I/O” (Page 4-2)

z Non-Procedural
[RS-232C] or [Ethernet] can be selected as the output destination.
Global settings to perform non-procedural communication need to be
configured.
“Communications & I/O” (Page 4-2)

z Terminal settings
Assign the output conditions (OK Judgment/NG Judgment) and the tool to
assign to the output terminal.

z Output Mode
Outputs the judgment result every time the total
Update Every Judge
status result is finalized.

Outputs the total status result for only the time


One Shot Output
set for [One Shot Time].

z External Terminal
“External Terminal” (Page 4-4)

3-34
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Settings Menu

z Field Network z Output Target


Set the items to output results with EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, PLC-Link, or Set [Head A], [Head B], or [Both].
EtherCAT (CB-NEC20E: Optional).
EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be used by attaching
z Output Timing
This setting can only be specified when [Hold Mode] is set to [ON].
the communication expansion unit (optional) as well as Select [Every Measurement Period] or [Always Output].
connecting the field network via the controller’s Ethernet port.

• Bit Allocation Area (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT)


z Output Conditions
Select [Output Every NG] or [Always Output].

z Process Priority
Select [Measurement First] or [Image First].

z Naming Rule
Set [New Folder Rule], [File Naming Rule], or [File Format].
When [Customize] is selected in [File Naming Rule], the
format of the output file name is editable using [Measured
Value], [Judgment Result], [Variables], [Date/Time], [String],
[Externally Specified String], [Image Specified Info].
However, be careful about the following.
• When the file name is blank, the image is not output.
• Files with the same name will be overwritten.
• For [Head Judgment], when outputting images from a
• Byte Allocation Area simple monitor, the string will be “capture”.
(EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, PLC-Link, and EtherCAT) • When [Image Buffer] is on, [Externally Specified String]
cannot be reflected correctly (the string will be the one set
for measurement).

• When using this setting with [Hold Mode] set to [ON]


• EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT:
Selecting [Update Every Timing] updates the
measurement value by inputting TIMING, ZERO,
MSR_RESET, and RESET_ALL (the internal z Output simple monitor image
measurement value will not update). Configure output settings for images to be displayed on the simple
• PLC-Link: monitor.
Selecting [Acknowledge result output completion] [Image Output] is the same for the [Image Output Location],
and [Enable Handshake] for [Output Results] obtains [Priority], and [Naming Rule] settings.
the updated measurement values. If [Enable Image Output] is selected, these items for simple
• Settings can only be configured when the monitor image output cannot be set.
communications method is selected in [Global] >
[Communications & I/O] > [Field Network].
For details on global settings, refer to “Field
network” (Page 4-4).

Image Output

z Memory Settings
“Memory Setting” (Page 4-10)

Logic Setting

Configure the image output settings.

z Enable Image Output


If the check box is selected, image output can be set.

z Image Output Location


Select [SD Card], [FTP], or [USB HDD].
[Destination] can be specified only when [FTP] is selected.

To output [Image Output] and [Results Output] to [USB


HDD] or [FTP], set the same destination.

Measurement tool operators (AND/OR) can be set to Logic 1 to 16.

3-35
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Edit Menu

Edit Menu
z Open the Folder of the Image Capture
Opens folders where image captures are saved.
This menu is a TM-X Navigator-only function.

z Setting the Folder of the Image Captures


Set the destination folder to save the screen captures.

z Display Options
• Common
Set the items to be displayed on the [Setup] mode and [Run] mode
screens.
The following items can be set:
• Main View Numeric Display Format
• Main View Numeric Display Color
• Measurement Result Display
• Display Settings for Measurement Items (Select [View], [Show Only
List], or [Hide])
• Show or hide the Tool ID in Result Display
• Do not Display the Total Status

z Undo Region Editing


Movement of the detection region, size changes, and movement of the
position where the measurement results are displayed can be restored to
the previous position.

z Copy
The detection region and measurement tools can be copied.

z Paste
Pastes the copied detection region or measurement tool.
The pasted detection region can be moved to the desired position.

z Multiple Copy
“Multiple Copy” (Page 3-5) • Running Screen
Set the items to be displayed on the screen when changing to [Run] mode.
z Inverted Copy
“Inverted Copy” (Page 3-5)

z Replace with Diameter Tool


“Replace with Diameter Tool” (Page 3-5)

z Delete All Tools


Deletes all set tools.

z Delete All Unreferenced Tools


Delete all unreferenced element tools and auxiliary tools.

z Initialize the Current Recipe


Initializes the displayed recipe.
The values set for [Register Image], [Position Correction], [Measurement
Settings], and [Output Settings] are all reset. The following items can be set:
• Display Item Setting
z Copy Recipe • Measurement List Display
• Display Head
This function copies the settings of an existing recipe and pastes them into
another recipe. • Resolution Setting
Specify the source and destination for the recipe number, and then copy • Show or Hide the Recipe List.
the recipe. • Show or Hide the Latest NG Images.
The values set for [Register Image], [Position Correction], and • Enable or Disable Sending to Excel.
[Measurement Settings], are copied. • Excel Transfer Setting

If two heads are connected, the recipes for both heads are Send to Excel is a TM-X Navigator-only function. It is not
copied. available with the dedicated display.

• Simple Monitor
Sets the content to be displayed on the simple monitor.

z Open the Folder of the Imaging Files


Open the destination folder where imaging files are saved.
This menu is a TM-X Navigator-only function.

z Setting the Folder of the Imaging Files


Set the destination folder to save the imaging files.

3-36
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Program Operation

Program Operation
This section describes how to add, save, and edit programs, and other
program operations.
z Edit Program
Edit programs saved in the SD memory card.

• Program 000 to 999 can be specified for SD Card 1 and


SD Card 2. However, the actual number of programs that • Edit Name
can be registered varies depending on the SD memory Program names can be edited.
card capacity and settings.
• The system settings file can longer be referenced if SD • Copy
Card 1 is removed, preventing the controller from operating Copy the selected Program to another program.
properly. Programs saved on SD Card 1 can also be copied to SD
• The memory used for the SD memory card (in which setting Card 2.
values and other data are saved) is manufactured using
• Delete
highly advanced semiconductor technology. However,
Delete the selected program.
repeated data read/write or external noise may cause
failure or loss of data. It is strongly recommended that data • Edit Hold Mode
such as setting values are backed up regularly to other The [Hold mode] for the selected program can be changed.
storage media.
If [Trigger Multiple Times] is enabled in [Head Settings],
the [Hold mode] is fixed at [ON].
z Change Programs
Changes set programs.
z Backup
Back up programs.
Select the program to be backed up and save it to the specified backup
destination.

z Add New
Add Programs necessary for measurement processing.
[Program Name] can be set at the same time, so register an easy to
recognize Program name. If the dedicated display is being used, [Backup Destination]
can be set to [Dedicated Display USB Memory] or [SD Card
in Controller].

z Restore
Restore the program.
To individually restore a program, specify a restore destination first.

[Program Name] and [Hold Mode] can be edited with


[Editing Programs] after a new Program has been added.

z Save
Save the active program and global settings.

If the dedicated display is being used, [Source of Restoration]


can be set to [Dedicated Display USB Memory] or [SD Card
in Controller].

3-37
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Archived Image

Archived Image
Check archived images for the measurement results.
(2) (3)
Operation Menu for Archived Image
Displays a menu of archived images.
(1)
(4) (5)
(6)
(7)

(8) (9)

z Filter
Specify the type of image and period to display in [Archived Image].
(10) (11)

z Save Image
(1) Menu Saves the image selected in [Archived Images List].
Displays a menu of archived images. The image output destination and output target can be selected.
“Operation Menu for Archived Image” (Page 3-38)
(2) Head A/Head B
Select the head to display archived images.
(3) To Batch Test
Enters test mode based on the archived images.
“Batch Test” (Page 3-39)
(4) Select all/Select All NG
The images displayed in the archived images list can be selected all at
once.
(5) Update Image
Update the archived images list. z Image Loading
Set the conditions to import an image to [Image Loading].
(6) Image ID Number
Omitted images (1/X omissions) can also be loaded.
Unique ID number assigned for archived images.
If omitted images are loaded,
(7) Archived Images List the omitted information (BMP (1/X)) is displayed.
Displays a list of measurement result images.
Images to be saved can be selected individually.
Images being held in hold mode are displayed as one
group with a symbol.
Clicking the symbol enables the images grouped during
the hold period to be expanded and reviewed.

(8) View Toolbar


Changes the display magnification of the main
screen. z Archived Image Settings
Set the conditions and period to store images as archived images.
Fit the archived image being displayed onto the
entire view on the main screen.

(9) Measurement Information


Displays the measurement results and total status result for the archived
images selected in [Archived Images List].
(10) Main Screen
Expands the archived image selected in [Archived Images List]. • Store Trigger
(11) Tools List Set under what circumstances to output an image.
Displays a list of measurement tools set in the recipe. (This setting is only enabled if [Hold Mode] is set to [ON].)

Output processing is performed every time a


Always Output
trigger is input.

Perform output processing in Hold mode when


Every Measurement
TIMING is input (when the measurement
Period
period ends).

• Store Condition
Select the image type to archive (NG only/All).
This option cannot be selected if [Always Output] is selected for [Store
Trigger].

3-38
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Archived Image

Batch Test
Perform a batch test on archived images.
Tests can be run by changing the program content and other settings.
(1) (2) (3) (4)

(6)
(5)
(7)
(8)

(9) (10)

(11) (12)

(1) Execute
Run a batch test.
When in hold mode, the results are not from the
measurement period, but rather measurement and
judgment results for the respective images.

(2) Clear
Clears the batch test results.
(3) Display Statistics
Displays the results on [Statistical Information] after running a batch test.
Move the cursor on the Trend Graph and the image ID will be displayed.
“Statistics” (Page 3-40)
(4) To Archived Image
Go to [Archived Images].
“Archived Image” (Page 3-38)
(5) Select All/Select All NG
The images displayed in the archived images list can be selected all at
once.
(6) Executed count/NG count
Displays the results after running a batch test.
(7) Image ID Number
Unique ID numbers assigned for archived images.
(8) Archived Images List
Displays a list of measurement result images.
Images to be tested can be selected individually.
(9) View Toolbar
Changes the display magnification of the main
screen.

Fit the archived image being displayed onto the


entire view on the main screen.

(10) Measurement Information


Displays the test and total status results for the archived images
selected in [Archived Images List].
(11) Main Screen
Expands the archived image selected in [Archived Images List].
(12) Tools List
Displays a list of measurement tools set in the recipe.

3-39
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Statistics

Statistics
Check a trend graph and histogram based on the measurement results, and output the results in CSV format.

• [Statistics] can only be displayed in [Run] mode.


• Before starting [Statistics], select the data to be used in the statistics from [Start loading past data] or [Start from the latest data].

Trend graph
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (10) (11)

(7) (12)

(13)

(8)

(14)
(9)

(15)

(16)

(17)
(1) Start/stop (11) CSV Output
Start or stop data storage. Export statistical analysis data to a CSV file.
(2) Display Reset Data for which the items are selected in the “List of
Reset the magnification ratio of the trend graph. Measurement Values” is output.
(3) Show AB Cursor (12) Clear
Show or hide the AB cursor on the trend graph. Clears the accumulated data.
(4) Auto Scroll • Closing “Statistics” also clears the accumulated data.
Turn auto scroll for the trend graph on or off. • The trend graph and histogram are also cleared.
(5) Magnify the trend graph
Parts on the trend graph can be magnified by selecting them with the mouse. (13) Measured Value
Displays the measured value for the specified section if A/B console is
Magnify the graph in the vertical and horizontal directions. being displayed.
The value for each item is displayed if the display item is [Measured
Magnify the graph in the horizontal direction. Value] or [All].
Magnify the graph in the vertical direction. (14) Internal Measurement
Displays the internal measured value for the specified section if A/B
(6) Display Items console is being displayed.
Change the items displayed on the trend graph (Measured Value, The value for each item is displayed if the display item is [Internal
Internal Measured value, or All). Measurement] or [All].
(7) Measurement Item List (15) Data Points
Displays a list of measurement items set for the Program. Displays the stored data points.
Select the measurement items to be displayed on the trend graph. Up to 20,000 data points can be stored. Even if this number is reached,
data accumulation continues and the newest 20,000 data points are
When there is a measurement value out of the range (out
stored.
of the upper or lower limit), NG is displayed.
(16) Copy to Clipboard
(8) Trend Graph Copy statistics information, measured values, and internal measured
Displays the AB cursor and a trend graph of measurement items values for the selected measurement items.
selected in [Measurement Items List]. Copied data can be pasted for checking in notepad.
(9) Statistical Information (17) Display Range Setting
Displays statistical information about the measurement items displayed Moving the cursor to the left or right changes the display start and end
in the trend graph. positions.
Data for which the items are selected in the list of The display range can be changed by moving the cursor.
measurement values are used in statistics.
• When [Hold Mode] is set to [ON], the TIM button is
(10) List of Measurement Values displayed.
Displays the list of measurement values for the measurement items • When [External Trigger] is set for [Trigger Mode] in the
displayed in the trend graph. head settings, the trigger button is displayed.
The list of measurement values is the same setting as • If the dedicated display is being used, [Copy to Clipboard]
found on the histogram. is not available.

3-40
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Statistics

Histogram
(1) (5) (6) (7)

(2) (8)

(9)

(3)

(4)

(10)
(11)

(12) (13)

(1) Start/stop (7) CSV Output


Start or stop data storage. Export statistical analysis data to a CSV file.
(2) Measurement Item List (8) Clear
Displays a list of measurement items set for the Program. Clears the accumulated data.
Select the measurement items to be displayed on the histogram.
• Closing statistics also clears the accumulated data.
(3) Histogram • The trend graph and histogram are also cleared.
Displays a histogram of measurement items selected in [Measurement
Items List]. (9) Data count
The following items are displayed:
(4) Statistical Information
• No. of OKs: The number of results within the tolerance range + the
Displays statistical information about the measurement items displayed
number of results with no tolerance values
in the histogram.
• No. of NGs: The number of results outside of the tolerance range
(5) Specified point value display • NG ratio: No. of NGs ÷ (No. of OKs + No. of NGs) x 100
Displays the line degree (top) and measurements (bottom). • Max./Min. Tolerance: Displays the set maximum and minimum
• CP/CPK: Displays the process capability index
(6) List of Measurement Values
Displays the list of measurement values for the measurement items (10) Num. of Points
displayed on the histogram. Displays the stored data points.
Up to 20,000 data points can be stored. Even if this number is reached,
The list of measurement values is the same setting as
data accumulation continues and the newest 20,000 data points are
found on the trend graph.
stored.
(11) Copy to Clipboard
Copies statistics information and data count for the selected
measurement items.
(12) Auxiliary Line
Select the auxiliary line to be displayed on the histogram.
(13) Split Count
Select the number of segments on the histogram.

• When [Hold Mode] is set to [ON], the TIM button is


displayed.
• When [External Trigger] is set for [Trigger Mode] in the
head settings, the trigger button is displayed.
• If the dedicated monitor for TM-X is being used, [Copy to
Clipboard] is not available.

3-41
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual

4
Global Settings/
Utility
Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Communications & I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RS-232C Monitor/Ethernet Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
PROFINET Memory Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
PLC-Link Memory Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
EtherCAT Memory Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Memory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Archived Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Remove External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Head-to-head Adjustment Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Head-to-head Adjustment Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

4-1
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Global Settings

Global Settings
Communications & I/O RS-232C
Configure the following settings to communicate with external devices in
Settings for external I/O interface of the controller can be changed. the RS-232C non-procedural mode:
• Baud Rate
• Stop Bit
Network • Parity Bit
The settings can be changed for input and output of various data using the • Flow Control
controller Ethernet port. • Delimiter
If any incorrect settings are made the system as well
as other network equipment may not work properly.
For details of the setting value, consult the system or
network administrator.

Select the “Baud Rate” (bps) from the following options:


• 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200 (default)/230400

z Auto-Acquire IP Address (BOOTP)


Acquires the network configuration information (IP address/Subnet Mask/
Default Gateway) from the BOOTP server at the controller activation.
(Default: Disabled)
The received network information is reflected in the global settings.
When receiving the information from the BOOTP server fails at the next
activation, the stored configuration is used for activation.

z IP Address Settings
Set the network configuration information (IP address/Subnet Mask/Default
Gateway).
Specify the desired IP address for the controller if necessary.
• IP Address (default setting: 192.168.0.10)
• Subnet Mask (default setting: 255.255.255.0)
• Default Gateway (default setting: 0.0.0.0)
Send a ping command to the device to be connected (IP
address) from [Check Connection] to check the connection
with the controller. If the message “Failed to verify connection
with the connected device.” appears, check the IP address
settings and LAN cable.

z Non-Procedural (Command/Result Output)


• Port
Input the port number to use for non-procedural communication
(command/result output). (Default: 8600)
• Delimiter
Select the delimiter for the Ethernet communication from [CR] (default)
or [CR+LF].

z Port (PC Program)


Enter the port number to use when communicating with the PC program.
(default: 8601)

z MAC Address
Displays the MAC address for the controller.

z Jumbo Frame
Select the frame size (4 KB) to be used when using jumbo frames (default
setting: Disable).

• If the settings are changed, it is necessary to restart


the controller.
• This setting is only enabled on the Ethernet port on
the controller. The communication expansion unit (CB-
NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E) is not supported.
• To use jumbo frames, all devices on the network must
support jumbo frames.

4-2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Global Settings

FTP „ Server Settings


The controller functions as an FTP server.
The settings can be changed to use the controller as an FTP client or The SD memory card in the controller can be accessed from an external
server. FTP client via Ethernet.

„ Client Settings Available users are ‘admin’ (Administrator), ‘operator’


(Operator) and ‘anonymous’.
The controller can access an FTP server (PC or a network-enabled hard
disk with FTP server functionality) via Ethernet interface using its FTP (‘operator’ and ‘anonymous’ are read-only users.)
client function.

z Enable FTP Server


To take effect the [Enable FTP Server] setting change, the controller must
z Client Settings be restarted.
• Timeout
Enter the timeout period in seconds to wait for a response from the FTP
server during data output.
z Listen Port
Enter the port number to be opened for the FTP client.
(default: 5 seconds) (default: 21)
• Connection Retry Count To take effect the [Listen Port] setting change, the controller must be
Enter the number of attempts to log in when connection to the FTP restarted.
server fails.
(default: 1 second) z Password Setting
• Server Port Set an administrator (admin) and operator (operator) password.
Enter the port number of the FTP server used for control.
The characters that can be used are alphanumeric characters
(default: 21)
and symbols that are between 4 and 32 characters.
• Passive Mode
Alphabetic letters are case sensitive.
Check this option when using FTP in passive mode.
(default: ON (passive mode))
z Allow Anonymous User
z Server Settings (Target) Select this check box to permit access from anonymous users (user name
is ‘anonymous’).
• Server IP Address
Specify the IP address of the FTP server. (Default: Disabled)
(default: 192.168.0.30) When accessed by an anonymous user, operation of files and folders
• Controller IP Address on the controller, and transfer of files to the controller is not allowed (file
Shows the IP address of the controller. reading only is allowed).
• User Name
Specify the login user name of the FTP server.
• Password
Specify the login password of the FTP server.
• Send a ping command to the device to be connected (IP
address) from [Check Connection] to check the connection
with the controller. If the message “Failed to verify
connection with the connected device.” appears, check the
IP address settings and LAN cable.
• Press [Reset] to restore [Server Settings (Target)] to their
default settings.

z Specify FTP Output Base Path


Ticking this box will allow specification of the base path for the FTP output.
The base path specified here will be applied to all FTP outputs including
result and image outputs.

z Create Folder Per Controller


If this box is ticked, a folder with the controller’s IP address as its name will
be created and output via FTP when it is done.
This option can separate the data when outputting data from multiple
controllers to the same FTP server.

4-3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Global Settings

External Terminal Field network


Settings for data input/output through the controller’s external terminals
(parallel I/O connector and terminal block) can be changed. „ EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP-Unit
EtherNet/IP is an industrial protocol for communicating with a
„ Common Setting programmable logic controller (PLC) via the Ethernet port on the controller
or an EtherNet/IP Unit (CB-NEP20E: Optional).
Through EtherNet/IP, data input and output between the controller and
the PLC, as well as command issuance from the PLC to the controller are
possible.

z Input terminal
• Filter length: F_INx (ns)
To eliminate noise signals, specify the time for signals to be treated as
noise between 40 and 153600 ns (default setting: 2240 ns).
• Filter length: INx (ns)
To eliminate noisy signals, specify the time for signals to be treated as
noise between 40 and 81264600 ns (default setting: 800 ns).

z Output terminal
• STO Output Rise Time (ms)
Set the length of time from when the data is ready for output to when the • Displays the IP address setting field when [EtherNet/IP-
STO starts up within the range of 1 to 500 (ms). (Default: 5 ms) Unit] is selected.
• STO/ACK/NACK Output Duration (ms) • For details on communication/control using EtherNet/IP,
Set the length of time from when the STO rises to when the STO falls refer to “Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP”
within the range of 1 to 500 (ms). (Default: 10 ms) (Page 5-19).

„ Input Assignments
Select the signal to be assigned to the input terminals. „ PROFINET, PROFINET-Unit
PROFINET is an industrial protocol for communicating with a
programmable logic controller (PLC) via the Ethernet port on the controller
or a PROFINET Unit (CB-NPN20E: Optional).
Through PROFINET, data input and output between the controller and
the PLC, as well as command issuance from the PLC to the controller are
possible.

The same [Allocation Signal] cannot be set to multiple


[Terminal].
If [Allocation Signal] is duplicated, the field will be
displayed in orange.

„ Output Assignments
Select the output format and signal to be assigned to the output terminals.
• Normally open : Produces output in normal mode.
• Normally closed : Produces output inverted from normally open-mode
output.

• Displays the IP address setting field when [PROFINET IP-


Unit] is selected.
• For details on communication/control using PROFINET,
refer to “Overview of Control/Data Output Using
PROFINET” (Page 5-41).

The same [Allocation Signal] cannot be set to multiple


[Terminal].
If [Allocation Signal] is duplicated, the field will be
displayed in orange.

4-4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Global Settings

„ PLC-Link SNTP
PLC-Link is a communication mode where data transmission is performed
between the controller and the data memory of the PLC (programmable SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is a communications protocol that
logic controller) via the Ethernet interface on the controller. In addition to is used to synchronize computer clocks on a network.
measurement data output, command execution is also available through Enabling SNTP on a controller installed on the network that can
the PLC-Link. communicate via SNTP allows accurate time to be obtained by connecting
to a SNTP server and regularly synchronizing the time of the clock built
into the controller.

If an error occurs while synchronizing the time with the


SNTP server, an error message will appear on the lower
left of the screen. This error message will continue to be
displayed until synchronization is successful at the next
update cycle or SNTP settings are reconfigured.

z Enable SNTP
Selects whether to connect to the SNTP server and synchronize the time.
Check this box to enable.
For details on communication/control using PLC-Link, refer to
“Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link” (Page 5-60). z SNTP Server Settings (Destination)
Set the IP address for the SNTP server.
„ EtherCAT-Unit (default: 192.168.000.040)
EtherCAT is an industrial protocol for communicating with a programmable Use [Check Connection] to check whether communication
logic controller (PLC) via an EtherCAT Unit (CB-NEC20E: Optional). with the destination is possible.
By using EtherCAT, data input and output between the controller and the
PLC, as well as command issuance from the PLC to the controller are
possible.
z Time Zone
Select the time zone of the SNTP server to obtain the time from.
(default: 14: GMT)
Main time zones
4: GMT -8:00 Pacific Standard Time
6: GMT -6:00 Central Standard Time, Mexico City, Central America
9: GMT -4:00 Atlantic Standard Time
11: GMT -3:00 Brasilia
12: GMT -2:00 Central Atlantic Time
14: GMT London, Coordinated Universal Time
15: GMT +1:00 Berlin, Brussels, Rome, Paris, Bern
16: GMT +2:00 Athens, Jerusalem
17: GMT +3:00 Kuwait
19: GMT +4:00 Moscow
For details on communication/control using EtherCAT, refer
to “Changing EtherCAT Settings” (Page 5-55). 22: GMT +5:30 New Delhi
26: GMT +7:00 Bangkok
27: GMT +8:00 Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, Taipei, Beijing
28: GMT +9:00 Japan, Seoul
30: GMT +10:00 Canberra and Sydney

z Update Cycle (min.)


Set the cycle to obtain the time from the SNTP server.
(default: 1)

4-5
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Global Settings

System Reboot
The following settings can be configured: The controller can be restarted without turning the power off.
• Controller Name
• Startup Mode (default: Setup Mode)
• Angle Display Unit (default setting: Decimal)
• ERROR Output Settings Security
• A text string of up to 32 characters can be entered for the
controller name. Set a password to restrict editing of Programs.
• Decimal is set for the angle tolerance even when [Minutes/
Second] is set for [Angle Display Unit]. Additionally, the
[Excel Transfer] function sends minutes as the first and
second decimal points, and seconds as the third and fourth
decimal points.
For example, 12°34′56″ is saved in a cell as 12.3456.

The characters that can be used are alphanumeric characters


that are between 4 and 32 characters. Alphabetic letters are
case sensitive.

System Information
Hardware, available memory resources, and other information about the
system can be checked.

Date/Time
Use the following procedure to set the controllers built in clock.
The TW command can also be used to synchronize the time.

Language
The language for the following items can be changed:
• Language displayed on the controller screen.
• Language contained in archived images.
• Decimal point notation.
• Delimiter characters in CSV files.
Archived images can contain tool names in multiple
languages. Including the tool name in the desired display
language in the simulator enables the tool name to be
displayed in that language.
If the archived image does not include the tool name in the
applicable language, the tool name is displayed with the
default name.

4-6
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Utility

Utility
RS-232C Monitor/Ethernet Monitor
The communication status of signals input and output via the RS-232C
(A) port or Ethernet connector on the controller can be checked.
When proper data transmission between the connected devices fails, this
feature is very useful as the communication content can be verified while
the controller and external equipment are connected.
[RS-232C Monitor] and [Ethernet Monitor] can be used in
either [Setup] mode or [Run] mode.

The menu displayed above (indicated by (A)) may be one of


the following according to the settings in “Field network”
(Page 4-4):
• (None)
• EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor
• PROFINET Memory Monitor
• PLC-Link Memory Monitor
• EtherCAT Memory Monitor
z Current communication status
The status is updated in real time in response to input and output
commands.
I/O Monitor • [<] is given to the head of the output data from the controller while [>] is
given to the head of the input data to the controller.
The connection status of signals input and output via the I/O connector • Characters other than ASCII code are displayed in hexadecimal.
(parallel I/O interface and terminal block interface) of the controller can be
checked. z Start/Stop
When proper signal transmission between the connected devices fails, Start or stop the display of communication details.
this feature is very useful as the connection status of the terminal in the
controller can be verified while the controller and external equipment are z Copy to Clipboard
Copy the communications log to the clipboard.
connected.
• [I/O Monitor] can be used in either Setup mode or Run
mode.
• When [External Trigger] is set, the [Trigger] button is
displayed in [Run] mode.

z Manual output
With this item selected, a specific output terminal can be forcefully set to
ON. After selecting this item, place a check mark on the box of the terminal
to set to ON.
[Manual Output] can be used only in [Setup] mode.

z Check box of each terminal


Indicates the connection status of each terminal. A check mark is placed
on the terminal in the ON (short circuit) status. The status is updated in
real time in response to input and output signals.

4-7
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Utility

EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor PROFINET Memory Monitor


The communications status for input and output signals during EtherNet/IP The communications status for input and output signals during PROFINET
communications via the controller or the EtherNet/IP unit (CB-NEP20E: Optional) communications via the controller or the PROFINET unit (CB-NPN20E:
can be checked. Optional) can be checked.
When proper data transmission between the connected devices fails, this When proper data transmission between the connected devices fails, this
feature is very useful as the communication content can be verified while feature is very useful as the communication content can be verified while
the controller and external equipment are connected. the controller and external equipment are connected.
• If [EtherNet/IP] or [EtherNet/IP-Unit] is selected for “Field • If [PROFINET] or [PROFINET-Unit] is selected for “Field
network” (Page 4-4), [EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor] is network” (Page 4-4), [PROFINET Memory Monitor] is
available. available.
• When [Cyclic Communication Status] is [Not Connected], • When [Cyclic Communication Status: ] is [Not Connected],
monitoring is not possible. Use the monitor after monitoring is not possible. Use the monitor after
establishing the EtherNet/IP connection. establishing a PROFINET connection.
• The [EtherNet/IP Memory Monitor] function can be used in • The [PROFINET Memory Monitor] function can be used in
either [Setup] mode or [Run] mode. either [Setup] mode or [Run] mode.
• When [External Trigger] is set, the [Trigger] button is • When [External Trigger] is set, the [Trigger] button is
displayed in [Run] mode. displayed in [Run] mode.

z Receive-Data of This Machine z Receive-Data of This Machine

Select the values to be monitored from [Data Format] on the upper right of Select the values to be monitored from [Data Format] on the upper right of
the screen. the screen.

z Send-Data of This Machine z Send-Data of This Machine

• Select the values to be monitored from [Data Format] on the upper right
• Select the values to be monitored from [Data Format] on the upper right
of the screen.
of the screen.
• Select [Manual Output] to manually change the value for the selected
• Select [Manual Output] to manually change the value for the selected
address and confirm the change on the PLC side.
address and confirm the change on the PLC side.
[Manual Output] can be used only in [Setup] mode. [Manual Output] can be used only in [Setup] mode.

4-8
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Utility

z Results Data
PLC-Link Memory Monitor
Check the system’s PLC-Link I/O signal communication status with this
function.
When proper data transmission between the connected devices fails, this
feature is very useful as the communication content can be verified while
the controller and external equipment are connected.

• Use of [PLC-Link Memory Monitor] is available only when


[PLC-Link] is selected in “Field network” (Page 4-4).
• When [Connection Status] is [Not Connected], monitoring
is not possible. Use the monitor after establishing the PLC-
link connection.
• The [PLC-Link Memory Monitor] function can be used in
either [Setup] mode or [Run] mode.
• When [External Trigger] is set, the [Trigger] button is
displayed in [Run] mode.

• Select the values to be monitored from [Data Format] on the upper right
of the screen.
• Select [Manual Output] to manually change the value for the selected
address and confirm the change on the PLC side.
• The number of items of results data displayed can be changed in [Result
Data Display Count].

z Communication Settings

Displays the status of communications with the PLC.

z Command Data

• Select the values to be monitored from [Data Format] on the upper right
of the screen.
• The number of command parameters displayed can be changed in
[Command Parameter Display Count].
• Select [Manual Output] to manually change the value for the selected
address and confirm the change on the PLC side.
• The number of command results displayed can be changed in [Command
Result Display Count].
[Manual Output] can be used only in [Setup] mode.

4-9
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Utility

EtherCAT Memory Monitor Statistics


The communications status for input and output signals during EtherCAT Check a trend graph based on the measurement results and output results
communications via an EtherCAT unit (CB-NEC20E: Optional) can be in CSV format.
checked. “Statistics” (Page 3-40)
When proper data transmission between the connected devices fails, this
feature is very useful as the communication content can be verified while
the controller and external equipment are connected.
• Use of [EtherCAT Memory Monitor] is available only when Memory Setting
[EtherCAT-Unit] is selected in “Field network” (Page 4-4).
• When [Cyclic Communication Status] is [Not Connected],
monitoring is not possible. Use the monitor after
establishing the EtherCAT connection.
• The [EtherCAT Memory Monitor] function can be used in
either [Setup] mode or [Run] mode.
• When [External Trigger] is set, the [Trigger] button is
displayed in [Run] mode.

[Memory Setting] can only be set in [Setup] mode.

z Number of Output Images Saved


Set the number of saved images to be output from the controller.

z Measurement Period Setting


These settings are only enabled if [Hold Mode] is set to [ON].
Set the maximum number of output images to save, number of images to
omit, and images to be saved during the measurement period.

z Number of Simple Monitor Images Saved


Sets the number of saved images to be displayed on the Simple Monitor.

Images are saved in the controller’s internal memory


z Receive-Data according to the following settings:
• Number of image buffers in [Head Settings]
• [Image Output]/[Simple Monitor Image Output] for [Output
Condition]
• [Store Condition] for [Archived Image Settings]

If [Output Condition] for [Image Output]/[Simple Monitor


Image Output] and [Store Condition] for [Archived Image
Settings] are the same, the remaining areas excluding the
image buffer are assigned to the “Image Output,” “Simple
Monitor Image Output,” and “Archived Images” areas.
(One image is used for both image output and image
archive.)

Image Output/
Simple Monitor Image Output/
Image
Archived Image
Buffer
(Number of output images saved/
Number of simple monitor images saved)

Select the values to be monitored from [Data Format] on the upper right of
If [Output Condition] for [Image Output]/[Simple Monitor
the screen.
Image Output] and [Store Condition] for [Archived Image
z Controller send-data Settings] are not the same, the remaining areas assigned to
“Image Buffer” and “Image Output”/“Simple Monitor Image
Output” are assigned to the “Archived Images” area.
(Images are stored as archived images in addition to being
output.)

Image output/
Simple monitor image output
Image Archived
(Number of output images saved/
Buffer Image
Number of simple monitor images
saved)

• Select the values to be monitored from [Data Format] on the upper right
of the screen.
• Select [Manual Output] to manually change the value for the selected
address and confirm the change on the PLC side.

[Manual Output] can be used only in [Setup] mode.

4-10
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Utility

Archived Image Settings Head-to-head Adjustment Execution


Set the conditions and period to store images as archived images. The positional relationship between heads can be adjusted when [Head-
“Archived Image Settings” (Page 3-38) to-head Adjustment Setting] is configured.
This function assumes that an object of known size is regularly used for
adjustment (when necessary) prior to operation.
A

Remove External Media


Remove safely the SD card 2 inserted in the controller or the USB HDD
connected to the controller. In addition, format SD Card 2 or USB HDD.

• Make sure to always follow the on-screen instructions


to protect the SD memory card and the data it contains.
• If the SD memory card or USB HDD is removed using
a procedure other than that specified, or if power is
turned off when the card is being accessed, any writing
task will stop resulting in a possible loss of data or
damage to the SD memory card.

By using [Manual Adjustment], the positional relationship


between heads can be adjusted manually.

Head-to-head Adjustment Setting


This function adjusts the positional relationship between heads when
measuring an object with two heads that cannot be measured by one head
(such as the diameter of a large object).
Adjust the positional relationship by following the on-screen instructions.
Use the object for adjustment for which the size is known to make the
adjustments.

Clicking [Initialize] deletes the head-to-head adjustment


value.

4-11
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual

5
List of Communication Commands for Control . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Notes on Command Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
List of Operation Modes and Available Input Commands . . . . . . 5-3

I/O Control and Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4


System control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Change inspection program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Timing Charts
Measurement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
I/O control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fetching Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Head-to-head Adjustment Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Image Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Simple Monitor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Setting change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Head Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . 5-19


Controller EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications . . . . . . . 5-19
Allocation Conditions of Cyclic Communication Data . . . . . . . . 5-20
Changing the EtherNet/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Outputting Measurement Data Using EtherNet/IP Cyclic
Communications (Data Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Controlling the Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic
Communication (Command Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Controlling the Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic
Communication (Change Recipe Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Communicating with the Controller Using EtherNet/IP
Message Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET . . . . . 5-41


Controller PROFINET Communication Specifications . . . . . . . 5-41
Changing PROFINET Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Outputting Measurement Data Using PROFINET Periodic
Communications (Data Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Controlling the Controller with PROFINET Periodic
Communication (Command Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Controlling the Controller with PROFINET Cyclic
Communication (Change Recipe Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT . . . . . 5-51


Standard Specifications for the EtherCAT Unit
(CB-NEC20E: Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Models that Support EtherCAT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Allocation Conditions of Cyclic Communication Data . . . . . . . . 5-52
Changing EtherCAT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Outputting Measurement Data Using EtherCAT Cyclic
Communications (Data Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Controlling the Controller with EtherCAT Cyclic
Communication (Command Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Controlling the Controller with EtherCAT Cyclic
Communication (Change Recipe Number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60


Models that Support the PLC Link Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Preparing the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Changing the PLC-Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Outputting the Measurement Data with PLC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Controlling the Controller via PLC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal . . . . . . . 5-66


Functions available with the I/O terminal on the controller . . . . 5-66
Terminal Block Interface (OUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Terminal Block Interface (IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Parallel I/O Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Using command inputs via I/O terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
I/O command inputs available on the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
I/O command control procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Outputting judgment values via I/O terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74

5-1
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

List of Communication Commands for Control


Notes on Command Input/Output

When using non-procedural commands When using number-specified commands


Specification and execution of each command number is processed in 1
z Command input during operation word.
• Command input is accepted during operation. However, if commands
need to be executed in a high-speed operation line, remember that z Command input during operation
execution of commands may suspend trigger acceptance. Command input is accepted during operation. However, if commands need
• The execution time of a command depends on the amount of load on to be executed in a high-speed operation line, remember that execution of
the controller and the type of operation performed by the controller. For commands may suspend trigger acceptance.
the use in which a program must wait for command execution to be
completed before starting the next inspection, be careful of the waiting z When an error occurs upon command acceptance
time fluctuation according to the conditions mentioned above. The error code is written in the command result address as the execution
result. The error response consists of the following information:
z Number of characters for command parameters 0 Success
Any number of parameter characters within the range specified for each
command can be entered.
02 Command error (The received command is invalid.)
z When an error occurs upon command acceptance 03 Command action disabled (The received command cannot work.)
An error response “ER, **, nn” will be returned.
The error response consists of the following information: 22 The number or range of the parameter is incorrect.
** Received command that caused the error

2-digit error code


z An example of error output
When the No. 1005 (unavailable number) is specified for program No.
• 02: Command error changing command, “22” is written in the command result address as
(The received command is invalid.) binary data of 1 word.
• 03: Command action disabled
nn (The received command cannot work.) z Example: Changing the current program No. to
• 22: Parameter error program No. 10 stored in SD card 1 using
(The value of parameter data or the number of data pieces is the PLC-Link.
outside the range.) The detailed command assignments for this example is shown below.
• 91: Timeout error
TM-X5000 PLC
z An example of error output Series
DM100 24 Command Address
When the No. 1005 (unavailable number) is specified for program No. Read command
changing command (PW), “ER,PW,22” is returned as response data. Run command DM101
DM102 1 Command Address +2
SD Card 1 DM103
Changing to DM104 10 Command Address +4
Program No. 10 DM105
Command
execution result When successful
DM200 0 Command Result Address
For an 03 Error
DM200 3 Command Result Address

5-2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

List of Operation Modes and Available Input Commands


ü = Possible

Command Command I/O terminal


Command type Function name number command Run Setup Block*6
(No protocol) (Field network) support

Trigger Trigger T1 1 *1 ×*3 ü ü ×

Switch to run mode R0 8 × ü ü ü

Switch to setup mode S0 9 × ü ü ×


*1 *3
Reset RS 10 × ü × x

System control Reboot RB 11 × ü ü x

Save Program SS 12 ü ü ü x
*1
Clear error CE 13 ü ü ü x

Read run/setup mode RM 16 × ü ü ü

Change inspection programs PW 24 ü ü ü x


Change inspection
program
Read program setting PR 25 × ü ü x
*2
Change recipe EXW 41 ü ü ü x

Read recipe EXR 42 × ü ü x


*1 *4
Timing TIM 52 ü ü ü x
Measurement control
*1 *4
Auto zero ZR 53 ü ü ü x
*1 *4
Reset measured value MRS 54 ü ü ü x
*1 *4
Reset measured value (all templates) RSA 55 ü ü ü x

Enable/Disable Trigger Input TE 56 ×*3 ü ü x


I/O control
*3
Enable/Disable Output OE 57 × ü × x

Replace the externally specified string STW 60 x ü ü x

Read the externally specified string STR 61 x ü ü x

Utility Clear Archived Image HC 66 × ü ü x

Change Output File/Folder OW 69 ü ü × x

Echo EC - × ü ü ü

Write Date & Time TW 80 × ü ü x

Read Date & Time TR 81 × ü ü x

System Read version information VI 82 × ü ü ü

Write time zone TZW 83 × ü × x

Read time zone TZR 84 × ü × x

Fetch internal measurement values GR 104 × ü × x


Fetch measurement
results
Fetch measured values GM 112 × ü × x

Head-to-head Adjustment *5
Head-to-head Adjustment Execution HAE 122 × × ü x
Execution

Write image composition capture cycle ICCW 128 x x ü x


Image Composition
Read image composition capture cycle ICCR 129 x ü ü x

Change simple monitor view strings AIW - x ü ü x


Simple Monitor View
Obtain simple monitor view strings AIR - x ü ü x

Write tool settings TSW 130 x x ü x

Setting change Read tool settings TSR 131 x ü ü x

Clear tool settings TSC 132 x x ü x

Head Adjustment Obtain optical axis state OASR 136 x x ü x

*1 In addition to running commands, functions can also be run by operating a bit device with assigned commands.
*2 Recipe numbers can also be changed by changing the recipe number area for the word device.
*3 Can be run from the input terminal.
*4 Can also be run from the input terminal.
*5 Execution is only possible after the head-to-head adjustment start command is issued.
*6 When switching to setup mode with another device, the commands from the previous device will be “Block”.
(Example) The commands from the PLC will be “Block” when using the PLC to control, but then switching [Setup] modes from the dedicated monitor (TM-
MP120) or TM-X Navigator.

5-3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

Trigger System control

T1: Issue Trigger R0: Switch to run mode


This command issues a trigger. Changes from setup mode to run mode. The operation will finish
successfully even if it is executed in run mode.
z For non-procedural commands
• Send z For non-procedural commands
T1 Issue a trigger • Send
• Receive R0
T1 • Receive
R0
z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “1”. z For number-specified commands
• Send The number-specified command No. is “8”.
• Send
Word Device *
Word Device *
1
8
* Starting word device (command address)
• Receive * Starting word device (command address)
• Receive
Word Device *
Word Device *
Execution
Return value
result Execution
Return value
result
* Starting word device (command result address)
* Starting word device (command result address)
z Execution result
0 Success
z Execution result
0 Success
• The command was sent when triggers could not be accepted
or when trigger input was disabled (when READY is not 22 An unnecessary parameter is included.
03
turned on).
• When the command was issued in Setup mode.
z Real-time performance
Executes command data immediately.
22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance S0: Switch to setup mode


The measurement processing time will not be affected.
This command switches from run mode to setup mode. The operation will
finish successfully even if it is executed in setup mode.

z For non-procedural commands


• Send
S0
• Receive
S0

z For number-specified commands


The number-specified command No. is “9”.
• Send

Word Device *

* Starting word device (command address)


• Receive

Word Device *

Execution
Return value
result

* Starting word device (command result address)

z Execution result
0 Success

22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
completes execution.

5-4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

RS: Reset SS: Save Program


This command performs all of the following: This command saves the current program settings and global settings.
• Clears all buffers including the image buffer.
• Creates a new file name for the file used to store data. z For non-procedural commands
• Initializes total status output. • Send
• Clears OUT_DATA0 to OUT_DATA15. SS
• Clears all of history data. • Receive
• Clears the measurement count. SS

z For non-procedural commands z For number-specified commands


• Send The number-specified command No. is “12”.
RS • Send
• Receive Word Device *
RS
12
z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “10”. * Starting word device (command address)
• Send • Receive
Word Device * Word Device *

10 Execution
Return value
result
* Starting word device (command address)
• Receive * Starting word device (command result address)

Word Device * z Execution result


Execution 0 Success
Return value
result
• The SD memory card has not been inserted or cannot be
* Starting word device (command result address) 03 accessed.
• When the command was issued in Setup mode.
z Execution result
22 An unnecessary parameter is included.
0 Success

03 When the command was issued in Setup mode. z Real-time performance


The measurement processing time will not be affected.
22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance CE: Clear error


If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
completes execution. This command clears the error status. Even when an error status does not
exist, the command execution finishes normally.

RB: Reboot
z For non-procedural commands
• Send
This command saves the current program settings and reboots the CE
system. • Receive
CE
z For non-procedural commands z For number-specified commands
• Send
RB The number-specified command No. is “13”.
• Receive • Send
RB Word Device *
z For number-specified commands 13
The number-specified command No. is “11”.
• Send * Starting word device (command address)
• Receive
Word Device *
Word Device *
11
Execution
* Starting word device (command address) Return value
result
• Receive
* Starting word device (command result address)
Word Device *

Execution
z Execution result
Return value
result 0 Success

* Starting word device (command result address) 03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.

z Execution result 22 An unnecessary parameter is included.


0 Success
z Real-time performance
03 When the command was issued in Setup mode. The measurement processing time will not be affected.

22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
• If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
completes execution.
• When data is being output, the process is synchronized according to the
OE command timing, and then the command is executed.

5-5
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

RM: Read Run/Setup Mode


This command reads the status of the controller (i.e. whether it is in run
mode or setup mode).

z For non-procedural commands


• Send
RM
• Receive
RM,n

z For number-specified commands


The number-specified command No. is “16”.
• Send

Word Device *

No. 16

* Starting word device (command address)


• Receive

Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3

Execution
n
result

* Starting word device (command result address)

z Parameters (common)
Controller status
n • 0: Setup mode
• 1: Run mode

z Execution result
0 Success

22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-6
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

PR: Read Programs


Change inspection program
This command reads the SD memory card number and the setting number
of the program currently being read.
PW: Change programs z For non-procedural commands
This command closes all open dialogs and loads the program of the • Send
specified number (nnn) from the SD memory card. PR
• Any changes to the setting data is discarded. • Receive
• To retain the program number after changing programs, save the global PR,d,nnn
setting file with the save program command (SS command).
z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “25”.
z For non-procedural commands • Send
• Send
PW,d,nnn Word Device *
• Receive
PW 25

z For number-specified commands * Starting word device (command address)


The number-specified command No. is “24”. • Receive
• Send
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5
Execution
Return value d nnn
24 d nnn result

* Starting word device (command address) * Starting word device (command result address)
• Receive
z Parameters (common)
Word Device *
SD memory card No. (1 or 2)
Execution d • 1: SD1
Return value • 2: SD2
result

* Starting word device (command result address) nnn Program No. (0 to 999)

z Parameters (common) z Execution result


SD memory card No. (1 or 2)
d • 1: SD1 0 Success
• 2: SD2
03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.
nnn Program No. (0 to 999)
22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Execution result z Real-time performance


0 Success The measurement processing time will not be affected.

• The program No. does not exist.


• The SD memory card has not been inserted or cannot be
03
accessed.
• When the command was issued in Setup mode.

22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.

z Real-time performance
If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
completes execution.

5-7
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

TIM: Timing
Measurement control
This command issues the timing input for the active recipe number.

z For non-procedural commands


EXW: Change Recipe • Send
This command changes to the specified recipe number. TIM
• Receive
z For non-procedural commands TIM
• Send
EXW,n z For number-specified commands
• Receive The number-specified command No. is “52”.
EXW • Send
Word Device *
z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “41”. 52
• Send
* Starting word device (command address)
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 • Receive

41 n Word Device *

* Starting word device (command address) Execution


Return value
• Receive result

Word Device * * Starting word device (command result address)

Execution z Execution result


Return value
result 0 Success
* Starting word device (command result address) 03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.

z Parameters (common) 22
• The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.
n 1 to 8 (Recipe No.) • An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Execution result z Real-time performance


The measurement processing time will not be affected.
0 Success

03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.

22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

EXR: Read Recipe No.


This command reads the active recipe number.

z For non-procedural commands


• Send
EXR
• Receive
EXR,n

z For number-specified commands


The number-specified command No. is “42”.
• Send

Word Device *

42

* Starting word device (command address)


• Receive

Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3

Execution
n
result

* Starting word device (command result address)

z Parameters (common)
n 1 to 8 (Recipe No.)

z Execution result
0 Success

03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.

22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-8
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

ZR: Auto Zero MRS: Reset Measured Value


This command issues an auto zero ON or OFF request for the active This command requests to reset the measured value for the active recipe
recipe number. number.
The auto zero value (the value that calibrates zero) is not
saved. Run the save (SS) command as necessary.
z For non-procedural commands
• Send
MSR
z For non-procedural commands • Receive
• Send MSR
ZR,m,t,nnn,…,nnn
• Receive z For number-specified commands
ZR The number-specified command No. is “54”.
• Send
z For number-specified commands Word Device *
The number-specified command No. is “53”.
• Send
54
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5 *+6 *+7 ...
* Starting word device (command address)
53 m t nnn ... nnn • Receive
* Starting word device (command address) Word Device *
• Receive
Execution
Word Device * result
Execution * Starting word device (command result address)
Return value
result
* Starting word device (command result address) z Execution result
0 Success
z Parameters (common)
03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.
• 0: Auto zero OFF
m
• 1: Auto zero ON 22 An unnecessary parameter is included.
No. of tools subject to the command
t Specifying 0 makes all tools used with the active recipe number z Real-time performance
subject to the command. The measurement processing time will not be affected.

ID of the tool subject to the command (200 to 299, 500 to 599)


nnn However, when t = 0 (all tools), this parameter does not need to
be specified. RSA: Reset Measured Value (All Templates)
This command requests to reset the measured value for all recipe
z Execution result numbers (including recipe numbers that are not active).

0 Success z For non-procedural commands


• Send
03 When the command was issued in Setup mode. RSA
• Receive
The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect. RSA
(Error conditions when multiple tools are specified)
22
• At least one value outside of the tool ID range is specified z For number-specified commands
• The tool ID has been duplicated The number-specified command No. is “55”.
• (For non-procedural commands) The number of targeted tools • Send
and the number of sent tool IDs does not match
Word Device *

z Real-time performance 55
The measurement processing time will not be affected.
* Starting word device (command address)
• Receive

Word Device *

Execution
result

* Starting word device (command result address)

z Execution result
0 Success

03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.

22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-9
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

OE: Enable/disable output


I/O control
This command disables the data/image output to the output buffer and
clears the data in the buffer, so that data output to external devices is
controlled.
TE: Enable/disable trigger input Executing “OE,1” (enabled) when output is enabled and “OE,0” (disabled)
When “TE,0” is executed, the READY terminal is set to remain off and thus when output is disabled does not result in an error.
no trigger input will be accepted. When “TE,1” is executed, trigger input This command controls the following output functions:
will be accepted. • Results output (terminal block, Ethernet, RS-232C, PLC-Link,
Executing “TE,1” with the trigger enabled and “TE,0” with the trigger input EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, SD card, USB HDD, FTP)
disabled does not result in an error. • Image output (SD card, USB HDD, FTP)

• The trigger disabled state cannot be saved in the z For non-procedural commands
settings. The trigger returns to being able to be input • Send
when the power is turned off and on. OE,n
• The TE command functions are in the same way as • Receive
the EXT terminal. The trigger disabled state is the OR OE
(logical disjunction) operator of the EXT input terminal
and “TE,0” issue state. z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “57”.
• Send
z For non-procedural commands
• Send Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3
TE,n
• Receive 57 n
TE * Starting word device (command address)
• Receive
z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “56”. Word Device *
• Send
Execution
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 Return value
result
56 n * Starting word device (command result address)
* Starting word device (command address)
• Receive
z Parameters (common)
• 0: Output disabled
Word Device * n
• 1: Output enabled
Execution
Return value
result z Execution result
* Starting word device (command result address) 0 Success

z Parameters (common) 03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.

• 0: Trigger input disabled 22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.
n
• 1: Trigger input enabled
z Real-time performance
z Execution result The measurement processing time will not be affected.
0 Success z Details of command behavior when executed
Results output
03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.
• Output is aborted at the data unit set in results output (even if output is
22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect. disabled during “one output of results,” that “one output of results” does
not stop).
• If output is enabled, output is resumed the next time result output
z Real-time performance is possible (results when output is disabled will be not output and
The measurement processing time will not be affected. discarded).
Terminal output
• Outputs to STO, OUT_DATA0 to 15, OR terminal blocks are immediately
shut off and the state is set to normal.
• Even while output is disabled, the total status result of OR changes.
However, such change is not applied to the terminal blocks.
• Even if STO and OUT_DATA0 to 15 output is disabled, the values do
not change.
• For STO and OUT_DATA0 to 15, output is resumed at the next trigger
execution (results when output is disabled will be not output and
discarded).
Relationship with TEST
• There is no priority setting between OE and TEST terminal. The latest
status, enabled or disabled, is reflected to the internal operation.
(Example)
Inputting “OE,1” (enable) when TEST=ON (disable) enables output.
Then, specifying ON (disable) when TEST=OFF (enable) disables
output.
• Output is enabled or disabled based on the status (level) of TEST
immediately after the controller is turned on, reset, or the program is
changed.
(Example)
Inputting “OE,1” (enable) when TEST=ON (disable) enables output.
Then, when the program is changed later, output is disabled when
TEST=ON (disable).

5-10
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

STR: Read the externally specified string


Utility
This command reads the content of the externally specified string.

z For non-procedural commands


STW: Replace the externally specified string • Send
This command replaces the externally specified string. STR,n
• Receive
z For non-procedural commands STR,ssss
• Send • Parameter
STW,n,”ssss
n To specify the externally specified string to be read (0 to 9)
• Receive
STW ssss The externally specified string (number of characters 0 to 64)
• Parameter

n To specify the externally specified string to be replaced (0 to 9) z For number-specified commands


The number-specified command No. is “61”.
ssss The string used for replacement (number of characters 0 to 64) • Send
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3
z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “60”. 61 n
• Send
* Starting word device (command address)
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5 *+6 *+7 ...
• Receive
60 n s1 s2 ...
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5 *+6 *+7 ...
* Starting word device (command address)
Execution
• Receive s1 s2 s3 ...
result
Word Device * * Starting word device (command result address)
Return value Execution result • Parameter

* Starting word device (command result address) n To specify the externally specified string to be read (0 to 9)
• Parameter The externally specified string (number of characters 0 to 64)
n To specify the externally specified string to be replace (0 to 9) ssss In the receive data, use two words for one character, the end
code is 0 (zero).
The string used for replacement (number of characters 0 to 64)
ssss In the send data, use two words for one character, the end
code is 0 (zero).
z Execution result
0 Success

z Execution result 03
When the externally specified string is not available (e.g.
0 Success settings of old version)

When the externally specified string is not available • An unnecessary parameter is included.
03 22
(e.g. settings of old version) • The parameter range is incorrect

22
• An unnecessary parameter is included.
• The parameter range is incorrect
z Real-time performance
Executes command data immediately.

z Real-time performance
Executes command data immediately. HC: Clear Archived Images
This command clears the archived images.

z For non-procedural commands


• Send
HC
• Receive
HC

z For number-specified commands


The number-specified command No. is “66”.
• Send

Word Device *

66

* Starting word device (command address)


• Receive

Word Device *

Return value Execution result

* Starting word device (command result address)

z Execution result
0 Success

03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.

22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-11
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

OW: Change output file/folder


System
This command changes the output file/folder.
• When changing a data output file, a new result file is created using the
latest date and time.
• When changing an image output folder, a new image output folder is
TW: Write Date/Time
created using the latest date and time. This command sets the date and time of the controller.
• When changing a simple monitor image output folder, a new simple
monitor image output folder is created using the latest date and time. z For non-procedural commands
• Send
z For non-procedural commands TW,yy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss
• Send TW,yyyy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss
OW,n • Receive
• Receive TW
OW
z For number-specified commands
z For number-specified commands The number-specified command No. is “80”.
The number-specified command No. is “69”. • Send
• Send
Word

*+10
*+11
*+12
*+13
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3

*
device
69 n
80 yy mo dd hh mi ss
* Starting word device (command address)
• Receive Word

*+10
*+11
*+12
*+13
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
Word Device * device

Return value Execution result 80 yyyy mo dd hh mi ss

* Starting word device (command result address) * Starting word device (command address)
• Receive
z Parameters (common) Word Device *
Select the target for changing
• 0: Changes the result output file (SD2/USB HDD/FTP) Execution
Return value
n • 1: Changes the image output folder (SD2/ FTP/ FTP) result
• 2: Changes the simple monitor image output folder
(SD2/USB HDD/FTP) * Starting word device (command result address)

z Parameters (common)
z Execution result Year (0 to 99, lower two digits of the western calendar (20 for
0 Success 2020))
yy
When 00 to 99 is specified, 2000 will be added to the value
03 When the command was issued in Setup mode. before processing.

22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect. yyyy Year (2000 to 2099)

mo Month (1 to 12)
z Real-time performance
Executes command data immediately. dd Day (1 to 31)

hh Hour (0 to 23) NB: 24-hour format


EC: Echo mi Minutes (0 to 59)
This command returns the same character string as the one that was sent
from the external device. ss Seconds (0 to 59)

The number-specified commands cannot be used.


z Execution result
z For non-procedural commands 0 Success
• Send
EC,ssss • The date/time setting failed.
03
• Receive • When the command was issued in Setup mode.
EC,ssss
22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.
z Parameter
String z Real-time performance
ssss Character string of 128 characters or less consisting of The measurement processing time will not be affected.
alphabets and numbers

z Execution result
0 Success

• The parameter is longer than 128 characters long.


22
• The parameter includes other than alphabet or numbers.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-12
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

TR: Read date/time VI: Read Version Information


This command reads the current date and time on the controller. This command reads the controller system information (model number and
ROM version).
z For non-procedural commands
• Send z For non-procedural commands
TR • Send
• Receive VI
TR,yy,mo,dd,hh,mi,ss • Receive
VI, nnnn, vvvv
z For number-specified commands • Parameter
The number-specified command No. is “81”.
• Send nnnn Model string (e.g.) TM-X5000

Word Device * vvvv ROM version (14-character string)

81 The following is an example of the version that is displayed


when the controller system information is x.y.zzzz:
* Starting word device (command address)
VI,TM-X5000,000x.000y,zzzz
• Receive

Word z For number-specified commands


*+10
*+11
*+12
*+13
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
* The number-specified command No. is “82”.
device
• Send
Return Execution
yy mo dd hh mi ss Word Device *
value result

* Starting word device (command result address) 82

* Starting word device (command address)


z Parameters (common) • Receive
Year (0 to 99, lower two digits of the western calendar (20 for
yy Word
2020))

*+10
*+11
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
device
mo Month (1 to 12)
Return Execution
dd Day (1 to 31) nn r hw mj mn
value result
hh Hour (0 to 23) NB: 24-hour format * Starting word device (command result address)
• Parameter
mi Minutes (0 to 59)
nn Model number (4-digits)
ss Seconds (0 to 59)
r Reserved area (always 0)
z Execution result Indicates the first digit of the major version in the ROM version
hw
0 Success information as a number.

03 When the command was issued in Setup mode. Indicates the second digit of the major version in the ROM
mj
version information as a number.
22 An unnecessary parameter is included.
Indicates the minor version in the ROM version information as
mn
a number.
z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected. The following is an example when the version displayed on
the UI is x.y.zzzz.
(When the beginning of the command result address is DM0)
Address Byte data
DM0 0-1 0 (ret)
DM1 2-3 0 -
DM2-3 4-7 5000 (nn)
DM4-5 8-11 0 (r)
DM6-7 12-15 x (hw)
DM8-9 16-19 y (mj)
DM10-11 20-23 zzzz (mn)

z Execution result
0 Success

22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-13
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

TZW: Write Time Zone


Fetching Measurement Results
This command sets the SNTP time zone.
The time zone will not be saved even if this command is
used. To save it, run the save settings (SS) command. GR: Fetch Internal Measurement Values
This command fetches the internal measurement values for the latest
z For non-procedural commands image.
• Send
TZW,n
• Receive
z For non-procedural commands
• Send
TZW GR,t,nnn,…,nnn
• Receive
z For number-specified commands GR,t,m,…,m
The number-specified command No. is “83”.
• Send z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “104”.
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3
• Send
83 n
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5 ...
* Starting word device (command address)
104 t nnn ... nnn
• Receive
* Starting word device (command address)
Word Device *
• Receive
Execution
Return value Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5 ...
result
Execution
* Starting word device (command result address) Return value t m ... m
result
z Parameters (common) * Starting word device (command result address)
n Time zone (0 to 33)
z Parameters (common)
z Execution result t No. of tools subject to fetching (t ≤ 12, all tools when 0 is specified)

0 Success nnn ID of the tool subject to fetching (200 to 299, 500 to 599)

03 When the command was issued in Setup mode. m Internal measurement value

22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.


z Execution result
z Real-time performance 0 Success
The measurement processing time will not be affected.
• There is no internal measurement value that can be fetched (a
03 trigger has not been input)
• When the command was issued in Setup mode.
TZR: Read Time Zone
This command reads the SNTP time zone. • The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.
• (When multiple tools are specified) At least one value outside
z For non-procedural commands of the tool ID range is specified
• Send 22 • (When multiple tools are specified) The tool ID has been
TZR duplicated
• Receive • (For non-procedural commands) The number of targeted tools
TZR,n and the number of sent tool IDs does not match

z For number-specified commands z Real-time performance


The number-specified command No. is “84”.
The measurement processing time will not be affected.
• Send

Word Device *

84

* Starting word device (command address)


• Receive

Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3

Execution
n
result

* Starting word device (command result address)

z Parameters (common)
n Time zone (0 to 33)

z Execution result
0 Success

03 When the command was issued in Setup mode.

22 An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-14
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

GM: Fetch Measured Values


Head-to-head Adjustment Execution
This command fetches measured values and judgment results.

z For non-procedural commands


• Send HAE: Head-to-head Adjustment Execution
GM,o,t,nnn,…,nnn Executes head-to-head adjustment.
• Receive
When o = 0 GM,t,m,…,m This command can be used only in setup mode.
When o = 1 GM,t,m,i,…,m,i To switch between setup and run mode, use S0/R0 command
When o = 2 GM,t,m,j,…,m,j accordingly.
When o = 3 GM,t,m,i,j,…,m,i,j
z For non-procedural commands
z For number-specified commands • Send
The number-specified command No. is “112”. HAE
• Send • Receive
Word HAE,n,x,y,t
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
* ...
device
z For number-specified commands
112 o t nnn ... nnn The number-specified command No. is “122”.
• Send
* Starting word device (command address)
• Receive Word Device *
When o = 0
122
Word
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5

* ...
device * Starting word device (command address)
Return Execution • Receive
t m ... m
value result
Word

*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9
*
When o = 1 Device

Word Return Execution


*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7

* ... n x y t
device value result
Return Execution * Starting word device (command result address)
t m i ... m i
value result
z Parameters (common)
When o = 2
Head-to-head adjustment result
Word n • 1: Success
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7

* ...
device • 1: Fail
Return Execution
t m j ... m j Position alignment result x
value result x
(The value is -99999.9999 if the operation fails)
When o = 3
Position alignment result y
y
Word (The value is -99999.9999 if the operation fails)
*+1
*+2
*+3
*+4
*+5
*+6
*+7
*+8
*+9

* ...
device
Position alignment result θ
Return Execution t
t m i j ... m i j (The value is -99999.9999 if the operation fails)
value result

* Starting word device (command result address) z Execution result


z Parameters (common) 0 Success

Output items • Head-to-head adjustment start (HAS) has not executed.


(0: Measured value only, 03 • The settings to use head-to-head adjustment have not been
1: Measured value + measurement result information, configured (utility).
o
2: Measured value + judgment result,
3: Measured value + measurement result information + 22 An unnecessary parameter is included.
judgment result)

t No. of tools subject to fetching (t ≤ 12, all tools when 0 is specified) z Real-time performance
If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
nnn ID of the tool subject to fetching (200 to 299, 500 to 599) completes execution.

m Measured value

Measurement result information


i (0: Unexecuted, 1: Normal value, 2: Position adjustment failure,
3: Invalid data, 4: Judgment standby data)

j Judgment result (0: OK, 1: NG)

z Execution result
0 Success

• There is no measured value that can be fetched (a trigger has


03 not been input)
• When the command was issued in Setup mode.

• The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.


• (When multiple tools are specified) At least one value outside
of the tool ID range is specified
22 • (When multiple tools are specified) The tool ID has been
duplicated
• (For non-procedural commands) The number of targeted tools
and the number of sent tool IDs does not match

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-15
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

Image Composition Simple Monitor View

ICCW: Write image composition capture cycle AIW: Change simple monitor view strings
This command changes the current image composition capture cycle to a Sets the string to be displayed on the simple monitor screen.
specified value.
The number-specified commands cannot be used.
When the specified capture cycle is shorter than the capture time, the
capture time will be set as the cycle.
This command can be used only in setup mode.
z For non-procedural commands
• Send
To switch between setup and run mode, use S0/R0 command AIW,m,N1,S1,…,Nm,Sm
accordingly. This command can only be used with dark or • Receive
bright image composition. AIW
z For non-procedural commands z Parameter
• Send
ICCW,n,m Number of lines of strings that configure the settings (1 to 10)
m
• Receive A line number and string set is 1.
ICCW
Line number (1 to 10)
z For number-specified commands N1 to Nm If the same line number is set multiple times, the last
The number-specified command No. is “128”. settings are enabled.
• Send
Content of a string to be set in the line specified with N
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5 ASCII characters, with the exception of a semi-colon (;)
128 n m S1 to Sm and comma (,) can be used.
If a string is not specified, the string on the applicable line
* Starting word device (command address) number is deleted.
• Receive
Word Device * z Execution result
Return value Execution result 0 Success

* Starting word device (command result address) The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.
• The number of set lines and the received line number/number
z Parameters (common) 22
of strings does not match.
n Head number (0: Head A, 1: Head B) • The command string is too long (max. 255 characters)

m Image capture cycle (0 to 10000 µsec)


z Real-time performance
Executes command data immediately.
z Execution result
When the image composition of the specified head is not dark/
03
bright composition. AIR: Obtain simple monitor view strings
22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect. Obtains the string to be displayed on the simple monitor screen.
The number-specified commands cannot be used.
z Real-time performance
If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
completes execution. z For non-procedural commands
• Send
AIR,m,N1,…,Nm
• Receive
ICCR: Read image composition capture cycle AIR,m,N1,S1,…,Nm,Sm
This command reads the current image composition capture cycle.
This command can only be used with dark or bright image composition. z Parameter
z For non-procedural commands m Number of lines to be obtained (1 to 10)
• Send
ICCR,n N1 to Nm Line number (1 to 10)
• Receive
ICCR,m S1 to Sm Content of the string in the line indicated by N

z For number-specified commands z Execution result


The number-specified command No. is “129”.
• Send 0 Success
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 03 The string could not be obtained.
129 n
22 The parameter range is incorrect
* Starting word device (command address)
• Receive z Real-time performance
Executes command data immediately.
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3

Execution result m
* Starting word device (command result address)

z Parameters (common)
n Head number (0: Head A, 1: Head B)

m Image capture cycle (0 to 10000 µsec)

z Execution result
When the image composition of the specified head is not dark/
03
bright composition.

22 The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.

z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.

5-16
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

TSR: Read tool settings


Setting change
This command reads upper limit and lower limit in the tolerance settings of
the specified tool.
TSW: Write tool settings z For non-procedural commands
This command writes upper limit and lower limit in the tolerance settings of • Send
the specified tool. TSR,nnn,i
• Receive
This command can be used only in setup mode. TSR,s,m
To switch between setup and run mode, use S0/R0 command
accordingly. z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “131”.
z For non-procedural commands • Send
• Send
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5
TSW,nnn,i,m
• Receive 131 nnn i
TSW
* Starting word device (command address)
z For number-specified commands • Receive
The number-specified command No. is “130”.
• Send Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5
Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5 *+6 *+7 Execution
Return value s m
130 nnn i m result

* Starting word device (command address) * Starting word device (command result address)
• Receive For the number-specified commands, the value will be read
without decimal point when using fixed-point as the decimal
Word Device * point.
(Example 1) When 12.3456 is read, the data will be an integer
Return value Execution result value, which is 123456.
* Starting word device (command result address) (Example 2) When 1.234 is read, the data will be an integer
value, which is 1234.
For the number-specified commands, specify integer data
when using fixed-point as the decimal point.
(Example) To write 12.345, specify 12345.
z Parameters (common)
However, if the number has 3 or more digits after the decimal nnn ID of the tool subject to the command (200 to 399, 500 to 699)
point, use floating-point.
i Item ID (0: lower value, 1: upper value)
z Parameters (common) When the item ID is 0 or 1
nnn ID of the tool subject to the command (200 to 399, 500 to 699) s • 0: Tolerance disabled
• 1: Tolerance enabled
i Item ID (0: lower value, 1: upper value)
Setting value (Effective value: -100,000,000 to 100,000,000)
m Setting value (Effective value: -100,000,000 to 100,000,000) m When the item ID is 0 or 1, and the tolerance have not been set,
0 will be returned.
z Execution result
0 Success
z Execution result
0 Success
• When the command was issued in run mode.
03
• When the command was issued with an unconnected head. • The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.
22 • When the specified tool does not exist.
• The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect. • When the item ID that does not exist in the specified tool was set.
22 • When the specified tool does not exist.
• When the item ID that does not exist in the specified tool was set.
z Real-time performance
The measurement processing time will not be affected.
z Real-time performance
If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
completes execution.

5-17
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual List of Communication Commands for Control

TSC: Clear tool settings


Head Adjustment
This command clears upper limit and lower limit in the tolerance settings of
the specified tool.
This command can be used only in setup mode. To switch OASR: Obtain optical axis state
between setup and run mode, use S0/R0 command
accordingly. This command obtains optical axis state.
This command can be used only in setup mode. To switch
z For non-procedural commands between setup and run mode, use S0/R0 command
• Send accordingly.
TSC,nnn,i
• Receive z For non-procedural commands
TSC • Send
OASR,n
z For number-specified commands • Receive
The number-specified command No. is “132”. OASR,m,x,y
• Send

Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5


z For number-specified commands
The number-specified command No. is “136”.
132 nnn i • Send

* Starting word device (command address) Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3

• Receive 136 n
Word Device * * Starting word device (command address)

Execution • Receive
Return value
result Word Device * *+1 *+2 *+3 *+4 *+5 *+6 *+7
* Starting word device (command result address)
Execution
Return value m x y
z Parameters (common) result

nnn ID of the tool subject to the command (200 to 399, 500 to 699) * Starting word device (command result address)
For the number-specified commands, the value will be
i Item ID (0: lower value, 1: upper value) 1/10000 when using fixed-point as the decimal point.
(Example) When X=12345 is read, the value of X will be
z Execution result 1.2345.

0 Success
z Parameters (common)
• When the command was issued in run mode. n Head number (0: Head A, 1: Head B)
03
• When the command was issued with an unconnected head.
Optical axis state (0: OK, 1: center point is not at correct
• The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect. m
location, 2: too many pixels with insufficient light)
22 • When the specified tool does not exist.
• When the item ID that does not exist in the specified tool was set. x Illumination center X-Position

y Illumination center Y-Position


z Real-time performance
If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
If the obtained values of X and Y are in the circle of radius
completes execution.
10, the state is OK.

z Execution result
0 Success

• When the command was issued in run mode.


03
• When the command was issued with an unconnected head.

• The number or the range of the parameter is incorrect.


22
• An unnecessary parameter is included.

z Real-time performance
If a tool is being executed, the command is executed after the tool
completes execution.

5-18
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP


This system supports communication via EtherNet/IP.
EtherNet/IP is an open communications standard with specifications that are managed by ODVA (Open Device Net Vendor Association, Inc.). Communication
is possible with all devices that support it, regardless of the vendor.
The following functions are possible by EtherNet/IP connection.
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, and PLC-Link cannot be used at the same time.

z Cyclic Communication
Cyclic communication at RPI (Request Packet Interval) communication cycle intervals allows high-speed control at intervals of several ms to several tens of
ms (implicit communication). In addition, because it is possible to control the controller by referencing and updating variables and devices in the PLC without
considering the communication, it allows programs to be written easily on the PLC side.
• Control the controller: The controller can be controlled by using cyclic communication to send the commands for execution.
• Output the results data: Data can be output by cyclic communication when the items for output from EtherNet/IP are set in the output settings (Page 3-34).
• Change the recipe number: The controller can be controlled by using cyclic communication to specify the recipe number.
• Implicit communication settings such as cycle (RPI), data size, time out, transmission trigger, and so on are specified at the PLC. During cyclic
communication with the controller, set the RPI value to 5 ms or more. When COS (Change Of State) for the PLC (such as the Keyence KV
Series) that allows selection of the communication trigger is selected, set the minimum transmission interval (Inhibit Time) to 5 ms or more.
• If RPI is set to 5 ms or more, use of other communications, such as measurement settings, dialog operation, command, and FTP, may place
an excessive load on the controller. This may result in delay of processing or temporary time-out of the communication. In such cases, it is
necessary to review the cyclic communication settings and service conditions (when this is done, there may be an increase or variation in
measurement time.) Be sure to verify that there are no problems with operating performance, including the issues above, prior to operation.
• In a network where many devices are connected, including EtherNet/IP devices, if a large load is constantly or temporarily applied to the
network, then delays and packet loss may occur. Be sure to perform sufficient verification prior to operation.

z Message Communication
This can be used for communications that do not require punctuality as is needed with cyclic communications (Explicit message).
There is no functional difference between the controller message communication function and cyclic communication function. As a result, it is not necessary
to use it in most cases. However, it can be used for EtherNet/IP communications with PLC devices that do not support cyclic communication (SLC5/05 Series,
etc.).

Controller EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications

z Standard specifications
Controller Ethernet port Communication expansion unit (CB-NEP20E)

1 (Exclusive Owner)
Connection count Max. 32
4 (Input Only)

As set in the communications settings on the PLC side.


Communication Up to 248 bytes  (when the Rockwell SLC5/05 is connected)
size Up to 496 bytes  (when the Rockwell ControlLogix/CompactLogix is connected)
Up to 1436 bytes (when the Keyence KV Series or Omron SYSMAC CJ2/CJ1/CS1/NJ is connected)
Cyclic
communication*1 As set in the communications settings on the PLC side.
(Implicit • Cyclic
Send trigger
communication)
• COS*2

• 100: Input data (controller send) • 100: Input data


• 101: Output data (controller receive) (communication expansion unit send)
Instance ID (254 during Input Only connection) • 150: Output data
(communications expansion unit receive)
(3 during Input Only)

Connection count Max. 32 Max. 6


Message
communication
Supported Explicit
(Explicit message) UCMM/Class3
message type

Conformance test Compliant with Version.CT17

*1:  he condition for the cyclic communication status to become [Connected] is when either an Exclusive Owner or Input Only connection is established via
T
the controller’s Ethernet port and only when an Exclusive Owner connection is established for the communication expansion unit.
*2: Only a PLC that supports COS (such as Keyence KV-3000/5000/5500/7300/7500/8000 and the KV Nano Series) can be specified. When a COS send
trigger is selected, the controller sends data at the time when a change in the data to be sent occurs. (If there is no change in the data to be sent,
then data is sent at intervals of the specified RPI (communications cycle)). If the data to be sent continuously changes, data sending is delayed for the
InhibitTime (minimum sending interval). Moreover, the part of the data that is subject to modification checks are “Result ready flag” and “Command
complete flag” in the case of the controller’s Ethernet port and all data to be sent in the case of the communication expansion unit.

z When to use message communication and cyclic communication


There is no functional difference between the controller message communication function and cyclic communication function. It is used for EtherNet/IP
communications with PLC devices that do not support cyclic communication (SLC5/05 Series, etc.).
• Because message communication is communication performed using TCP/IP, it is less suited for high-speed control than cyclic communication,
which uses UDP.
• Message communication is communication using TCP/IP. However, depending on the network status and other conditions, it is possible that the
data may not arrive. On the PLC side, give consideration to such cases when designing the controls (resending process following timeout, etc.).

5-19
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Allocation Conditions of Cyclic Communication Data

Example of the send-data settings for this controller (TM-X5000 Series to KV-7000 Series)
Example when 1 TM-X5000 series is connected to a KV-7000 Series, cyclic communication data size is 496 bytes (addresses 0000 - 0495), and the command
response output area is set to 24 bytes (B****/W**** in the table are examples of KV-7000 link relay and link register address allocation)

Setting Address
7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition (byte)
0000 B007 Reserved B006 Reserved B005 Reserved B004 Result OR B003 Result Ready B002 Cmd Ready B001 Cmd Error B000 Cmd Complete
0001 B00F MSR_VALID B00E RUN B00D Reserved B00C ERROR B00B BUSY B00A Reserved B009 TRG_ack B008 READY
MSR_
RESET_ ZERO_ ZERO_ TIMING_
0002 B017 Reserved B016 Reserved B015 B014 RESET_ B013 B012 B011 Reserved B010
ALL_ack OFF_ack ON_ack ack
ack
0003 B01F Reserved B01E Reserved B01D Reserved B01C Reserved B01B Reserved B01A Reserved B019 Reserved B018 Reserved
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0004 B027 B026 B025 B024 B023 B022 B021 B020
Value7 Value6 Value5 Value4 Value3 Value2 Value1 Value0
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0005 B02F B02E B02D B02C B02B B02A B029 B028
Value15 Value14 Value13 Value12 Value11 Value10 Value9 Value8

Bit area Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0006 B037 B036 B035 B034 B033 B032 B031 B030
Value23 Value22 Value21 Value20 Value19 Value18 Value17 Value16
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0007 B03F B03E B03D B03C B03B B03A B039 B038
Value31 Value30 Value29 Value28 Value27 Value26 Value25 Value24
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0008 B047 B046 B045 B044 B043 B042 B041 B040
Value39 Value38 Value37 Value36 Value35 Value34 Value33 Value32
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0009 B04F B04E B04D B04C B04B B04A B049 B048
Value47 Value46 Value45 Value44 Value43 Value42 Value41 Value40
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0010 B057 B056 B055 B054 B053 B052 B051 B050
Value55 Value54 Value53 Value52 Value51 Value50 Value49 Value48

Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0011 B05F B05E B05D B05C B05B B05A B059 B058
Value63 Value62 Value61 Value60 Value59 Value58 Value57 Value56

Error code 0012


W000 Error Code
area 0013

Reserved 0014
W001 Reserved
area 0015

0016

Measurement 0017
W002 Total Count
count area 0018
0019
0020
0021
W004 Command Result
0022

0023

0024
0025
W006 Command Data 1
0026
0027
Command
output area 0028
0029
W008 Command Data 2
0030
0031
… … …
0044
0045
W010 Command Data 6
0046
0047
0048
0049
W012 Result Data 1
0050
0051
Results
0052
output area
0053
W014 Result Data 2
0054
0055
… … …

5-20
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

z Name and behavior of input signals


Allocation area Name Remarks

Cmd Complete Turns on when command processing is completed.

Cmd Error Turns off when command processing is successful and on when command processing fails.

Cmd Ready Turns on when command processing can be accepted.

Result Ready Turns on when data transmission is completed.

Result OR Used to output the OR result for the judged value of tool specified in the output settings.

READY Turns on when trigger input can be accepted.

TRG_ack Turns on when the trigger input is accepted. Turns off when trigger input turns off.

BUSY Output during measurement processing or command processing.

Output while a dialog box is displayed on the screen when a system error occurs. For details on typical
system errors, see “Error Messages” (Page A-2).
ERROR
On the [System] screen for [Global] (Page 4-6), error output for SD memory card-related errors and so
Bit area on can also be specified.

RUN Output when the controller is in Run mode.

Turns on when the internal measurement values for all tools set with the active recipe are no longer in the
judgment standby state.
MSR_VALID
Turns off if measured values are finalized with TIMING or when internal measurement values are cleared
with MSR_RESET.

TIMING_ack Turns on when the input timing is accepted. Turns off when the input timing is turned off.

ZERO_ON_ack Turns on when zero on input is accepted. Turns off when zero on input is turned off.

ZERO_OFF_ack Turns on when zero off input is accepted. Turns off when zero off input is turned off.

Turns on when reset measured value input is accepted. Turns off when reset measured value input is
MSR_RESET_ack
turned off.

Turns on when reset measured value (all recipes) input is accepted. Turns off when reset measured
RESET_ALL_ack
value (all templates) input is turned off.

Tool Judge Value0 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0004:bit0).

Tool Judge Value1 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0004:bit1).
Tool judgment area
... ...

Tool Judge Value63 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0011:bit7).

Error code area Error Code Contains error codes for causes of errors.

Indicates the measurement count.

When used with [Hold Mode] set to [ON], change measurement count (increase by 1)
Measurement count of the system variables allocated to the results output area is used as the result output
Total Count complete signal.
area
To allocate system variables to the results output area, click [Output Settings] > [Output
Results] > [Settings] under [Field Network] > [Byte Allocation Area] > [Display Options],
select [System Variables] and add [Measurement count] to [Output items].

Command Result Indicates the command execution results.

Command Data 1 Returns command execution results data 1.


Command output
Command Data 2 Returns command execution results data 2.
area
... ...

Command Data 6 Returns command execution results data 6.

Result Data 1 Returns measurement results data 1.

Results output area Result Data 2 Returns measurement results data 2.

... ...

5-21
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Example of the receive-data settings for this controller (KV-7000 Series to TM-X5000 Series)
Example when one TM-X5000 Series model is connected to a KV-7000 Series model and cyclic communication data size is 496 bytes (addresses 0000 - 0495)
(B****/W**** in the table are examples of KV-7000 link relay and link register address allocation)
Setting Address
7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition (byte)
Error reset Cmd
0000 B067 Reserved B066 Reserved B065 Reserved B064 B063 Result ack B062 Reserved B061 Reserved B060
request request
0001 B06F Reserved B06E Reserved B06D Reserved B06C Reserved B06B Reserved B06A Reserved B069 Reserved B068 TRG
0002 B077 Reserved B076 Reserved B075 Reserved B074 Reserved B073 Reserved B072 TEST B071 EXT B070 RESET
RESET_ MSR_
0003 B07F Reserved B07E Reserved B07D B07C B07B ZERO_OFF B07A ZERO_ON B079 Reserved B078 TIMING
ALL RESET
0004 B087 Reserved B086 Reserved B085 Reserved B084 Reserved B083 Reserved B082 Reserved B081 Reserved B080 Reserved
Bit area 0005 B08F Reserved B08E Reserved B08D Reserved B08C Reserved B08B Reserved B08A Reserved B089 Reserved B088 Reserved
0006 B097 Reserved B096 Reserved B095 Reserved B094 Reserved B093 Reserved B092 Reserved B091 Reserved B090 Reserved
0007 B09F Reserved B09E Reserved B09D Reserved B09C Reserved B09B Reserved B09A Reserved B099 Reserved B098 Reserved
0008 B0A7 Reserved B0A6 Reserved B0A5 Reserved B0A4 Reserved B0A3 Reserved B0A2 Reserved B0A1 Reserved B0A0 Reserved
0009 B0AF Reserved B0AE Reserved B0AD Reserved B0AC Reserved B0AB Reserved B0AA Reserved B0A9 Reserved B0A8 Reserved
0010 B0B7 Reserved B0B6 Reserved B0B5 Reserved B0B4 Reserved B0B3 Reserved B0B2 Reserved B0B1 Reserved B0B0 Reserved
0011 B0BF Reserved B0BE Reserved B0BD Reserved B0BC Reserved B0BB Reserved B0BA Reserved B0B9 Reserved B0B8 Reserved
0012
W0F2 ExecCondNo
0013
Recipe No.
0014
W0F3 Reserved
0015
0016
0017
W0F4 Command number
0018
0019
0020
0021
W0F6 Cmd Parameter1
0022
0023
Command 0024
input area
0025
W0F8 Cmd Parameter2
0026
0027
0028
0029
W0FA Cmd Parameter3
0030
0031
… … …

As ExecCondNo is only loaded by the controller when there are changes, the recipe number can also be overwritten by a command.

z Name and behavior of output signals


Allocation area Name Remarks
Cmd request Requests command execution when rising from OFF to ON.
Result ack Notifies of data acquisition when rising from OFF to ON.
Error reset request Clears errors when rising from OFF to ON.
TRG Starts capture (measurement) (leading edge synchronization). The input is accepted when READY is ON.
Used to reset operation.
• Result OR output is 0.
• The measurement count returns to 0.
RESET • All archived image data is deleted.
• All data in the output buffer is reset.
• A file in the measurement result output destination is newly created. A folder in the image output destination is newly
created.

Bit area Used to suspend the occurrence of internal triggers and the acceptance of external triggers. When the input turns on,
EXT
READY is forcibly turned off to stop the acceptance of all triggers (level synchronization).
Used to suspend the status output for trial runs.
• When this signal is input, the result data that has not been output will be deleted.
TEST • Result OR output is reset during input.
• As soon as input turns off, the measurement processing result obtained immediately after that will start being output
again.
TIMING Requests input timing when rising from OFF to ON.
ZERO_ON Requests auto zero on input when rising from OFF to ON.
ZERO_OFF Requests auto zero off input when rising from OFF to ON.
MSR_RESET Requests reset measured value processing input when rising from OFF to ON.
RESET_ALL Requests reset measured value processing for all recipes when rising from OFF to ON.
Recipe No. area ExecCondNo Writes recipe numbers (1 to 8). The recipe numbers are loaded by the controller when values in this area change.
Command number Writes a command number.
Cmd Parameter1 Writes command parameter 1.
Command input area Cmd Parameter2 Writes command parameter 2.
Cmd Parameter3 Writes command parameter 3.
… …

5-22
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

z IP address settings (when using the EtherNet/IP unit)


Changing the EtherNet/IP Settings • IP Address
Enter an IP address (default setting: 192.168.0.20).
The settings for controlling data input and output via EtherNet/IP can be • Subnet Mask
changed on the [Field Network] screen under [Communications & I/O] in Enter a subnet mask (default setting: 255.255.255.0).
[Global]. • Default Gateway
Enter a default gateway IP address (default setting: 0.0.0.0).
• Controller Ethernet settings, such as the IP address and
subnet mask, are changed in “Network” (Page 4-2). The set values are the same for the P1 and P2 ports on
• If the EtherNet/IP settings were changed, it is necessary to the communications expansion unit.
restart the controller in order to apply the settings. • Enable DHCP
Select this check box to retrieve network settings (IP

1
address, subnet mask, and default gateway) when the
Select [Global] → [Communications & I/O] → [Field Network]. controller starts from a DHCP server (default setting:
Disabled).
• When DHCP is enabled, the IP address, subnet mask,
and default gateway settings cannot be changed.
• If the DHCP server is not started, the controller
continues to retry until there is a response from the
server. Clear the check box to change to manual
assignment.

2 Select [EtherNet/IP] or [EtherNet/IP-Unit].


z Data Setting
• Data Size
Specifies the data size of Assembly Object in the cyclic communication
and the message communication (Default: 496 byte). For the cyclic
communication, a connecting PLC is given priority to specify data size.
Therefore, the data size specified here may differ from that in actual

3 Change the settings as required.


<When [Ethernet/IP] is selected>
processing. Use a PLC compatible with Large Forward Open in order to
transact data exceeding 496 byte.
• Connect to Allen-Bradley SLC5/05
Checking the box limits the data size settable up to 248 byte. PLCs
specified here do not support the cyclic communication, therefore, the
data size of Assembly Object in the message communication should be
changed according to the specifications of the PLCs.
• Data Configurations
Click [Configuration] which shows the overview of the data allocations in
the EtherNet/IP cyclic data communication. For a command returning a
text string, the response data may be large. Clicking [View List] shows
the detailed allocation statuses of the receive-data and send-data.

<When [EtherNet/IP-Unit] is selected>

Receive-Data of Displays an overview of the allocations for


This Machine data received by the controller from the PLC.

Displays an overview of the allocations for data


Send-Data of This received by the PLC from the controller. The
Machine range for the command response output area
in the byte allocation area can be specified.

• Decimal Point
Selects the data representation type of the result data output.
• Fixed-Point (default)
Numbers displayed on each tool are handled as signed 32-bit integer
data.
(Example)
If decimal points are set to three digits and the measured value is
123.450 mm, it is handled as 123450 integer data.
• Floating-Point
The data is handled as 32-bit single-precision floating decimal point
data.

5-23
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

z Other Settings
• Enable Handshake
After checking that the PLC received the measurement data output,
select whether to write the result of the next data.
When the “Enable Handshake” check box is selected, the controller
turns on “Result ready flag” after the measurement result is output. Upon
reception of the ready flag, the PLC reads the output data and turns on
“Result ack flag”.
The controller then turns off its “Result ready flag” after recognizing the
PLC’s ack flag.
The PLC turns off “Result ack flag” to request the controller to write the
next measurement results.

z Cyclic Communication Status


Displays the cyclic communication status as [Connected] or [Not
Connected].

z Create EDS File


Outputs an EDS file and icon that include information related to the
controller EtherNet/IP functions.
• Controller
• Keyence_3007_0101.eds
• TM-X5000Series.ico
• EtherNet/IP unit (CB-NEP20E)
• Keyence_3009_0101.eds
• TM-X5K-CB-NEP20E.ico
• The save destination is “SD2:\tm-x\EDS\”.
(For the TM-X Navigator, open the [Browse Files] dialog
box and specify the save destination.)
• Because the EDS file does not contain the information that
was set or changed in the controller global settings, the
created EDS file will always contain the same information.

4 Click [OK].

5-24
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Outputting Measurement Data Using EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communications (Data Output)


Change the output settings for data output using EtherNet/IP.

Data output flow (example of connection with PLC EtherNet/IP unit)


Set the data and address for output in the output settings.
The controller outputs data via EtherNet/IP in the following manner.

When used with [Hold Mode] set to [ON], selecting [Update Every Timing] (Page 3-35) updates the measurement value by inputting
TIMING, ZERO, MSR_RESET, and RESET_ALL (the internal measurement value will not update).

• Data output via EtherNet/IP is performed only in run mode. Data is not output in setup mode.
• With EtherNet/IP, images and other binary data cannot be output.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

Measurement on the controller completes and


the results data is collected.
(2)
(1)
Checks that the Result ack flag is turned off.*1 Result ack flag is turned OFF.

(3)
(3)
Writes data to ResultData and Result OR flag, Data is written to data memory that supports
Tool Judge Value. ResultData and Result OR flag, Tool Judge Value.

(4) (4)
After data writing is completed, When Result ready flag changes to ON, the completion of
Result ready flag is turned ON. data writing is checked and the data is referenced.

(5) (5)

Detects that the Result ack flag has changed to ON


Result ack flag is turned ON.
and checks that data reading is completed.
(6) (6)

Result ready flag is turned OFF. Detects that Result ready flag has changed to OFF.

*1 When the results output handshake is OFF, output data is overwritten and updated without checking whether the Result ack flag is OFF. To
take the rise of Result ready flag as a data reference synchronization signal, turn the Result ack flag ON at each output, which will turn the
Result ready flag OFF.

z Timing chart
Measurement
Measurement processing processing

ON (2)
Result ack flag
OFF The PLC writes.

ON
Result ready flag The controller writes.
OFF A

ON
Result OR flag The controller writes.
OFF

ON
ResultData The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Tool Judge Value The controller writes.
OFF

(1) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1)

A : 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed).

The Result OR flag is updated in coordination with results output with EtherNet/IP as the output destination. When the Result OR flag is used, it is
necessary to configure the output setting so that one or more data item is output via EtherNet/IP.

5-25
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Controlling the Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication (Command Control)


The communication control commands can be executed at any time.

Flow of command process using EtherNet/IP (example of connection with PLC EtherNet/IP unit)
The controller performs command control via EtherNet/IP in the following manner.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

(1)
The command number to be executed is
written to the data memory that corresponds to
Command Number and the command parameter
is written to the data memory that corresponds to
Command Parameter .
(3)
(2)
Detects Command request flag rise, Checks that Command ready flag is turned ON and
executes a command from Command Number, turns ON Command request flag.
reads a command parameter from the address that
corresponds to Command Parameter executes a Detects that Command ready flag is turned OFF and
command and turns OFF Command ready flag. checks the start of the command.

(4)
After the command is executed, response data is
Writes response data to the data memory that
written to Command Data, and Command error flag
corresponds with Command Data*1.
and Command Result are set to the error state.
(5)
(5) Checks that command execution is completed when
it is detected that Command complete flag turns
Command complete flag is turned ON.
ON and refers to the response data and command
(7) execution result.

Checks that Command request flag is OFF, (6)


Command complete flag and
Command request flag is turned OFF.
Command error flag are turned OFF, and
Command ready flag is turned ON.

In the case of a command for which there is no response data, data is not output in response to the Command Data.
When an error occurs, the command execution results are written to Command Result. (0: Success, <Error code>: Failure).
The error cords conform to “Error Messages” (Page A-2).

z Timing chart
Command execution status Run command

ON
Command Number The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command Parameter The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command ready flag A The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command request flag A A The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command Data The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command error flag The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command Result The controller writes.
OFF

ON
The controller writes.
Command complete flag A
OFF

(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

A : 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed).

5-26
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Controlling the Controller with EtherNet/IP Cyclic Communication (Change Recipe Number)
The recipe number can be changed at any time.

Workflow to change the recipe number


The controller changes the value of the recipe number using EtherNet/IP as shown below.
The changed value is applied at the next measurement.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

Refers to the data memory value that corresponds Writes the recipe number to the data memory that
to ExecCondNo and changes the recipe number corresponds to ExecCondNo

5-27
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Troubleshooting

When correct operation does not occur


„ Checking whether or not the EtherNet/IP connection is correct
From [Global] for the controller, select [Communications & I/O] - [Field Network], and then check [Cyclic Communication Status:] at the bottom of the screen.
If [Not Connected] is displayed here, communication has failed. Check the cable (cross cable when connected directly), IP address, communications settings
on the PLC side, and other items again.
When connecting to a Rockwell SLC5/05, because cyclic communication is not performed, [Not Connected] is displayed even when the connection
is correct.

„ Result OR flag is not output.


The “Result OR flag” is updated in coordination with results output with EtherNet/IP as the output destination. When the “Result OR flag” is used, it is necessary
to configure the output setting so that 1 or more data item is output via EtherNet/IP.

„ Result ready flag remains ON and does not change.


There is the possibility that “Result ack flag” control is not being performed correctly. The “Result ready flag” turns OFF when the “Result ack flag” rise is
recognized in sending (this controller receiving). This is the same regardless of whether “Enable Handshake” is selected or cleared.

„ Data cannot be acquired correctly when reading data based on the change in the rise of STO output from an
external terminal.
STO is the strobe signal for terminal output. Therefore, it cannot be used as the strobe signal for any other data output.
Refer to the “Result ready flag” for the timing as to when to read data by EtherNet/IP.

„ Although results data is output beginning from byte address 0048, it is unknown where the data is output to
on the PLC (KV Series) side.
With the KV Series, when automatic allocation is used for the first TM-X5000 series, the TM-X5000 series results data is written beginning from link register
W0012.
With KV series automatic allocation, allocation byte addresses 0000-0011 are for the link relay (beginning from B0000), and byte addresses beginning from
0012 are for the link register. Allocation begins at the start from W0000, with 1 register used for each 2-byte address.
When the results data byte address is 0048, then (48 - 12)/2 = No. 18→12Hex, and results data is written beginning from W0012.

Error messages
Error cause
Message Cause Corrective Action
No.

• Check that the Ethernet cable is connected correctly.


• Check whether the controller and PLC were restarted after
Cyclic communication was
updating the communication settings.
EtherNet/IP communication interrupted. (When recovery
• Change the cyclic communication cycle and timeout time on 13601
failed. is possible, recovery occurs
the PLC side.
automatically.)
• With the factory default, ERROR output is not set. Set it on
the [System] screen (Page 4-6).

Change the RPI setting so the data is output via EtherNet/IP


The controller output buffer for
EtherNet/IP output failed due to a at a faster rate than it builds up. Or, extend the time between
outputting via the EtherNet/IP port 13602
full buffer. triggers. Note: Results data are not written when the buffer is
is full.
full.

The delay of the handshake When the EtherNet/IP handshake Change the RPI setting so the data from the tool is output via
control causes skipping of the is ON, delayed handshake EtherNet/IP at a faster rate than it builds up. Or, extend the time
13603
EtherNet/IP communication result caused results output via between triggers. Note: Output does not occur when the output
output. EtherNet/IP to be skipped. buffer is full.

EtherNet/IP unit was not • Check that the EtherNet/IP unit is attached correctly.
The EtherNet/IP unit cannot be recognized and the controller • Check that the EtherNet/IP unit is not damaged.
13604
recognized. cannot use EtherNet/IP • Do not disconnect the EtherNet/IP unit while the controller
communication. and unit are turned on.

5-28
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Communicating with the Controller Using EtherNet/IP Message Communications


For details of the basic communication specifications, refer to “Controller EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications” (Page 5-19).

Object configuration
The controller EtherNet/IP functions include the following objects. These objects can be accessed using message communications.

Class (object name) Class ID Instance ID

Identity Object 1 (01Hex) 1 (01Hex)

Message Router Object 2 (02Hex) 1 (01Hex)

100 (64Hex): Input

Assembly Object 4 (04Hex) 101 (65Hex): Output (when using the controller’s Ethernet port)

150 (96Hex): Output (when using the EtherNet/IP unit)

Connection Manager Object 6 (06Hex) 1 (01Hex)

Measurement Object 113 (0x71) 1 (01Hex)

Port Object 244 (F4Hex) 1 (01Hex)

TCP/IP Interface Object 245 (F5Hex) 1 (01Hex)

EtherNet Link Object 246 (F6Hex) 1 (01Hex)

• For details of the procedure for issuing messages with the PLC device that is used, refer to the PLC instruction manual.
• This manual primarily explains the measurement object, which is an object unique to the controller. For details of other objects, refer to the
EtherNet/IP specifications that are issued by ODVA (www.odva.org).

„ Notation in this explanation


The following terms are used when explaining object attributes and services.

z Data notation
• The bit position in the data is indicated as “Bit n”. (Bit0 is indicated as LSB.)
• Array type data is indicated by [ ]. Example: DWORD[10] (DWORD type array, No. of elements: 10)

z Data type
The data type is prescribed as follows in the EtherNet/IP specifications.

Range
Data type Description
Min. Max.

BOOL Boolean 0 : FALSE 1:TRUE

SINT Short integer -128 127

INT Integer -32768 32767


31
DINT Double precision integer -2 231-1

USINT Unsigned short integer 0 255

UINT Unsigned integer 0 65535

Unsigned double precision


UDINT 0 232-1
integer

BYTE Bit string: 8 bits - -

WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -

DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -

Range of single-precision floating decimal


REAL Floating decimal point
points

All values are stored as little endians.

5-29
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

ClassID : 4 (04Hex) Assembly Object


„ Description
The same data that is sent and received by cyclic communications can be accessed and controlled directly by message communications.
This can be used to perform control using the same data format as with cyclic communication for models that do not support cyclic communication (such as the
Rockwell SLC5/05).
Be aware that with message communications, it is not possible to perform time-specific control as it is with cyclic communications.

„ Instance : 100 (64Hex)


This is information concerning the input assembly and is sent using cyclic communication by the controller.

z Attribute
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Details

This information is specified by the input data for the cyclic communication
3 (03Hex) Get data Byte array data allocation in the global settings. It includes the controller status, command
execution results, results data, and other information.

Attribute3 size (bytes)


4 (04Hex) Get size UINT This is the size that is specified for cyclic communications data size in the cyclic
communication data allocation in the global settings.

z Example of input assembly data format


The input assembly configuration is as prescribed in the cyclic communication data allocation in the global settings.
For the purpose of explanation, the configuration is shown with the settings listed below.
• Cyclic communication data size: 496 bytes (Addresses 0000 - 0495)
• Command response output area: 24 bytes
Setting Address
7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition (byte)
Result Cmd
0000 B007 Reserved B006 Reserved B005 Reserved B004 Result OR B003 B002 Cmd Ready B001 Cmd Error B000
Ready Complete
0001 B00F MSR_VALID B00E RUN B00D Reserved B00C ERROR B00B BUSY B00A Reserved B009 TRG_ack B008 READY
MSR_
RESET_ ZERO_ ZERO_ TIMING_
0002 B017 Reserved B016 Reserved B015 B014 RESET_ B013 B012 B011 Reserved B010
ALL_ack OFF_ack ON_ack ack
ack
0003 B01F Reserved B01E Reserved B01D Reserved B01C Reserved B01B Reserved B01A Reserved B019 Reserved B018 Reserved
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0004 B027 B026 B025 B024 B023 B022 B021 B020
Value7 Value6 Value5 Value4 Value3 Value2 Value1 Value0
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0005 B02F B02E B02D B02C B02B B02A B029 B028
Value15 Value14 Value13 Value12 Value11 Value10 Value9 Value8
Bit area Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0006 B037 B036 B035 B034 B033 B032 B031 B030
Value23 Value22 Value21 Value20 Value19 Value18 Value17 Value16
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0007 B03F B03E B03D B03C B03B B03A B039 B038
Value31 Value30 Value29 Value28 Value27 Value26 Value25 Value24
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0008 B047 B046 B045 B044 B043 B042 B041 B040
Value39 Value38 Value37 Value36 Value35 Value34 Value33 Value32
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0009 B04F B04E B04D B04C B04B B04A B049 B048
Value47 Value46 Value45 Value44 Value43 Value42 Value41 Value40
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0010 B057 B056 B055 B054 B053 B052 B051 B050
Value55 Value54 Value53 Value52 Value51 Value50 Value49 Value48

Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0011 B05F B05E B05D B05C B05B B05A B059 B058
Value63 Value62 Value61 Value60 Value59 Value58 Value57 Value56

Error code 0012


W000 Error Code
area 0013

Reserved 0014
W001 Reserved
area 0015

0016

Measurement 0017
W002 Total Count
count area 0018
0019

5-30
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Setting Address
7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition (byte)
0020
0021
W004 Command Result
0022

0023

0024
0025
W006 Command Data 1
0026
0027
Command
output area 0028
0029
W008 Command Data 2
0030
0031
… … …
0044
0045
W010 Command Data 6
0046
0047
0048
0049
W012 Result Data 1
0050
0051
Results
0052
output area
0053
W014 Result Data 2
0054
0055
… … …

z Service
Service code Name Details

14 (0EHex) GetAttributeSingle Acquires the attribute value.

5-31
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Instance : 101 (65Hex)/150 (96Hex)


This is information concerning the output assembly and is received using cyclic communication by the controller.
When using the Ethernet port on the controller, the instance is 101 (65Hex) and 150 (96Hex) when using the EtherNet/IP unit (CB-NEP20E: Optional).

z Attribute
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Details

This information is specified by the output data for the cyclic communication data
3 (03Hex) Get/Set data Byte array allocation in the global settings. Controller controls, command input, and other data
can be written to it.

Attribute3 size (bytes)


4 (04Hex) Get size UINT This is the size that is specified for cyclic communications data size in the cyclic
communication data allocation in the global settings.

z Example of output assembly data format


The output assembly configuration is as prescribed in the cyclic communication data allocation in the global settings.
For the purpose of explanation, the configuration is shown with the settings listed below.
• Cyclic communication data size: 496 bytes (Addresses 0000 - 0495)
Setting Address
7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition (byte)

Error reset Cmd


0000 B067 Reserved B066 Reserved B065 Reserved B064 B063 Result ack B062 Reserved B061 Reserved B060
request request
0001 B06F Reserved B06E Reserved B06D Reserved B06C Reserved B06B Reserved B06A Reserved B069 Reserved B068 TRG
0002 B077 Reserved B076 Reserved B075 Reserved B074 Reserved B073 Reserved B072 TEST B071 EXT B070 RESET
RESET_ MSR_
0003 B07F Reserved B07E Reserved B07D B07C B07B ZERO_OFF B07A ZERO_ON B079 Reserved B078 TIMING
ALL RESET
0004 B027 Reserved B026 Reserved B025 Reserved B024 Reserved B023 Reserved B022 Reserved B021 Reserved B020 Reserved

Bit area 0005 B02F Reserved B02E Reserved B02D Reserved B02C Reserved B02B Reserved B02A Reserved B029 Reserved B028 Reserved
0006 B037 Reserved B036 Reserved B035 Reserved B034 Reserved B033 Reserved B032 Reserved B031 Reserved B030 Reserved
0007 B03F Reserved B03E Reserved B03D Reserved B03C Reserved B03B Reserved B03A Reserved B039 Reserved B038 Reserved
0008 B047 Reserved B046 Reserved B045 Reserved B044 Reserved B043 Reserved B042 Reserved B041 Reserved B040 Reserved
0009 B04F Reserved B04E Reserved B04D Reserved B04C Reserved B04B Reserved B04A Reserved B049 Reserved B048 Reserved
0010 B057 Reserved B056 Reserved B055 Reserved B054 Reserved B053 Reserved B052 Reserved B051 Reserved B050 Reserved
0011 B05F Reserved B05E Reserved B05D Reserved B05C Reserved B05B Reserved B05A Reserved B059 Reserved B058 Reserved

Error code 0012


W000 ExecCondNo
area 0013

Reserved 0014
W001 Reserved
area 0015

0016

Measurement 0017
W002 Command number
count area 0018
0019
0020
0021
W004 Cmd Parameter1
0022

0023

0024
0025
Command W006 Cmd Parameter2
output area 0026
0027
0028
0029
W008 Cmd Parameter3
0030
0031
… … …

z Service
Service code Name Details

14 (0EHex) GetAttributeSingle Acquires the attribute value.

Sets the attribute value.


16 (10Hex) SetAttributeSingle Whether or not it can be set depends on the
attribute access properties.

5-32
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

ClassID: 113 (71Hex) Measurement Object


„ Description
This object is unique to the controller, and provides the attributes and services that are necessary to control the controller by means of message
communications.
For details concerning control by attributes, refer to the control sequence for cyclic communication.

„ Instance : 1 (01Hex)
z Attribute
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Details

Indicates the controller status.


Measurement • Bit 0 : ERROR
100 (64Hex) Get BYTE
Object Status • Bit 1 : Reserved
• Bit 2 : RUN

Displays the measurement status.


• Bit 0 : READY • Bit 8 : TRG_ack • Bit 16 : BUSY
• Bit 1 : Reserved • Bit 9 : Reserved • Bit 17 : Reserved
• Bit 2 : Reserved • Bit 10 : Reserved • Bit 18 : Reserved
101 (65Hex) Get Process Status DWORD • Bit 3 : Reserved • Bit 11 : Reserved • Bit 19 : Reserved
• Bit 4 : Reserved • Bit 12 : Reserved • Bit 20 : MSR_VALID
• Bit 5 : Reserved • Bit 13 : Reserved • Bit 21-31 : Reserved
• Bit 6 : Reserved • Bit 14 : Reserved
• Bit 7 : Reserved • Bit 15 : Reserved

Initializes the measurement process.


102 (66Hex) Get/Set RESET BOOL
0->1: Initialize the measurement process.

Restricts the output. Clears the output buffer when 0->1.


103 (67Hex) Get/Set TEST BOOL • 1: Restrict output
• 0: Permit output

Restricts trigger input.


104 (68Hex) Get/Set EXT BOOL • 1: Restrict trigger input.
• 0: Trigger input enabled

Inputs a trigger.
105 (69Hex) Get/Set TRG BYTE • Bit 0 : TRG
• Bit 1 - 7: Reserved

Indicates the results output status.


106 (6AHex) Get Results Status BYTE • Bit 0 : Result ready flag
• Bit 1 : Result OR flag

107 (6BHex) Get/Set Result ack flag BOOL Performs results output handshake control.

Displays the results data. The data size is fixed at 248 bytes when the selected PLC
Inspection DWORD type is the Rockwell SLC5/05, and at 496 bytes in other cases. The amount that was
108 (6CHex) Get
Result [124] specified in the cyclic communication allocations can be acquired from the starting
address.

Requests the communication control command.


Command
109 (6DHex) Get/Set BOOL • 1: Request command execution.
request flag
• 0: Does not request command execution.

Command Structure
Specifies the communication control command No. and parameters.
Command The data size is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is the Rockwell SLC5/05, and
DWORD
110 (6EHex) Get/Set Number 496 bytes in all other cases.
*At setup, only the size that requires update can be specified (4-byte integer
Command multiple).
DWORD
Param

Indicates the command execution status.


Command • Bit 0: Command complete flag
111 (6FHex) Get BYTE
Status • Bit 1: Command error flag
• Bit 2: Command ready flag

Command
Structure
Result Indicates the command execution results.
The data size is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is the Rockwell SLC5/05,
Command
112 (70Hex) Get DWORD and 496 bytes in all other cases. The data size varies depending on the command
Result
execution result. The maximum data size is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is
Command the Rockwell SLC5/05, and 496 bytes in all other cases.
DWORD
Data

Indicates the measurement count.


113 (71Hex) Get Total Count UDINT Change measurement count (increase by 1) can also be used as the result output
complete signal.

Ignored if a recipe number outside of the range (1 to 8) is specified.


The update timing for Set is the same as for EXW however it is different from EXW in
114 (72Hex) Get/Set Exec Cond No UINT
that update occurs even when operation is stopped.
With Get, an IMMEDIATE recipe number is acquired and returned.

115 (73Hex) Get NGCount UDINT Indicates the NG count.

5-33
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Attribute ID Access Name Data type Details

Program ID Structure Sets and references the program No.

116 (74Hex) Get/Set SD No. UINT Specifies the SD memory card number (1 or 2).

Program No. UINT Specifies the program No. (0 - 999).

Indicates the status/results of program change by attribute 116.


Program Load • 0: Program change successful
118 (76Hex) Get UINT
Status • 1: Program change failed
• 2: Program change in progress

For Get access, the GetAttributeSingle service (0EHex) is used. For Set, the SetAttributeSingle service (10Hex) is used.

z Service
Service code Name Details

5 (05Hex) Reset Initializes the measurement process.

14 (0EHex) GetAttributeSingle Acquires the attribute value.

16 (10Hex) SetAttributeSingle Sets the attribute value. Whether or not it can be set depends on the attribute access properties.

75 (4BHex) Capture Runs capture (measurement).

76 (4CHex) Run command Issues a command request. The command execution results are returned by message response.

77 (4DHex) GetResultsData Fetches the measurement results.

78 (4EHex) Rewrite recipe No. Rewrites the recipe number.

79 (4FHex) GetAreaAllocationInfo Acquires the cyclic communication allocation settings.

80 (50Hex) Clear error Clears the error status.

z Service details
• Reset service (05Hex)
Initializes the measurement process. The executed contents are the same as for I/O control reset control.
• Send parameter : None
• Response data : None
• Capture service (4BHex)
Trigger is input and capture occurs.
• Send parameter

Name Data type Details

Head information specifying the capture


TriggerBit BYTE
• Bit 0: TRG

• Returned error code

Error code Name Details

09 (09Hex) Abnormal parameter value A parameter value other than 1 was specified.

21 (15Hex) Parameter size is too large. A parameter was specified with a size larger than 2 bytes.

19 (13Hex) Parameter size is too small. Parameter is missing.

16 (10Hex) Status error Ready is OFF (not in run mode, receive trigger disabled, etc.).

• Result data: None


In the communication process using messages, a processing delay of several 10s of ms or longer occurs. If this is a problem, use cyclic
communication or terminal input for control.

5-34
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

• Communication control command execution service (4CHex)


Executes communication control commands.
• Send parameter

Name Data type Details

Command Number DWORD Specifies the communication control command No.

Specifies the command parameters. A maximum of 492 bytes of parameters can be specified (4-byte integer
multiple).
Command Param DWORD
For details on how to specify commands, refer to “List of Communication Commands for Control” (Page
5-2).

• Returned error code

Error code Sub code Name Details

Command execution
00 (00Hex) Command execution was completed.
completion

19 (13Hex) Parameter too small error The parameter was not specified in the send-data.

21 (15Hex) Parameter too large error Parameter larger than 496 bytes was specified in the send-data.

2 Command error The specified command does not exist.

Command operation
3 Operation of the received command is not possible.
prohibited
31 (1FHex)
Command
5 The command results area is insufficient.
response error

22 Parameter error The parameter number or range is incorrect.

16 (10Hex) Status error The “Command ready flag” is OFF.

• Results data:
When the execution of a command that includes command results is successful, the results data is returned in the format shown below.

Name Data type Details

Returns the command execution results. The data contained in this area corresponds to the Command
Command Data DWORD [ ] Data part. The maximum size of the returned data is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is the Rockwell
SLC5/05, and 496 bytes in all other cases.

In the communication process using messages, a processing delay of several 10s of ms or longer occurs. If this is a problem, use cyclic
communication or terminal input for control.

• Results data acquisition service (4DHex)


Fetches the last measurement results.
• Send parameter

Name Data type Details

Specify the size of the results data to fetch in bytes (results data is in units of four bytes. Make sure
Size UINT
to set a value in multiples of four).

Specify the offset of the results data to fetch in bytes (results data is in units of four bytes. Make
Offset UINT
sure to set a value in multiples of four).

• Returned error code

Error code Name Details

09 (09Hex) Abnormal parameter value Offset or size value is incorrect.

21 (15Hex) Parameter size is too large. Parameter size is too large.

19 (13Hex) Parameter size is too small. Parameter size is insufficient.

• Results data

Name Data type Details

Returns results data with the specified offset and size.


Result BYTE [ ] The maximum data size is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is the Rockwell SLC5/05, and
496 bytes in all other cases.

• In the communication process using messages, a processing delay of several 10s of ms or longer may occur. If this is a problem, use cyclic
communication or terminal input for control.
• The results data that can be acquired is up to the size specified in the cyclic communication allocations.
• When this command is used, set the handshake to OFF.

5-35
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

• Rewrite recipe No. service (4EHex)


This service updates the recipe number.
• Send parameter

Name Data type Details

No DWORD The recipe number to be set.

• Returned error code

Error code Name Details

09 (09Hex) Abnormal parameter value Size value is incorrect.

21 (15Hex) Parameter size is too large. Parameter size is too large.

19 (13Hex) Parameter size is too small. Parameter size is insufficient.

• Result data: None


In the communication process using messages, a processing delay of several 10s of ms or longer occurs. If this is a problem, use cyclic
communication or terminal input for control.

• Area allocation information acquisition service (4FHex)


Acquires the address and size for the areas allocated to cyclic communication.
• Send parameter

Name Data type Details

Direction
Direction UINT • 0: Receiving side
• 1: Sending side

When Direction is 0 (receiving side)


• 0: Bit area
• 1: Fixed byte data area
• 2: CommandParam area
index UINT When Direction is 1 (sending side)
• 0: Bit area
• 1: Fixed byte data area
• 2: CommandData area
• 3: ResultData area

• Returned error code

Error code Name Details

09 (09Hex) Abnormal parameter value A parameter value other than 0,1, 2, or 3 was specified.

21 (15Hex) Parameter size is too large. A parameter was specified with a size larger than 2 bytes.

19 (13Hex) Parameter size is too small. Parameter is missing.

• Results data:

Name Data type Details

Size UINT Size of specified area

Offset UINT Starting address of specified area

• Error clear service (50Hex)


Clears the error status.
• Send parameter

Name Data type Details

Error to be cleared
index UINT
• Bit 0: Error

• Returned error code

Error code Name Details

09 (09Hex) Abnormal parameter value A parameter value other than 1 was specified.

21 (15Hex) Parameter size is too large. A parameter was specified with a size larger than 2 bytes.

19 (13Hex) Parameter size is too small. Parameter is missing.

• Result data: None


In the communication process using messages, a processing delay of several 10s of ms or longer occurs. If this is a problem, use cyclic
communication or terminal input for control.

5-36
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Controlling the Controller Using EtherNet/IP Message Communications


„ Using message communication „ Control using message communication
The controller functions as the message communication server. The When using messages to control the controller, access Measurement
procedure for issuing message communication varies depending on the Object.
device. However, information such as the following must be specified. Measurement Object provides the following services.
For details, refer to “Controller EtherNet/IP Communication
Specifications” (Page 5-19) and the manual of each device. Service name Service ID Description

z IP address: Resets the controller


measurement content.
Specify the controller IP address.
It is the same as the
Reset 5 (05Hex)
z Class, instance: reset command in the
Specify the following classes and instances that are provided by the communications control
controller EtherNet/IP function. commands.

Class name Class ID Instance ID Acquires the specified


GetAttributeSingle 14 (0EHex)
attribute value.
Identity Object 1 (01Hex) 1 (01Hex)
Writes a value to the
Message Router SetAttributeSingle 16 (10Hex)
2 (02Hex) 1 (01Hex) specified attribute.
Object
Inputs the specified trigger
100 (64Hex): Input Capture 75 (4BHex) signal and performs image
capture (measurement).
101 (65Hex): Output
Assembly Object 4 (04Hex) (When using the Ethernet port) Executes communication
ExecuteCommand 76 (4CHex)
control commands.
150 (96Hex): Output
(When using the EtherNet/IP unit) Fetches the measurement
GetResultsData 77 (4DHex)
results.
Connection Manager
6 (06Hex) 1 (01Hex)
Object RewriteRecipeNo. 78 (4EHex) Rewrites the recipe number.

Measurement Object 113 (71Hex) 1 (01Hex) Acquires the allocation


information for each area
Port Object 244 (F4Hex) 1 (01Hex) (command response output
GetArea area, system variable
TCP/IP Interface 79 (4FHex)
245 (F5Hex) 1 (01Hex) AllocationInfo allocation area, results
Object output area, etc.) that
were allocated for cyclic
Ethernet Link Object 246 (F6Hex) 1 (01Hex)
communication data.

The primary classes that are used for message Clear error 80 (50Hex) Clears the error status.
communication are the following.
• Measurement Object: This object is unique to the controller For details on individual services, refer to “Controller
and is tasked with all TM-X5000 Series controls. EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications” (Page 5-19).
• Assembly Object: With a PLC that does not support cyclic
communication, by directly reading and writing the data of
this object, it is possible to achieve control that is the same
as cyclic communication.

z Attributes
Specify the attributes that exist in the specified class and instance. For
details of the attributes of each class, refer to “Controller EtherNet/IP
Communication Specifications” (Page 5-19) and the specifications of the
EtherNet/IP functions issued by ODVA.
To obtain the specifications issued by ODVA, refer to the
URL below.
ODVA homepage: www.odva.org/

z Services
Specify the contents for execution. The primary services that can be used
with the controller are the following.
• Access to attributes:
GetAttributeSingle/SetAttributeSingle
• Object-specific service:
Services that are prepared for individual objects.

5-37
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Resetting the controller using EtherNet/IP Controlling image capture with EtherNet/IP
message communication message communication
Controller measurement can be reset using message communication by
means of the Measurement Object reset service. „ Image capture service (4BHex) control image
Inputs the specified trigger and performs image capture.
„ Reset service (05Hex) control image
Resets the measurement content. The contents that are executed are the Controller
PLC
same as I/O reset. (TM-X5000 Series)
Controller Image capture
PLC
(TM-X5000 Series) service

Reset service Response

Response
The following conditions must be satisfied in order to use this
service:
• EtherNet/IP must be enabled when started.
„ Example of data • For [Head setting], [Trigger mode] must be set to [External].
• “READY” must be true (READY state).
z Send data
Class ID 71Hex Measurement Object „ Example of data
When a trigger is input, specify 0x01 with bits 0 and 1 of the trigger
Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value information as 1.
Service ID 05Hex Reset service z Send data
Attribute ID - - Class ID 71Hex Measurement Object

Data - - Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value

Service ID 4BHex Image capture service


z Response
Execution result Execution result Attribute ID - -

Data in the 0th byte 01Hex Bit0: Trg enabled


Additional code None

z Execution result z Response


0 (00Hex): Service execution was successful. Execution result Execution result

Additional code None

z Execution result
• 0 (00Hex) : Service execution was successful.
• 9 (09Hex) : Data value is not correct (not a valid value).
• 16 (10Hex) : Service was not available (not in Ready state.)
• 19 (13Hex) : Incorrect data size (too small)
• 21 (15Hex) : Incorrect data size (too large)

5-38
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Command control with EtherNet/IP message communication


„ Command execution service (4CHex) control image „ Example of data
Executes command data. When specifying number specified command 24 (PW) and changing to
Program 10 in SD1
Controller
(TM-X5000 Series)
PLC z Send data
Class ID 71Hex Measurement Object
Command
execution service Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value

Service ID 4CHex Command execution service


Response
Attribute ID - -

Number specified command


• The following conditions must be satisfied in order to use 0th byte 18Hex No. 24
this service. (Change inspection program)
• EtherNet/IP must be enabled when started.
• The “Command ready flag” must be true (service is 1st byte 00Hex
available).
• The upper limit for the data that can be specified and 2nd byte 00Hex
acquired by command input and command output with
3rd byte 00Hex
this service is 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is
the Rockwell SLC5/05, and is 496 bytes in all other cases. 4th byte 01Hex SD No. 1 (01Hex)
This size is unrelated to the command area size that was
allocated for the cyclic communication area on the [Global] Data 5th byte 00Hex
screen.
• The command output data returns a response 6th byte 00Hex
corresponding to the size of the results data for the
7th byte 00Hex
executed command.
8th byte 0AHex Program No. 10 (0AHex)

9th byte 00Hex

10th byte 00Hex

11th byte 00Hex

z Response data
Execution result Execution result

Additional code Refer below.

0th byte Execution result byte No. 0

1st byte 00Hex


Data
2nd byte 00Hex

3rd byte 00Hex

z Execution result
• 0 (00Hex) : Service execution was successful.
• 19 (13Hex) : Incorrect data size (too small)
• 21 (15Hex) : Incorrect data size (too large)
• 31 (1FHex) : A vendor-specific error occurred. The detailed reason is
indicated in the additional code.

z Additional code
Contains command error codes.

The specified command does


2 (02Hex) Command error
not exist.

Command Operation of the received


3 (03Hex)
operation prohibited command is not possible.

Parameter The parameter number or


22 (16Hex)
Error range is incorrect.

5-39
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using EtherNet/IP

Fetching Measurement Data Using EtherNet/IP Changing the Recipe Number Using EtherNet/IP
Message Communications (Fetch Data) Message Communications (Rewrite Recipe No.)
„ Results data acquisition service (4DHex) control „ Rewrite recipe number service (4EHex) control image
image This service rewrites the recipe number to the specified value.
Specify the offset and size in bytes for the results data that was allocated
in the output settings, and acquire the results data. Controller
PLC
(TM-X5000 Series)
Controller
PLC Rewrite recipe No.
(TM-X5000 Series)
service
Results data
acquisition service Response

Response
The following conditions must be satisfied in order to use this
service.
The upper limit size for the results data that can be acquired is the results • EtherNet/IP must be enabled when started.
data area size that was allocated in the cyclic communication area.
However, it is limited to 248 bytes when the selected PLC type is Rockwell
SLC5/05, and to 496 bytes in all other cases. If a larger size is specified, „ Example of data
When writing recipe No. 5
data is returned only in the maximum size that can be returned.

The following conditions must be satisfied in order to use this


z Send data
service. Class ID 71Hex Measurement Object
• EtherNet/IP must be enabled when started.
• Results data must be allocated in the cyclic Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value
communications area.
Service ID 4EHex Rewrite recipe No. service
• Output data with destination [EtherNet/IP] must be set in
the output settings. Attribute ID - -
• Measurement with the current settings must be completed
(measurement count one or more). 0th byte 05Hex

1st byte 00Hex


„ Example of data Data
Value written as the recipe
number
Acquiring 20 bytes starting from byte 12 in the results data 2nd byte 00Hex

z Send data 3rd byte 00Hex


Class ID 71Hex Measurement Object

Instance ID 01Hex Fixed value


z Response data
Execution result Execution result
Results data acquisition
Service ID 4DHex
service Additional code None

Attribute ID - -
z Execution result
0th byte 14Hex Acquire 20 bytes. • 0 (00Hex) : Service execution was successful.
• 9 (09Hex) : Data value is not correct (not within valid range).
1st byte 00Hex • 19 (13Hex) : Incorrect data size (too small)
• 21 (15Hex) : Incorrect data size (too large)
Acquire results data beginning
Data 2nd byte 0CHex
from byte No. 12

3rd byte 00Hex

4th byte 00Hex

z Response data
Execution result Execution result

Additional code None

0th byte Results data byte No. 12

1st byte Results data byte No. 13

2nd byte Results data byte No. 14

3rd byte Results data byte No. 15

Data (...)

16th byte Results data byte No. 28

17th byte Results data byte No. 29

18th byte Results data byte No. 30

19th byte Results data byte No. 31

z Execution result
• 0 (00Hex) : Service execution was successful.
• 9 (09Hex) : Data value is incorrect. (Offset or size is negative, or
value is too large.)
• 19 (13Hex) : Incorrect data size (too small)
• 21 (15Hex) : Incorrect data size (too large)

5-40
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET


This system supports communication via PROFINET.
PROFINET is an open communications standard with specifications that are specified by PI (PROFIBUS & PROFINET International) and communications are
possible with all devices that support it, regardless of the vendor. This system conforms to ConformanceClass A.
The Ethernet port complies with Conformance Class A and the PROFINET unit (CB-NPN20E: Optional) complies with Conformance Class C.
The following functions are possible with a PROFINET connection.
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, and PLC-Link cannot be used at the same time.

z Cyclic communication
This function provides high-speed control at an interval of several to several tens of milliseconds by communicating at the update time interval. In addition,
because it is possible to control the controller by referencing and updating variables and devices in the PLC without considering the communication, it allows
programs to be written easily on the PLC side.
• Control the controller: The controller can be controlled by using periodic communication to send the commands for execution.
• Output the results data: Data can be output by periodic communication when the items for output from PROFINET are set in the output settings (Page 3-34).
• Change the recipe number: The controller can be controlled by using periodic communication to specify the recipe number.
• Be sure to set an update time of 4 ms or longer for cyclic communication (1 ms or longer when using the PROFINET unit).
• In a network where many devices including a PROFINET device are connected, delay or packet loss may occur sometimes when a heavy load
is applied to the network constantly or temporarily. Be sure to perform sufficient verification prior to operation.

z Recorded data communication (aperiodic communication)


This function can be used for communications that do not require punctuality as is needed with cyclic communications. A communication method that uses
specialized commands to write to the data record (1024 bytes/record) and can access an area that exceeds the maximum size (1408 bytes; 1212 bytes when
using the PROFINET unit) for cyclic communication.

Controller PROFINET Communication Specifications

Standard specifications
This system’s PROFINET communications supports “periodic communication” and “recorded data communication (aperiodic communication)”.

z Cyclic communication z Recorded data communication (aperiodic communication)


A function that performs communications periodically at the set update This is a communication method that accesses the record of the byte
time interval, it is ideal for real-time control. assignment divided into units of 1024 bytes with a specialized command.
• The update time and communication size conform to the PLC • There are two commands for the read record and write record, and a
connection settings (the maximum communication size is 1408 bytes; response is returned for the executed command.
1212 bytes when using the PROFINET unit). • This function can be used for communications that do not require to be
performed in real-time.
• It can access areas for which the maximum periodic communication size
(1408 bytes).
• An index is assigned to each record, the index and size is specified, and
data is accessed.
The accessible range of each byte assignment is as follows.

Controller receive-data - read/write

Accessible address
Index
Controller port PROFINET-Unit

1 0012 to 1035 0012 to 1011

2 1036 to 2059 1012 to 2011

3 (None) 2012 to 2059

Controller send-data - read-only

Accessible address
Index
Controller port PROFINET-Unit

10 0012 to 1035 0012 to 1011

11 1036 to 2059 1012 to 2011

12 2060 to 3083 2012 to 2059

13 3084 to 4107 3012 to 4011

14 (None) 4012 to 4107

• The read record and write record commands are issued using the
respective “RDREC” (SFB 52) and “WRREC” (SFB 53) blocks from
the PLC.

If the parameter module is being written to when the write


record command is issued with periodic communication,
a conflict may occur in the memory area. To use the write
record command, configure the settings so that periodic
communication and the memory area do not conflict.

5-41
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Allocation Conditions of Periodic Communication Data


„ Example of the send-data settings for this controller (TM-X5000 Series)
Setting Address
7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
condition (byte)

0000 Reserved Reserved Reserved Result OR Result Ready Cmd Ready Cmd Error Cmd Complete

0001 MSR_VALID RUN Reserved ERROR BUSY Reserved TRG_ack READY

RESET_ MSR_ ZERO_ ZERO_ON_


0002 Reserved Reserved Reserved TIMING_ack
ALL_ack RESET_ack OFF_ack ack
0003 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0004
Value 7 Value 6 Value 5 Value 4 Value 3 Value 2 Value 1 Value 0

Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0005
Value 15 Value 14 Value 13 Value 12 Value 11 Value 10 Value 9 Value 8

Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
Bit area 0006
Value 23 Value 22 Value 21 Value 20 Value 19 Value 18 Value 17 Value 16

Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0007
Value 31 Value 30 Value 29 Value 28 Value 27 Value 26 Value 25 Value 24
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0008
Value 39 Value 38 Value 37 Value 36 Value 35 Value 34 Value 33 Value 32
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0009
Value 47 Value 46 Value 45 Value 44 Value 43 Value 42 Value 41 Value 40
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0010
Value 55 Value 54 Value 53 Value 52 Value 51 Value 50 Value 49 Value 48
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0011
Value 63 Value 62 Value 61 Value 60 Value 59 Value 58 Value 57 Value 56
0012
Error code area Error Code
0013
0014
Reserved area Reserved
0015
0016

Measurement 0017
Total Count
count area 0018
0019
0020
0021
Command Result
0022
0023
0024
0025
Command Data 1
0026
0027
Command output
0028
area
0029
Command Data 2
0030
0031

0044
0045
Command Data 6
0046
0047
0048
0049
Result Data 1
0050
0051
Results output
0052
area
0053
Result Data 2
0054
0055

5-42
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

z Name and behavior of input signals


Allocation area Name Remarks

Cmd Complete Turns on when command processing is completed.

Cmd Error Turns off when command processing is successful and on when command processing fails.

Cmd Ready Turns on when command processing can be accepted.

Result Ready Turns on when data transmission is completed.

Result OR Used to output the OR result for the judged value of tool specified in the output settings.

READY Turns on when trigger input can be accepted.

TRG_ack Turns on when the trigger input is accepted. Turns off when trigger input turns off.

BUSY Output during measurement processing or command processing.

Output while a dialog box is displayed on the screen when a system error occurs. For details on typical
system errors, see “Error Messages” (Page A-2).
ERROR
On the [System] screen for [Global] (Page 4-6), error output for SD memory card-related errors and so
Bit area on can also be specified.

RUN Output when the controller is in Run mode.

Turns on when the internal measurement values for all tools set with the active recipe are no longer in the
judgment standby state.
MSR_VALID
Turns off if measured values are finalized with TIMING or when internal measurement values are cleared
with MSR_RESET.

TIMING_ack Turns on when the input timing is accepted. Turns off when the input timing is turned off.

ZERO_ON_ack Turns on when zero on input is accepted. Turns off when zero on input is turned off.

ZERO_OFF_ack Turns on when zero off input is accepted. Turns off when zero off input is turned off.

Turns on when reset measured value input is accepted. Turns off when reset measured value input is
MSR_RESET_ack
turned off.

Turns on when reset measured value (all recipes) input is accepted. Turns off when reset measured
RESET_ALL_ack
value (all templates) input is turned off.

Tool Judge Value0 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0004:bit0).

Tool Judge Value1 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0004:bit1).
Tool judgment area
... ...

Tool Judge Value63 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0011:bit7).

Error code area Error Code Contains error codes for causes of errors.

Indicates the measurement count.

When used with [Hold Mode] set to [ON], change measurement count (increase by 1)
Measurement count of the system variables allocated to the results output area is used as the result output
Total Count complete signal.
area
To allocate system variables to the results output area, click [Output Settings] > [Output
Results] > [Settings] under [Field Network] > [Byte Allocation Area] > [Display Options],
select [System Variables] and add [Measurement count] to [Output items].

Command Result Indicates the command execution results.

Command Data 1 Returns command execution results data 1.


Command output
Command Data 2 Returns command execution results data 2.
area
... ...

Command Data 6 Returns command execution results data 6.

Result Data 1 Returns measurement results data 1.

Results output area Result Data 2 Returns measurement results data 2.

... ...

5-43
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Example of controller receive-data settings


Address
Setting condition 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0bit
(byte)
Error reset
0000 Reserved Reserved Reserved Result ack Reserved Reserved Cmd request
request
0001 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TRG
0002 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TEST EXT RESET
0003 Reserved Reserved RESET_ALL MSR_RESET ZERO_OFF ZERO_ON Reserved TIMING
0004 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Bit area 0005 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Reserved area
0006 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0007 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0008 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0009 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0010 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0011 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
0012
ExecCondNo
0013
Recipe No.
0014
Reserved
0015
0016
0017
Command number
0018
0019
0020
0021
Cmd Parameter1
0022
0023
Command input area 0024
0025
Cmd Parameter2
0026
0027
0028
0029
Cmd Parameter3
0030
0031

As ExecCondNo is only loaded by the controller when there are changes, the recipe number can also be overwritten by a command.

z Name and behavior of signal output


Allocation area Name Remarks
Cmd request Requests command execution when rising from OFF to ON.
Result ack Notifies of data acquisition when rising from OFF to ON.
Error reset request Clears errors when rising from OFF to ON.
TRG Starts capture (measurement) (leading edge synchronization). The input is accepted when READY is ON.
Used to reset operation.
• Result OR output is 0.
• The measurement count returns to 0.
RESET • All of archived image data are deleted.
• All of the data in the output buffer are reset.
• A file in the measurement result output destination is newly created. A folder in the image output destination is newly
created.

Bit area Used to suspend the occurrence of internal triggers and the acceptance of external triggers. When the input turns on,
EXT
READY is forcibly turned off to stop the acceptance of all triggers (level synchronization).
Used to suspend the status output for trial runs.
• When this signal is input, the result data that have not been output will be deleted.
TEST • Result OR output is reset during input.
• As soon as input turns off, the measurement processing result obtained immediately after that will start being output
again.
TIMING Requests input timing when rising from OFF to ON.
ZERO_ON Requests auto zero on input when rising from OFF to ON.
ZERO_OFF Requests auto zero off input when rising from OFF to ON.
MSR_RESET Requests reset measured value processing input when rising from OFF to ON.
RESET_ALL Requests reset measured value processing for all recipes when rising from OFF to ON.
Recipe
ExecCondNo Writes recipe numbers (1 to 8). The recipe numbers are loaded by the controller when values in this area change.
No. area
Command number Writes a command number.
Cmd Parameter1 Writes command parameter 1.
Command input area Cmd Parameter2 Writes command parameter 2.
Cmd Parameter3 Writes command parameter 3.
… …

5-44
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

z Connection
Changing PROFINET Settings • PROFINET Name
Specify the name to identify the TM-X5000 Series on the PROFINET
The settings for controlling data input and output via PROFINET can be network. Set the controller to the same name as the name input when
changed on the [Field Network] screen under [Communications & I/O] in specifying the controller on the PLC as the connection destination. If
[Global]. a different name is specified, the PLC cannot detect the controller, so
PROFINET communications will not be established.
• Controller Ethernet settings, such as the IP address and
subnet mask, are changed in “Network” (Page 4-2). z IP address settings (when using the PROFINET unit)
• If the PROFINET settings were changed, it is necessary to • IP Address
restart the controller in order to apply the settings. Enter an IP address (default setting: 192.168.0.20).
• Subnet Mask

1 Select [Global] → [Communications & I/O] → [Field Network]. Enter a subnet mask (default setting: 255.255.255.0).
• Default Gateway
Enter a default gateway IP address (default setting: 0.0.0.0).

The set values are the same for the P1 and P2 ports on
the communications expansion unit.

z Data Settings
• Cyclic Data Size

2 Select [PROFINET] or [PROFINET-Unit]. Displays the maximum cyclic data packet size in bytes.
• Data Configurations
Click [Configuration] to show the overview of the data allocations in
PROFINET periodic communication. For a command returning a text
string, the response data may be large. Clicking the [View List] button
shows the detailed allocation statuses of the receive-data and send-

3
data.
Change the settings as required.
<When [PROFINET] is selected>

• Decimal Point
<When [PROFINET-Unit] is selected> Selects the data representation type of the result data output.
• Fixed-Point (default)
Numbers displayed on each tool are handled as signed 32-bit integer
data.
(Example)
If decimal points are set to three digits and the measured value is
123.450 mm, it is handled as 123450 integer data.
• Floating-Point
The data is handled as 32-bit single-precision floating decimal point
data.
• Endian
The “Endian” is the method used to arrange the most significant byte
data in the PLC data memory. Select the appropriate endian according
to the PLC model (default setting: Big-endian).
Typical PLC endianness is as follows:
• Siemens PLC: Big-endian
• Omron PLC: Little-endian

z Other Setting
• Enable Handshake
After checking that the PLC received the measurement data output,
select whether to write the result of the next data.
When the [Enable Handshake] check box is selected, the controller
turns “ON” “Result ready flag” after the measurement result is output.
Upon reception of the ready flag, the PLC reads the output data and
turns “ON” “Result ack flag”.
The Controller then turns “OFF” its “Result ready flag” after recognizing
the PLC’s ack flag. The PLC turns “OFF” “Result ack flag” to request the
controller to write the next measurement results.

5-45
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

z Cyclic communication status


Displays the PROFINET communication status as [Connected] or [Not
Connected].

z Create GSDML File


This option is used to output the GSDML and icon files which contain the
information about the PROFINET functions of the controller. The files are
named based on the following naming conventions:
• Controller
• GSDML-V2.33-Keyence-TM-X5000-20200821.xml
• GSDML-01FD-0BBB-TM-X5000.bmp
• PROFINET unit (CB-NPN20E: Optional)
• GSDML-V2.34-Keyence-TM-X5K-CB-NPN20E-20210112.xml
• GSDML-01FD-TM-X5K-CB-NPN20E.bmp
• The save destination is “SD2:\tm-x\GSDML\”.
(For the TM-X Navigator, open the [Browse Files] dialog
box and specify the save destination.)
• Because the GSDML file does not contain the information
that was set or changed in the controller [Global],
the created GSDML file will always contain the same
information.

4 Click [OK].

5-46
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Outputting Measurement Data Using PROFINET Periodic Communications (Data Output)


Change the output settings for data output using PROFINET.

Data output flow (example of connection with PLC PROFINET unit)


Set the data and address for output in the output settings.
The controller outputs data via PROFINET in the following manner.

When used with [Hold Mode] set to [ON], selecting [Update Every Timing] (Page 3-35) updates the measurement value by inputting
TIMING, ZERO, MSR_RESET, and RESET_ALL (the internal measurement value will not update).

• Data output via PROFINET is performed only in run mode. Data is not output in setup mode.
• With PROFINET, images and other binary data cannot be output.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

Measurement processing on the controller


completes and the results data is collected.

(2)
(1)
Checks that the Result ack flag is turned off.*1. Result ack flag is turned OFF.
(3)
(3)
Writes data to ResultData and Result OR flag, Data is written to data memory that supports
Tool Judge Value. ResultData and Result OR flag, Tool Judge Value.

(4) (4)
After data writing is completed, When Result ready flag changes to ON, the completion of
Result ready flag is turned ON. data writing is checked and the data is referenced.

(5)
(5)
Detects that the Result ack flag has changed to ON
Result ack flag is turned ON.
and checks that data reading is completed.
(6)
(6)
Detects that Result ready flag has
Result ready flag is turned OFF.
changed to OFF.

*1 When the results output handshake is OFF, output data is overwritten and updated without checking whether the Result ack flag is OFF. To
take the rise of Result ready flag as a data reference synchronization signal, turn the Result ack flag ON at each output, which will turn the
Result ready flag OFF.

z Timing chart
Measurement
Measurement processing processing

ON (2)
Result ack flag The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Result ready flag The controller writes.
OFF A

ON
Result OR flag The controller writes.
OFF

ON
ResultData The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Tool Judge Value The controller writes.
OFF

(1) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1)

A : 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed).

The Result OR flag is updated in coordination with results output with PROFINET as the output destination. When the Result OR flag is used, it is
necessary to configure the output setting so that one or more data item is output via PROFINET.

5-47
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Controlling the Controller with PROFINET Periodic Communication (Command Control)


The communication control commands can be executed at any time.

Flow of Command Process using PROFINET (Example of Connection with the PLC’s PROFINET Unit)
The controller performs command control via PROFINET in the following manner.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

(1)
The command number to be executed is
written to the data memory that corresponds to
Command Number and the command parameter
is written to the data memory that corresponds to
Command Parameter .
(3)
(2)
Detects Command request flag rise, Checks that Command ready flag is turned ON
executes a command from Command Number, and turns ON Command request flag.
reads a command parameter from the address that
corresponds to Command Parameter executes a Detects that Command ready flag is turned OFF
command and turns OFF Command ready flag. and checks the start of the command.

(4)
After the command is executed, response data is
Writes response data to the data memory that
written to Command Data, and Command error flag
corresponds with Command Data*1.
and Command Result are set to the error state.
(5)
(5) Checks that command execution is completed when
it is detected that Command complete flag turns
Command complete flag is turned ON.
ON and refers to the response data and command
(7) execution result.

Checks that Command request flag is OFF, (6)


Command complete flag and
Command request flag is turned OFF.
Command error flag are turned OFF, and
Command ready flag is turned ON.

In the case of a command for which there is no response data, data is not output in response to the Command Data.
When an error occurs, the command execution results are written to Command Result. (0: Success, <Error code>: Failure).
The error cords conform to “Error Messages” (Page A-2).

z Timing chart
Command execution status Run command

ON
Command Number The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command Parameter The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command ready flag A The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command request flag A A The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command Data The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command error flag The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command Result The controller writes.
OFF

ON
The controller writes.
Command complete flag A
OFF

(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

A : 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed).

5-48
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Controlling the Controller with PROFINET Cyclic Communication (Change Recipe Number)
The recipe number can be changed at any time.

Workflow to change the recipe number


The controller changes the value of the recipe number using PROFINET as shown below.
The changed value is applied at the next measurement.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

Refers to the data memory value that corresponds


Writes the recipe number to the data memory that
to ExecCondNo
corresponds to ExecCondNo
and changes the recipe number

5-49
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using PROFINET

Troubleshooting

When correct operation does not occur


„ Checking whether or not the PROFINET connection is correct
From [Global] for the controller, select [Communications & I/O] [Field Network], and then check [Periodic Communication Status:]. If [Not Connected] is
displayed here, communication has failed. Check the cable connection, IP address, and communications settings on the PLC again.

„ Result OR flag is not output.


The Result OR flag is updated in coordination with results output with PROFINET as the output destination. When the “Result OR flag” is used, it is necessary
to configure the output setting so that one or more data item is output via PROFINET.

„ Result ready flag remains ON and does not change.


There is the possibility that “Result ack flag” control is not being performed correctly. The “Result ready flag” turns OFF when the “Result ack flag” rise is
recognized in sending (this controller receiving). This is the same regardless of whether “Enable Handshake” is selected or cleared.

„ Data cannot be acquired correctly when reading data based on the change in the rise of STO output from an
external terminal.
STO is the data strobe signal for terminal output. Therefore it cannot be used as the strobe signal for any other data output.
Refer to the “Result ready flag” for the timing as to when to read data by PROFINET.

„ The Ethernet settings (IP address, etc.) unintentionally changed.


For PROFINET, the IP address set for the controller on the PLC overwrites the Ethernet settings (IP address, etc.) configured on the controller when
communication starts. Configure the Ethernet settings that are to be set for the controller on the PLC.

„ Behavior occurs that is different from the module address assigned to the PLC
Deleting the bit module may cause behavior that differs from the address set for the PLC.
Do not delete the bit module.

Error messages
Error cause
Message Cause Corrective Action
No.

• Check that the Ethernet cable is connected correctly.


• Check whether the controller and master were restarted after
PROFINET Communication was interrupted. (When updating the communication settings.
communication has recovery is possible, recovery occurs • Review the requested packet interval and timeout settings on 13701
failed. automatically.) the PLC.
• With the factory default, ERROR output is not set. Set it on the
[System] screen (Page 4-6).

Change the update time on the PLC so the data is output via
PROFINET output failed The output buffer for output via PROFINET PROFINET at a faster rate than it builds up. Or, extend the time
13702
due to a full buffer. is full. between triggers. Note: Results data are not written when the
buffer is full.

The delay of
the handshake Change the update time on the PLC so the data from the tool is
When the PROFINET handshake is on,
causes skipping output via PROFINET at a faster rate than it builds up. Or, extend
delayed handshake caused results output 13703
of the PROFINET the time between triggers. Note: Results data are not written when
via PROFINET to be skipped.
communication result the buffer is full.
output.

• Make sure the PROFINET unit is attached correctly.


The PROFINET unit is not recognized
The PROFINET unit • Make sure the PROFINET unit is not damaged.
and the controller cannot use PROFINET 13704
cannot be recognized. • Do not disconnect the PROFINET unit while the controller and
communication.
module are turned on.

5-50
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT


EtherCAT is real time Ethernet that is open source developed by Beckhoff.
This system functions as an EtherCAT slave and can perform the below functions when connected to an EtherCAT unit (CB-NEC20E: Optional).
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, and PLC-Link cannot be used at the same time.

z Process data object (PDO) communications (cyclical communications)


This function provides high-speed control in a cycle of several microseconds to several tens of milliseconds by communicating at the update time interval. In
addition, because it is possible to control the controller by referencing and updating variables and devices in the PLC without considering the communication, it
allows programs to be written easily on the PLC side.
• Control the controller: The controller can be controlled by using cyclic communication to send the commands for execution.
• Output the results data: Data can be output by cyclic communication when the items for output from EtherCAT are set in the output settings (Page 3-34).
• Change the recipe number: The controller can be controlled by using cyclic communication to specify the recipe number.
• Be sure to set an update time of 500 µs or longer for cyclic communication.
• Even if you specify the update time of the cyclic communication to 500 µs or longer, the processing may be delayed or the communication may
be disconnected by temporary timeout due to the excessive load applied to the controller temporarily or continuously when there are other
communication functions being used in the controller, such as measurement settings, dialog operations, commands, FTP, or remote desktop.
In cases such as this, review the cyclic communication settings and operating conditions. Be sure to verify that there are no problems with
operating performance, including the issues above, prior to operation.
• In a network where many devices including an EtherCAT device are connected, delay or packet loss may occur sometimes when a heavy load
is applied to the network constantly or temporarily. Be sure to perform sufficient verification prior to operation.

z Mailbox communication (non-cyclic communication)


This function can be used for communications that do not require punctuality as is needed with cyclic communications. A communication method that uses
specialized commands to write to the data record and can access an area that exceeds the maximum size (530 bytes (input) or 534 bytes (output)) for cyclic
communication.

Standard Specifications for the EtherCAT Unit (CB-NEC20E: Optional)

Standard specifications
EtherCAT communication that uses an EtherCAT unit (CB-NEC20E: Optional) supports “Process data object (PDO) communications (cyclical communications)”
and “Mailbox communication (non-cyclic communication)”.

z Process data object (PDO) communications (cyclical communications)


A function that performs communications periodically at the set update time interval, it is ideal for real-time control.
• The update time and communication size conform to the PLC connection settings (the maximum cyclical communication size is 530 bytes for input and 534
bytes for output).

z Mailbox communication (non-cyclic communication)


This is a communication method that accesses the object of the byte assignment divided into units of 1000 bytes with a specialized command.
• There are reading (SDO Upload), writing (SDO Download), and other commands, and a response is returned for the executed command.
• This function can be used for communications that do not require to be performed in real-time.
• It can access areas for which the maximum cyclic communication size (input: 530 bytes, output: 534 bytes) is exceeded.
• An index is assigned to each record, the index and size is specified, and data is accessed.
The accessible range of each byte assignment is as follows.
Output data (controller receive) - read/write Input data (controller send) - read-only
Index Accessible address Index Accessible address
2019H 0020 to 1019 2008H 0024 to 1023
201AH 1020 to 2019 200CH 1024 to 2023
201BH 2020 to 2055 200DH 2024 to 3023
200EH 3024 to 4023
200FH 4024 to 4103

If the parameter module is being written to when the SDO Download command is issued with cyclic communication, a conflict may occur in the memory
area. To use the SDO Download command, configure the settings so that cyclic communication and the memory area do not conflict.

Models that Support EtherCAT Connection


For more information on how to set the applicable PLC, refer to the instruction manual provided with the PLC.

Beckhoff PLC
EtherCAT
PLC model Firmware version Software used Version of the software used
communication unit

C6920-0050 (TwinCAT) - (Built in) Windows 7 Ultimate Service Pack 1 TwinCAT3 v3.1.4020 (Build 4020)

Omron PLC
EtherCAT
PLC model Firmware version Software used Version of the software used
communication unit

NJ101-9000 - (Built in) 1.1.521 Sysmac Studio Ver.1.15

NJ301-1100 - (Built in) 1.1.521 Sysmac Studio Ver.1.15

5-51
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Allocation Conditions of Cyclic Communication Data

Example of the send-data settings for this controller (TM-X5000 Series to Beckoff C6920 Series)
The following is an example when the command response output area is set to 24 bytes when one TM-X5000 Series unit is connected and ResultData 128
bytes (Index 2008) is assigned to the process data.

Setting
Index Sub index
condition
Cmd
0x08 Reserved 0x07 Reserved 0x06 Reserved 0x05 Result OR 0x04 Result Ready 0x03 Cmd Ready 0x02 Cmd Error 0x01
Complete
0x10 MSR_VALID 0x0F RUN 0x0E Reserved 0x0D ERROR 0x0C BUSY 0x0B Reserved 0x0A TRG_ack 0x09 READY
2001 MSR_
RESET_ ZERO_ ZERO_ TIMING_
0x18 Reserved 0x17 Reserved 0x16 0x15 RESET_ 0x14 0x13 0x12 Reserved 0x11
ALL_ack OFF_ack ON_ack ack
ack
0x20 Reserved 0x1F Reserved 0x1E Reserved 0x1D Reserved 0x1C Reserved 0x1B Reserved 0x1A Reserved 0x19 Reserved
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0x08 0x07 0x06 0x05 0x04 0x03 0x02 0x01
Value7 Value6 Value5 Value4 Value3 Value2 Value1 Value0
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0x10 0x0F 0x0E 0x0D 0x0C 0x0B 0x0A 0x09
Value15 Value14 Value13 Value12 Value11 Value10 Value9 Value8
Bit area Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0x18 0x17 0x16 0x15 0x14 0x13 0x12 0x11
Value23 Value22 Value21 Value20 Value19 Value18 Value17 Value16
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0x20 0x1F 0x1E 0x1D 0x1C 0x1B 0x1A 0x19
Value31 Value30 Value29 Value28 Value27 Value26 Value25 Value24
2002
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0x28 0x27 0x26 0x25 0x24 0x23 0x22 0x21
Value39 Value38 Value37 Value36 Value35 Value34 Value33 Value32
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0x30 0x2F 0x2E 0x2D 0x2C 0x2B 0x2A 0x29
Value47 Value46 Value45 Value44 Value43 Value42 Value41 Value40
Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0x38 0x37 0x36 0x35 0x34 0x33 0x32 0x31
Value55 Value54 Value53 Value52 Value51 Value50 Value49 Value48

Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge Tool Judge
0x40 0x3F 0x3E 0x3D 0x3C 0x3B 0x3A 0x39
Value63 Value62 Value61 Value60 Value59 Value58 Value57 Value56

Error code
2003 Error Code
area
Measurement
2004 Total Count
count area
Command
execution 2005 Command Result
result
0x01 Command Data 1
0x02 Command Data 2

Result Data …
128 bytes
2008 0x06 Command Data 6
(Default
value) 0x07 Result Data 1
0x08 Result Data 2

5-52
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

z Name and behavior of input signals


Allocation area Name Remarks

Cmd Complete Turns on when command processing is completed.

Cmd Error Turns off when command processing is successful and on when command processing fails.

Cmd Ready Turns on when command processing can be accepted.

Result Ready Turns on when data transmission is completed.

Result OR Used to output the OR result for the judged value of tool specified in the output settings.

READY Turns on when trigger input can be accepted.

TRG_ack Turns on when the trigger input is accepted. Turns off when trigger input turns off.

BUSY Output during measurement processing or command processing.

Output while a dialog box is displayed on the screen when a system error occurs. For details on typical
system errors, see “Error Messages” (Page A-2).
ERROR
On the [System] screen for [Global] (Page 4-6), error output for SD memory card-related errors and so
Bit area on can also be specified.

RUN Output when the controller is in Run mode.

Turns on when the internal measurement values for all tools set with the active recipe are no longer in the
judgment standby state.
MSR_VALID
Turns off if measured values are finalized with TIMING or when internal measurement values are cleared
with MSR_RESET.

TIMING_ack Turns on when the input timing is accepted. Turns off when the input timing is turned off.

ZERO_ON_ack Turns on when zero on input is accepted. Turns off when zero on input is turned off.

ZERO_OFF_ack Turns on when zero off input is accepted. Turns off when zero off input is turned off.

Turns on when reset measured value input is accepted. Turns off when reset measured value input is
MSR_RESET_ack
turned off.

Turns on when reset measured value (all recipes) input is accepted. Turns off when reset measured
RESET_ALL_ack
value (all templates) input is turned off.

Tool Judge Value0 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0004:bit0).

Tool Judge Value1 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0004:bit1).
Tool judgment area
... ...

Tool Judge Value63 Returns the judgment value assigned to the bit allocation area (address 0011:bit7).

Error code area Error Code Contains error codes for causes of errors.

Indicates the measurement count.

When used with [Hold Mode] set to [ON], change measurement count (increase by 1)
Measurement count of the system variables allocated to the results output area is used as the result output
Total Count complete signal.
area
To allocate system variables to the results output area, click [Output Settings] > [Output
Results] > [Settings] under [Field Network] > [Byte Allocation Area] > [Display Options],
select [System Variables] and add [Measurement count] to [Output items].

Command Result Indicates the command execution results.

Command Data 1 Returns command execution results data 1.


Command output
Command Data 2 Returns command execution results data 2.
area
... ...

Command Data 6 Returns command execution results data 6.

Result Data 1 Returns measurement results data 1.

Results output area Result Data 2 Returns measurement results data 2.

... ...

5-53
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Example of the send-data settings for this controller (TM-X5000 Series to Beckoff C6920 Series)
Example when one TM-X5000 Series model is connected to a C6920 Series model and Parameter 128 bytes (Index 2017) is assigned to process data.
Setting
Index Sub index
condition
Error reset Cmd
0x08 Reserved 0x07 Reserved 0x06 Reserved 0x05 0x04 Result ack 0x03 Reserved 0x02 Reserved 0x01
request request
0x10 Reserved 0x0F Reserved 0x0E Reserved 0x0D Reserved 0x0C Reserved 0x0B Reserved 0x0A Reserved 0x09 TRG
2011
0x18 Reserved 0x17 Reserved 0x16 Reserved 0x15 Reserved 0x14 Reserved 0x13 TEST 0x12 EXT 0x11 RESET
RESET_ MSR_
0x20 Reserved 0x1F Reserved 0x1E 0x1D 0x1C ZERO_OFF 0x1B ZERO_ON 0x1A Reserved 0x19 TIMING
ALL RESET
0x08 Reserved 0x07 Reserved 0x06 Reserved 0x05 Reserved 0x04 Reserved 0x03 Reserved 0x02 Reserved 0x01 Reserved
Bit 0x10 Reserved 0x0F Reserved 0x0E Reserved 0x0D Reserved 0x0C Reserved 0x0B Reserved 0x0A Reserved 0x09 Reserved
area
0x18 Reserved 0x17 Reserved 0x16 Reserved 0x15 Reserved 0x14 Reserved 0x13 Reserved 0x12 Reserved 0x11 Reserved
0x20 Reserved 0x1F Reserved 0x1E Reserved 0x1D Reserved 0x1C Reserved 0x1B Reserved 0x1A Reserved 0x19 Reserved
2012
0x28 Reserved 0x27 Reserved 0x26 Reserved 0x25 Reserved 0x24 Reserved 0x23 Reserved 0x22 Reserved 0x21 Reserved
0x30 Reserved 0x2F Reserved 0x2E Reserved 0x2D Reserved 0x2C Reserved 0x2B Reserved 0x2A Reserved 0x29 Reserved
0x38 Reserved 0x37 Reserved 0x36 Reserved 0x35 Reserved 0x34 Reserved 0x33 Reserved 0x32 Reserved 0x31 Reserved
0x40 Reserved 0x3F Reserved 0x3E Reserved 0x3D Reserved 0x3C Reserved 0x3B Reserved 0x3A Reserved 0x39 Reserved
Recipe No. 2013 ExecCondNo
Execution
command 2014 Command number
No.

Parameter 0x01 Cmd Parameter1


128 bytes 2017
0x02 Cmd Parameter2
(Default
value) … … …

As ExecCondNo is only loaded by the controller when there are changes, the recipe number can also be overwritten by a command.

z Name and behavior of output signals


Allocation area Name Remarks
Cmd request Requests command execution when rising from OFF to ON.
Result ack Notifies of data acquisition when rising from OFF to ON.
Error reset request Clears errors when rising from OFF to ON.
TRG Starts capture (measurement) (leading edge synchronization). The input is accepted when READY is ON.
Used to reset operation.
• Result OR output is 0.
• The measurement count returns to 0.
RESET • All of archived image data are deleted.
• All of the data in the output buffer are reset.
• A file in the measurement result output destination is newly created. A folder in the image output destination is newly
created.
Bit Used to suspend the occurrence of internal triggers and the acceptance of external triggers. When the input turns on,
area EXT
READY is forcibly turned off to stop the acceptance of all triggers (level synchronization).
Used to suspend the status output for trial runs.
• When this signal is input, the result data that have not been output will be deleted.
TEST • Result OR output is reset during input.
• As soon as input turns off, the measurement processing result obtained immediately after that will start being output
again.
TIMING Requests input timing when rising from OFF to ON.
ZERO_ON Requests auto zero on input when rising from OFF to ON.
ZERO_OFF Requests auto zero off input when rising from OFF to ON.
MSR_RESET Requests reset measured value processing input when rising from OFF to ON.
RESET_ALL Requests reset measured value processing for all recipes when rising from off to on.
Recipe
ExecCondNo Writes recipe numbers (1 to 8). The recipe numbers are loaded by the controller when values in this area change.
No. area
Command number Writes a command number.
Cmd Parameter1 Writes command parameter 1.
Command input area Cmd Parameter2 Writes command parameter 2.
Cmd Parameter3 Writes command parameter 3.
… …

5-54
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Changing EtherCAT Settings


The settings for controlling data input and output via EtherCAT can be changed on the [Field Network] screen under [Communications & I/O] in [Global].
• Controller Ethernet settings, such as the IP address and subnet mask, are changed in “Network” (Page 4-2).
• If the EtherCAT settings were changed, it is necessary to restart the controller in order to apply the settings.

1 Select [Global] → [Communications & I/O] → [Field


Network].
z Other Settings
• Enable Handshake
After checking that the PLC received the measurement data output, you
can select whether to write the result of the next data.
When the “Enable Handshake” check box is selected, the controller
turns “ON” “Result ready flag” after the measurement result is output.
Upon reception of the ready flag, the PLC reads the output data and
turns “ON” “Result ack flag”.
The Controller then turns “OFF” its “Result ready flag” after recognizing
the PLC’s ack flag. The PLC turns “OFF” “Result ack flag” to request the
2 Select [EtherCAT-Unit]. controller to write the next measurement results.
• Communication First (Only FreeRUN Mode)
Changes the internal data update frequency when in FreeRUN mode.
When measuring objects with a frequency of 4 ms or less (when the
capture interval is short, such as when the capture range in the head
settings is narrow), select this option.
3 Change the settings as required. • OFF (default) : Internal data will be updated at a frequency of 4 ms.
• ON : Internal data will be updated at a frequency of 1 ms.

z Cyclic Communication Status


Displays the EtherCAT communication status as [Connected] or [Not
Connected].

z Create ESI File


The ESI file including the information for the EtherCAT function of the
controller is output. A file is named based on the following naming
conventions:
• Keyence_TM-X5k_CB-NEC20E.xml
• The save destination is “SD2:\tm-x\ESI\”.
(For the TM-X Navigator, open the [Browse Files] dialog
box and specify the save destination.)
• Because the ESI file does not contain the information that
was set or changed in the controller [Global], the created
ESI file will always contain the same information.
z Data setting
• Data Configurations
Click [Configuration] to show the overview of the data allocations in 4 Click [OK].
EtherCAT cyclic communication. For a command returning a text string,
the response data may be large. Clicking the [View List] button shows
the detailed allocation statuses of the receive-data and send-data.

• Decimal Point
Selects the data representation type of the result data output.
• Fixed-Point (default)
Numbers displayed on each tool are handled as signed 32-bit integer
data.
(Example)
If decimal points are set to three digits and the measured value is
123.450 mm, it is handled as 123450 integer data.
• Floating-Point
The data is handled as 32-bit single-precision floating decimal point
data.

5-55
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Outputting Measurement Data Using EtherCAT Cyclic Communications (Data Output)


Change the output settings for data output using EtherCAT.

Data output flow (example of connection with a PLC EtherCAT unit)


Set the data and address for output in the output settings.
The controller outputs data via EtherCAT in the following manner.

When used with [Hold Mode] set to [ON], selecting [Update Every Timing] (Page 3-35) updates the measurement value by inputting
TIMING, ZERO, MSR_RESET, and RESET_ALL (the internal measurement value will not update).

• Data is only output via EtherCAT in run mode. Data is not output in setup mode.
• With EtherCAT, images and other binary data cannot be output.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

Measurement processing on the controller completes and


the results data is collected.

(2)
(1)
Checks that the Result ack flag is turned off.*1 Result ack flag is turned OFF.
(3)
(3)
Data is written to data memory that supports
Writes data to ResultData and Result OR flag,
ResultData and Result OR flag,
Tool Judge Value.
Tool Judge Value.

(4) (4)
After data writing is completed, When Result ready flag changes to ON, the completion
Result ready flag is turned ON. of data writing is checked and the data is referenced.

(5)
(5)
Detects that the Result ack flag has changed to ON and
Result ack flag is turned ON.
checks that data reading is completed.
(6)
(6)
Detects that Result ready flag
Result ready flag is turned OFF.
has changed to OFF.

*1 When the results output handshake is OFF, output data is overwritten and updated without checking whether the Result ack flag is OFF. To
take the rise of Result ready flag as a data reference synchronization signal, turn the Result ack flag ON at each output, which will turn the
Result ready flag OFF.

z Timing chart
Measurement
Measurement processing processing

ON (2)
Result ack flag The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Result ready flag The controller writes.
OFF A

ON
Result OR flag The controller writes.
OFF

ON
ResultData The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Tool Judge Value The controller writes.
OFF

(1) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1)

A : 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed).

The Result OR flag is updated in coordination with results output with EtherCAT as the output destination. When the Result OR flag is used, it is
necessary to configure the output setting so that one or more data item is output EtherCAT.

5-56
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Controlling the Controller with EtherCAT Cyclic Communication (Command Control)


The communication control commands can be executed at any time.

Flow of Command Process using EtherCAT (Example of Connection with the PLC’s EtherCAT Unit)
The controller performs command control via EtherCAT in the following manner.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

(1)
The command number to be executed is written to the
data memory that corresponds to Command Number
and the command parameter is written to the data
memory that corresponds to Command Parameter .
(3)
(2)
Detects Command request flag rise,
executes a command from Command Number, Checks that Command ready flag is turned ON
reads a command parameter from the address that and turns ON Command request flag.
corresponds to Command Parameter executes a
Detects that Command ready flag is turned OFF
command
and checks the start of the command.
and turns OFF Command ready flag.

(4)
After the command is executed, response data is
Writes response data to the data memory that
written to Command Data, and Command error flag
corresponds with Command Data*1.
and Command Result are set to the error state.
(5)
(5) Checks that command execution is completed when it is
Command complete flag is turned ON. detected that Command complete flag turns ON and
(7) refers to the response data and command execution result.

Checks that Command request flag is OFF, (6)


Command complete flag and
Command request flag is turned OFF.
Command error flag are turned OFF, and
Command ready flag is turned ON.

In the case of a command for which there is no response data, data is not output in response to the Command Data.
When an error occurs, the command execution results are written to Command Result. (0: Success, <Error code>: Failure).
The error cords conform to “Error Messages” (Page A-2).

z Timing chart
Command execution status Run command

ON
Command Number The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command Parameter The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command ready flag A The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command request flag A A The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Command Data The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command error flag The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Command Result The controller writes.
OFF

ON
The controller writes.
Command complete flag A
OFF

(1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

A : 0 ms or more (depends on the link scan speed).

5-57
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Controlling the Controller with EtherCAT Cyclic Communication (Change Recipe Number)
The recipe number can be changed at any time.

Workflow to change the recipe number


The controller changes the value of the recipe number using EtherCAT as shown below.
The changed value is applied at the next measurement.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

Refers to the data memory value that corresponds Writes the recipe number to the data memory that
to ExecCondNo and changes the recipe number corresponds to ExecCondNo

5-58
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Overview of Control/Data Output Using EtherCAT

Troubleshooting

When correct operation does not occur


„ To check whether or not the EtherCAT connection is correct
From [Global] for the controller, select [Communications & I/O] - [Field Network], and then check [Cyclic Communication Status:]. If [Not Connected] is
displayed here, communication has failed. Check the cable connection and communications settings on the PLC again.

„ Result OR flag is not output.


The Result OR flag is updated in coordination with results output with EtherCAT as the output destination. When the “Result OR flag” is used, it is necessary to
configure the output setting so that one or more data item is output via EtherCAT.

„ Result ready flag remains ON and does not change.


There is the possibility that “Result ack flag” control is not being performed correctly. The “Result ready flag” turns OFF when the “Result ack flag” rise is
recognized in sending (this controller receiving). This is the same regardless of whether “Enable Handshake” is selected or cleared.

„ Data cannot be acquired correctly when reading data based on the change in the rise of STO output from an
external terminal.
STO is the data strobe signal for terminal output. Therefore it cannot be used as the strobe signal for any other data output.
Refer to the “Result ready flag” for the timing as to when to read data by EtherCAT.

Error messages
Error cause
Message Cause Corrective Action
No.

• Check that the Ethernet cable is connected correctly.


• Check whether the controller and master were restarted after
EtherCAT Communication was interrupted. (When updating the communication settings.
communication has recovery is possible, recovery occurs • Review the requested packet interval and timeout settings on 13801
failed. automatically.) the PLC.
• With the factory default, ERROR output is not set. Set it on the
[System] screen (Page 4-6).

Change the update time on the PLC so the data is output via
EtherCAT output failed The controller output buffer for outputting EtherCAT at a faster rate than it builds up. Or, extend the time
13802
due to a full buffer. via EtherCAT is full. between triggers. Note: Results data are not written when the
buffer is full.

The delay of the


Change the update time on the PLC so the data from the tool is
handshake causes When the EtherCAT handshake is on, a
output via EtherCAT at a faster rate than it builds up. Or, extend
skipping of the EtherCAT delayed handshake caused results output 13803
the time between triggers. Note: Results data are not written when
communication result via EtherCAT to be skipped.
the buffer is full.
output.

• Make sure the EtherCAT unit is attached correctly.


The EtherCAT unit is not recognized
EtherCAT unit is not • Make sure the EtherCAT unit is not damaged.
and the controller cannot use EtherCAT 13804
recognized. • Do not disconnect the EtherCAT unit while the controller and
communication.
module are powered on.

5-59
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link

Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link


Using the PLC-Link with the Ethernet interface enables the following operations:
• Output data via PLC-Link: Enables the controller measurement data to be output directly to the data register (D) within the PLC.
• Controlling the Controller via PLC-Link: Enables the controller to be controlled by reading the command in the PLC data register (D).
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, and PLC-Link cannot be used at the same time.

Models that Support the PLC Link Connection


The PLCs of which this unit supports for the PLC link connection is as follows:

„ PLC produced by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation


Series name Target system Link unit PLC type

Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q02UCPU, Q03UDECPU*,


Q04UDEHCPU*, Q06UDEHCPU*, Q10UDEHCPU*, Q13UDEHCPU*, QJ71E71
MELSEC-Q MELSEC Q/L Series
Q20UDEHCPU*, Q26UDEHCPU*, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, QJ71E71-100
Q03UDVCPU*, Q04UDVCPU*, Q06UDVCPU*, Q13UDVCPU*, Q26UDVCPU*

MELSEC-L L02CPU*, L26CPU-BT* None ** MELSEC Q/L Series

MELSEC iQ-R R04CPU*, R04ENCPU* RJ71EN71 MELSEC Q/L Series

MELSEC iQ-F FX5U*/FX5UC* None ** MELSEC Q/L Series

* Also compatible with the built-in Ethernet interface on the system.


** Does not support the connection via the link unit.

5-60
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link

Preparing the PLC

1. Wiring overview 2. Wire connection at PLC link and settings on


The PLC is wired to the controller in the following way. the PLC side (Ethernet)
PLC Controller
„ Connecting with MELSEC (link unit)
PLC z Q/L series
(Internal CPU port Set it by the network parameter of GX-Developer or GX Works 2.
or • MELSECNET/Ethernet
Link unit) Ethernet • Network type: Select [Ethernet].
• Mode: Select [Online].
Terminal block (PLC • Operation settings
I/O unit
terminal) • Communication Data Code Setting: Select [Binary code
communication].
When the controller is not receiving commands from the PLC • Initial timing setting: Select [Always OPEN].
or when it is polling, the PLC does not need to be connected • IP address setting: Set the IP address specified for the destination
to the terminal block (PLC terminal). address in this unit’s PLC-Link.
• Send frame setting: Select [Ethernet (V2.0)].
• Authorize writing during RUN: Select [Allow].
• Open settings: Add the following settings:
• Protocol: Select [UDP].
• Local node port number: Sets the port number with the controller’s
PLC-Link settings as the destination port.
• Communication destination port number: Sets the port number with
the controller’s PLC-Link settings as the destination port.

z iQ-R series
Set it by the unit parameter of GX Works 3.
From the unit list of [Basic Settings] > [Setting Other Party Connection
Environment] > [Detailed Settings], add [UDP Connecting Device] to the
Ethernet configuration, and perform settings as follows:
• Correspondence method: Select either [Fixed buffer (with procedure)] or
[Random access buffer].
• Sequencer (Port Number)/ Sensor/Device (Port Number): Set the PLC
port number for both (setting range: 1025 - 4999, 5010 - 65534).
• Sensor/Device (IP Address): Specify the IP address for this unit.
• Availability Check: Select [Do not check availability].
• Authorize writing during RUN: Select [Allow].

„ Connecting to a Mitsubishi MELSEC PLC with built-


in Ethernet port
Do not set more than one controller to the same port
number. When connecting multiple controllers via a
hub, set each controller with a different communication
port number, and set multiple local port numbers that
correspond to them.

z Q/L series
Change settings using the PC parameters in GX Developer or GX Works 2.
• Built-in Ethernet port settings
• IP Address: Set the IP address specified for the destination address in
the controller’s PLC-Link.
• Communication Data Code Setting: Select [Binary code
communication].
• Authorize writing during RUN: Select this check box.
• Open settings:add the following settings:
• Protocol: Select [UDP].
• Open method: Select [MC protocol].
• Local node port number: Specify a hexadecimal value within the
range 0401 to 1387, and 1392 to FFFE. Numbers from 1388 to 1391
(5000 to 5009 in decimal) are reserved.
Specify the [Port] setting in the controller with the decimal notation of
the hexadecimal value specified here. (For example, if the local node
port number is 1387, specify 4999 in the controller.)

z iQ-R/iQ-F series
Set it by the unit parameter of GX Works 3.
• Self node settings
• IP Address: Set the IP address specified for the destination address in
the controller’s PLC-Link.
• Communication Data Code Setting: Select [Binary].
• Authorize/prohibit writing during RUN setting: Select [Authorize all
(SLMP)] (for iQ-R only).
• Destination Device Connection Configuration Settings: From the [Basic
Settings] > [Destination Device Connection Configuration Settings]
> [Details] unit list, add [SLMP Connection Device] to the Ethernet
configuration and configure the following settings:
• Protocol: Set [UDP].
• Sequencer (Port Number)/Sensor/Device (Port Number): Set the PLC
port number for both (setting range: 1025 - 4999, 5010 - 65534).
• Sensor/Device (IP Address): Specify the IP address for this unit.

5-61
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link

Changing the PLC-Link Settings


The settings for controlling data input and output via the PLC link can be changed on the [Field Network] screen under [Communications & I/O] in [Global].
• Controller Ethernet settings, such as the IP address and subnet mask, are changed in “Network” (Page 4-2).
• If the PLC-Link settings were changed, it is necessary to restart the controller in order to apply the settings.

1 Select [Global] → [Communications & I/O] → [Field


Network].
z Command Control
• Command Execute Event
Choose the method used for executing commands sent via PLC-Link.
• PLC Terminal
A command is executed at a rising edge of the PLC terminal (a
terminal to which the PLC command readout request signal is
assigned).
• Polling (default)
Monitors (polls) the value of data memory specified to [Command
Execute Address (bit)]. The command is executed when the value
2 Select [PLC Link]. changes from 0 to 1.

Depending on the communication status, polling


may result in slower command execution when
compared to the PLC terminal method.

3
• Command Execute Address (bit)
Change the settings as required. This option is used when [Command Execute Event] is set to [Polling]
(Default: 00002). The used data memory is one word. The command
is executed when the value of this address data memory changes
from 0 to 1.
• Command Complete Address (bit)
Specifies the address of the data memory to acknowledge the
completion of writing to [Command Result Address] after completion
of an instruction execution by the controller (default: 00003). The used
data memory is one word.
• Command Address
Specifies the leading address of the data memory storing the command
code and parameter which are issued to the controller (default: 00100).
The command code and parameter are specified by 2
words each.
• Command Result Address
Specifies the initial address of the data memory storing the results
of commands which are executed by the controller (default: 00200).
If command execution fails, an error code is stored. The used data
memory is two words.

z Result Output Settings


• Measurement Result Output Address
Specifies the initial address of the data memory storing the measured
results (Default: 00500). The data memory to be used is two words for
each item.
• Acknowledge Result Output Completion
z PLC Type When enabled, 1 is written to the data memory specified by [Result
Ready Address (bit)] when measured result output completes (default:
Select the PLC model to connect to.
Enabled). Disabling this setting shortens the time to write 1 to [Result
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation MELSEC Q series, L series, Ready Address (bit)], however, be careful of data reception timing.
iQ-R series, and iQ-F series PLCs are supported. • Result Ready Address (bit)
Set when enabling acknowledge result output completion.
z Communication Settings Specifies the data memory address to notify PLC of the writing
• IP Address completion of the measured result data (default: 00000) on the
Enter the IP address for the unit that the controller is communicating controller. The used data memory is one word. When the result data
with. output for one time of measurement is normally completed, the controller
(default: 192.168.000.020) writes 1.
Make sure that the specified IP address is unique and different from the • Result Ack Address (bit)
IP addresses for other devices. Set when enabling acknowledge result output completion.
• Controller IP Address Acknowledges that PLC has confirmed the measured result data stored
Shows the IP address of the controller. in the data memory that is specified by the result ack address, and
• Port specifies the data memory address used at a write request of the next
Enter the port number to be used for the PLC-Link. measurement result data to the controller (default: 00001). The used
• Default setting: 6000 (MELSEC Q/L) data memory is one word. PLC writes 1 to the result ack address (bit)
When connecting to the built-in Ethernet port on the main MELSEC Q/L, and the controller writes back the result ready address (bit) to 0. For the
set the communication port on the controller to between 1025 and 4999 next write request to the controller, 0 is written.
or between 5010 and 65535. • Enable Handshake
• Resend Time (ms) After checking that the PLC received the measurement data output,
Sets the retry intervals (ms) at a transmission error. (Default: 10000ms) select whether to write the result of the next data. (Default: Disabled)
If it is enabled, the controller will write 1 to the Result Ready Address
z Common Setting (bit) when output of the measurement result is complete. Upon reception
• Decimal Point
of this, the PLC checks the result output area and writes 1 to the Result
Selects the data representation type of the result data output.
Ack Address (bit). The controller detects this and writes 0 to the Result
• Fixed-Point (default)
Ready Address (bit). The PLC writes 0 to the Result Ready Address (bit)
Numbers displayed on each measurement tool are handled as signed
to request the controller to load next output data.
32-bit integer data (address m: lower 16 bits, address m+1: upper 16
bits).
(Example) If decimal points are set to three digits and the measured 4 Click [OK].
value is 123.450 mm, it is handled as 123450 integer
data.
• Floating-Point
Uses the measured result in the data memory as a single-precision
floating-point data (32 bits).

5-62
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link

Outputting the Measurement Data with PLC-Link

Data output procedure (Data Output Flow)


This unit outputs data by PLC link with the following procedure.
Set the output items and order for the field network settings in the [Output Settings] results output in advance.

Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

Measurement processing on the controller


completes and the results data is collected.
(2) (1)
Checks that the Result Ack Address (bit) value
Writes “0” to Result Ack Address (bit).
is “0” (level).
(3) (3)
Writes measurement data from Measurement Result Measurement data is written to Measurement Result
Output Address to the consecutive DM. Output Address.
(4) (4)
Checks that one measurement worth of measurement
After one measurement worth of data is written,
data has been written by rewriting the Result Ready
“1” is written to the Result Ready Address (bit)DM.
Address (bit) value to “1” (rise) and references the
(5) Measurement Result Output Address data.

Detects that the Result Ack Address (bit) DM value (5)


has changed to “1” (rise) and checks that data
Writes “1” to Result Ack Address (bit).
reading is completed.

(6) (6)
Detects that the Result Ready Address (bit) has
Writes “0” to the Result Ready Address (bit) DM.
changed to “0” (fall).

For processing with the [Acknowledge result output completion] and [Enable Handshake] options enabled, all result data can be retrieved on the
PLC side.
If not all result data is necessary and it is only needed to retrieve the latest result data on the PLC side, the following settings can reduce the time
required to output the results.
If [Enable Handshake] is disabled, the Result Ack Address (bit) value confirmation can be restricted in steps 2 and 5 (in this case, the controller
outputs the result data regardless of whether data has been completely read or not on the PLC side). Also, if [Acknowledge result output
completion] is disabled, writing to Result Ready Address (bit) can be restricted in steps 4 and 6 (in this case, it cannot be determined on the PLC
side whether the result data has been updated).

z Timing chart
Measurement
Measurement processing processing

ON (2)
Result Ack Address (bit) The PLC writes.
OFF

ON
Result Ready Address (bit) The controller writes.
OFF

ON
Measurement Result Output
The controller writes.
Address OFF

(1) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1)

5-63
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link

Controlling the Controller via PLC-Link


Set the controller to perform constant monitoring (polling) on the bit changes in the command execute address (bit) or turn the PLC terminal on or off to read
and execute a command.
To execute a command with the PLC terminal method, the PLC terminal must be wired.

Command execution procedure (Command Processing Flow)


Controller (TM-X5000 Series) PLC

(1)
Writes the Command No. and Parameter
(2) to the command address.

Detects that the Command Execute Address (bit) (2)


value changed to “1” (rise) Writes “1” to Command Always Execute Address (bit)
and reads Command No. and Parameter from the when the command is to be executed.
command address DM. Note: In the case of the PLC terminal method,
Note: In the case of the PLC terminal method, the controller’s PLC terminal is turned ON.
the PLC terminal rise is detected.

(3)
(4)
After command execution is completed, response
data for the command execution*1 is written from The response data*1 is written to Command Result
Command Result Address to the consecutive DM. Address.

(5) (5)
Writes response data for the command execution
and writes “1” to Checks that command execution has completed
the Command Complete Address (bit) DM value. by rewriting the Command Complete Address (bit)
value to “1” (rise) and checks the response data.

(6)
(7)
Returns the Command Execute Address (bit) value
Detects that the Command Execute Address (bit) to “0”.
Note: In the case of the PLC terminal method,
value changed to “0” (fall) and returns the Command
the controller’s PLC terminal is turned OFF.
Complete Address (bit) value to “0”.
Note: In the case of falling edge terminal method, (7)
the PLC terminal fall is detected. Checks that the Command Complete Address (bit)
has changed to “0” (fall) and moves to the next
command.

*1 The returned data varies depending on the commands. For details, refer to “List of Communication Commands for Control” (Page 5-2) and confirm
the received data of each command.

z Timing chart
(1)
ON
Command No./Parameter The PLC writes.
OFF

Command execution status Run command


ON
Command Execute Address (bit) or (2) (6) The PLC writes.
PLC terminal OFF
(3)
ON
Command Result Address The controller writes.
OFF
(5) (7)
ON
Command Complete Address (bit) The controller writes.
OFF

5-64
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Control/Data Output via the PLC-Link

Troubleshooting

When correct operation does not occur


„ When a trigger command is issued by PLC-Link, the capture timing is later compared with trigger signal input
from the terminal block.
When a command is executed from PLC-Link, more time is required before execution starts and variation is larger compared with when the terminal block is
used (in particular with polling control).
If the timing variation is a problem when capturing an object moving at a high speed, input the trigger from the terminal block.

„ Data cannot be acquired correctly when reading data based on the change in the rise of STO output from an
external terminal.
STO is the data strobe signal for the terminal output unit. Therefore, it cannot be used as the strobe signal for any other data output.
Refer to the result ready address for the timing as to when to read data by PLC-Link.

„ PLC-Link is established, however, data cannot be written to the connected PLC.


There is a limit to the range of data memory that can be written to. Check the range that can be written to at the connected PLC.

Error messages
Error cause
Message Cause Corrective Action
No.

• Check the connection with the PLC and the settings of the PLC.
• If PLC-Link is not used, change the field network settings to
An error occurred in the connection with
Failed to establish a link [Disable].
the PLC when the [PLC-Link] function was 13301
with the PLC. • If the error message displayed after a trigger input, check that
enabled.
the data memory destination specified is in the range that meets
the PLC format.

Reduce the amount of data to be output so the data is output via


Unable to output to the The controller output buffer for outputting
PLC-Link at a faster rate than it builds up. Or, extend the time
PLC-Link due to a full via PLC-Link is full. (When handshake is 13302
between triggers. Note: Results data are not written when the
output buffer. off)
buffer is full.

The delay of the


Reduce the amount of data to be output so the data is output
handshake control The controller output buffer for outputting
via PLC-Link at a faster rate than it builds up. Or, extend the
causes skipping of the via PLC-Link is full. (When handshake is 13303
time between triggers. Note: When the output buffer is full,
PLC communication on)
measurement waits until the buffer is emptied.
result output.

5-65
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal


Functions available with the I/O terminal Terminal Block Interface (OUT)
on the controller
The controller has the following ports that act as an I/O terminal: Standard specifications
• Parallel I/O interface: Uses a specialized parallel connection cable (3 m) Terminal block (OUT) specifications for the TM-X5000 Series are as
OP-51657 (sold separately). follows.
• Terminal block interface (OUT/IN): Detachable terminal block included
with the controller. Tightening above the specified torque may cause
damage to the terminal block.
Main functions available with the I/O terminal
z OUTPUT connector
„ Input • Suitable wiring
AWG 16 to 28
z Capture • Terminal block screw
1
• Trigger input: Allows a camera to capture images at the specified timing.
torque
z Control 0.25 N·m or less
• Input timing: Sets the measured value when hold mode is in use.
• Command input: Instructs a change of program, etc.
• Control input: Pauses data output or image capture.

„ Output 9

z Results output
• Judgment output: Outputs upper/lower limit judgment results on the
processed images.
Terminal Layout
z Control Terminal
Terminal block
Circuit
• Control output: Outputs signals for system errors or synchronization with No. display at time Signal Signal Description *2
name diagram
external devices. of shipment

1 OUT22 OUT22 RUN *1 Run mode output *1 A

*1 *1
2 OUT23 OUT23 BUSY In-process output A
3 F_OUT2 F_OUT2 OR Total status output A
Synchronous signal for
4 F_OUT3 F_OUT3 STO*1 A
output *1
Common for terminal
5 COMOUT1 COM OUT - -
block outputs
Trigger input permission
6 F_OUT0 F_OUT0 READY *1 A
output *1
*1 *1
7 F_OUT1 F_OUT1 ERROR Error output A

8 N.C. NC - - -

Common for F_OUT


9 COMOUT_F COM F - -
terminal
*1 It is the default assigned value on the terminal where the signal assignment can be
changed. These assignments may vary if the Global settings have been changed.
*2 For details on the signal description, refer to “I/O Terminal Function List” (Page
5-69)

• Power source 0V and COMOUT1 and COMOUT_F are all


isolated.
• COMOUT1 is a common terminal exclusively used for
terminal outputs No.1 and No.2.
• COMOUT_F is a common terminal exclusively used for
terminal outputs No.3 to No.4 and No.6 to No.7.

„ Output circuit diagram


z Circuit A (common for all output terminals)
• Max. applied voltage : 30 V
• Max. sink current : 50 mA
• Leakage current : 0.1 mA or less
• Residual voltage:1.4 V or less (50 mA), 1.0 V or less (20 mA)

Poly Switch
OUT

COMOUT*

Either the NPN input or the PNP input can be connected


because the controller uses the photo MOSFET for
output elements.

5-66
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

„ Connection example
Terminal Block Interface (IN)
z When connecting the controller’s output with a positive
common
• When connecting an output from the controller to a PLC with a Standard specifications
positive common
Terminal block (IN) specifications for the TM-X5000 Series are as follows.
IN

Poly Switch
Tightening above the specified torque may cause
damage to the terminal block.
OUT

z INPUT connector
COMOUT* • Suitable wiring
AWG 16 to 28
COM(+)
1
• Terminal block screw
PLC input circuit positive Output circuit torque
common 0.25 N·m or less
• When connecting an output from the controller to a relay
6

Poly Switch
Load
OUT

COMOUT* Terminal Layout


Terminal
Terminal block display Circuit
No. Signal Signal Description *2
Relay Output circuit name at time of diagram
shipment

z When connecting the controller’s output with a negative 1 COMIN1


COM
-
Common for terminal
-
common IN1 block inputs
• When connecting an output from the controller to a PLC with a 2 IN15 IN15 ZERO_ON *1
Auto zero ON input *1
C
negative common 3 F_IN0 F_IN0 TRG *1 Trigger input *1 B
IN
*1 Trigger acceptance
Poly Switch 4 F_IN1 F_IN1 EXT B
cancel input *1
OUT *1 *1
5 F_IN2 F_IN2 TIMING Timing input B

*1 Measured value reset


6 F_IN3 F_IN3 MSR_RESET B
process *1
COMOUT*
COM(-) *1 It is the default assigned value on the terminal where the signal assignment can be
changed. These assignments may vary if the Global settings have been changed.
*2 For details on the signal description, refer to “I/O Terminal Function List” (Page
PLC input circuit negative Output circuit 5-69)
common
• Power source 0V and COMIN1 are all isolated.
• When connecting an output from the controller to a relay • COMIN1 is the common terminal for input No.2 to No.6.

Load
OUT
Poly Switch
„ Input circuit diagram
z Circuit B (For F_IN0 to 3 only, EV compatible)
• Max. applied voltage : 26.4 V
COMOUT* • ON voltage : 19 V or greater 7.5kΩ
IN
• ON current : 3mA or greater
• OFF voltage : 5 V or less 910Ω
Relay Output circuit • OFF current : 1 mA or less
COMIN*

* The commons which are connected differ according


to the OUT terminals. The common terminal for OUT
connectors No.1 and No.2 is COMOUT1, and the common
terminal for OUT connectors No.3 to No.4 and No.6 to
z Circuit C (other inputs)
• Max. applied voltage : 26.4 V
No.7 is COMOUT_F, and the common terminal for parallel
• ON voltage : 19 V or greater 15kΩ
I/O connectors No.18 to No.39 is COMOUT2. IN
• ON current : 2mA or greater
• OFF voltage : 3 V or less 2.7kΩ
• OFF current : 0.3 mA or less
COMIN*

5-67
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

„ Connection example
Parallel I/O Interface
z When connecting an NPN PLC output to the system input
OUT IN
Standard specifications
Parallel I/O Interface specifications for the TM-X5000 Series are as
follows.
COM(-) COMIN*

1 21
PLC (NPN outputs) Input circuit

z When connecting a PNP output to the controller input


IN
20 40

COM(+)
COMIN*
Terminal Layout
Input circuit
Terminal Circuit Cable
OUT No. Signal Signal Description
name diagram color

PLC (PNP outputs) Connector input common


1 COMIN2 - - Brown
terminal
2 IN0 CMD_PARAM0 Command parameter bit 0 C Red
3 IN1 CMD_PARAM1 Command parameter bit 1 C Orange
4 IN2 CMD_PARAM2 Command parameter bit 2 C Yellow
5 IN3 CMD_PARAM3 Command Parameter bit 3 C Green
6 IN4 CMD_PARAM4 Command parameter bit 4 C Blue
7 IN5 CMD_PARAM5 Command parameter bit 5 C Purple
8 IN6 CMD_PARAM6 Command parameter bit 6 C Gray
9 IN7 CMD_PARAM7 Command parameter bit 7 C White
10 IN8 CMD_CODE0 Command input bit 0 C Black
11 IN9 CMD_CODE1 Command input bit 1 C Brown
12 IN10 CMD_CODE2 Command input bit 2 C Red
13 IN11 CMD_CODE3 Command input bit 3 C Orange
14 IN12 CST Command confirmation input C Yellow
15 IN13 RESET *1 Reset input *1 C Green
16 IN14 ZERO_OFF *1 Auto zero OFF input *1 C Blue
Common for connector output
17 COMOUT2 - - Purple
terminal
Verification of successfully
18 OUT0 ACK A Gray
executed command input
Verification of unsuccessfully
19 OUT1 NACK A White
executed command input
20 OUT2 CMD_READY Command input permission A Black
21 OUT3 MSR_VALID *1 Measured value valid output*1 A Brown
22 OUT4 - *1 (Unallocated) *1 A Red
*1
23 OUT5 - (Unallocated) *1 A Orange
24 OUT6 OUT_DATA0 Data output bit 0 A Yellow
25 OUT7 OUT_DATA1 Data output bit 1 A Green
26 OUT8 OUT_DATA2 Data output bit 2 A Blue
27 OUT9 OUT_DATA3 Data output bit 3 A Purple
28 OUT10 OUT_DATA4 Data output bit 4 A Gray
29 OUT11 OUT_DATA5 Data output bit 5 A White
30 OUT12 OUT_DATA6 Data output bit 6 A Black
31 OUT13 OUT_DATA7 Data output bit 7 A Brown
32 OUT14 OUT_DATA8 Data output bit 8 A Red
33 OUT15 OUT_DATA9 Data output bit 9 A Orange
34 OUT16 OUT_DATA10 Data output bit 10 A Yellow
35 OUT17 OUT_DATA11 Data output bit 11 A Green
36 OUT18 OUT_DATA12 Data output bit 12 A Blue
37 OUT19 OUT_DATA13 Data output bit 13 A Purple
38 OUT20 OUT_DATA14 Data output bit 14 A Gray
39 OUT21 OUT_DATA15 Data output bit 15 A White
Common for connector output
40 COMOUT2 - - Black
terminal

*1 It is the default assigned value on the terminal where the signal assignment
can be changed. These assignments may vary if the Global settings have
been changed.

5-68
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

I/O Terminal Function List


„ Input Terminals
Category Signal Signal Description Overview
RESET Reset Used to reset operation.
Used to suspend the status output for trial run or any other reasons.
When this signal is input, the result data that have not been output will be deleted.
System While this signal is on, OR output, STO output, and data output of OUT_DATA0 to 15 is forcibly set to
TEST Trial run input normal state (level synchronization).
The data output from the communication port is also canceled and stopped during the input.
As soon as input turns off, the measurement processing result obtained immediately after that will start
being output again.
Used to suspend the occurrence of internal triggers and the acceptance of external triggers.
Capture EXT Disable trigger input When the input turns on, READY terminal is forced to turn off to stop the acceptance of all triggers (level
control synchronization).
TRG Trigger input Inputs a trigger. The input is accepted when READY is ON.
CMD_PARAM0 Command parameter input bit 0 (LSB)
CMD_PARAM1 Command parameter input bit 1
CMD_PARAM2 Command parameter input bit 2
CMD_PARAM3 Command parameter input bit 3
Used to input parameters necessary for commands from the parallel I/O interface in binary.
CMD_PARAM4 Command parameter input bit 4
CMD_PARAM5 Command parameter input bit 5
CMD_PARAM6 Command parameter input bit 6
CMD_PARAM7 Command parameter input bit 7 (MSB)
CMD_CODE0 Command input bit 0 (LSB)
CMD_CODE1 Command input bit 1
Used to input command codes from the parallel I/O interface in binary.
CMD_CODE2 Command input bit 2
Command CMD_CODE3 Command input bit 3 (MSB)
Executes commands and parameters from the parallel I/O interface. (leading edge synchronization)
When an acceptance check of CST is performed, check that CMD_READY has fallen after the CST
CST Command confirmation input input.
When confirmation of command execution completion is performed, check that ACK (success) or
NACK(failure) has risen after the CST input.
Used to execute command control via the PLC terminal using the PLC-Link (leading edge
synchronization).
PLC PLC command readout request As the request acceptance may be delayed depending on other process conditions, hold the ON
state for input until the command complete address (bit) on the PLC unit changes to 1 (the command
execution is confirmed).
TIMING Timing input This command inputs the timing.
ZERO_ON Auto zero ON input This command inputs auto zero ON.
Measurement ZERO_OFF Auto zero OFF input This command inputs auto zero OFF.
control
MSR_RESET Measurement reset input This command is used for measurement reset processing.
Measurement reset input for all
RESET_ALL All recipes are processed with measurement reset.
templates

„ Output terminal
Category Signal Signal Description Overview
This signal is output while any of system errors occur with the dialog displayed on the screen.
ERROR Error output On the [System] screen for [Global] (Page 4-6), error output for SD card-related errors and so on can
System be specified.
RUN Run mode output Output when the controller is in Run mode.
READY Trigger input enabled output Output when trigger input is acceptable.
For
measurement Output during measurement processing.
control BUSY BUSY signal output While BUSY is on, some delays may occur with start of the execution for the next measurement
processing.
OUT_DATA0 Data output bit 0 (LSB)
OUT_DATA1 Data output bit 1
OUT_DATA2 Data output bit 2
OUT_DATA3 Data output bit 3
OUT_DATA4 Data output bit 4
OUT_DATA5 Data output bit 5
OUT_DATA6 Data output bit 6
OUT_DATA7 Data output bit 7
Tool judgment or logic judgment for measurement results is output according to the output settings.
OUT_DATA8 Data output bit 8
Judgment OUT_DATA9 Data output bit 9
result OUT_DATA10 Data output bit 10
OUT_DATA11 Data output bit 11
OUT_DATA12 Data output bit 12
OUT_DATA13 Data output bit 13
OUT_DATA14 Data output bit 14
OUT_DATA15 Data output bit 15 (MSB)
OR Total status output Used to output the OR result for the judged value of tool specified in the output settings.
Used to read the data of the total status output and OUT_DATA0 to OUT_DATA15, based on leading
STO Output timing indicator
edge synchronization.
Execution success confirmation output
ACK The signal is output when the commands from the parallel I/O interface successfully finish.
for command inputs
Execution failure confirmation output
Command NACK The signal is output when the commands from the parallel I/O interface unsuccessfully finish.
for command inputs
The signal is output when execution of commands from the parallel I/O interface is acceptable.
CMD_READY Permission output for command input
When CST is input with CMD_READY turned off, CST is ignored.
Output when the internal measurement values for all tools set with the active recipe are no longer in
For
the judgment standby state.
measurement MSR_VALID Measured value valid output
Output turns off if measured values are finalized with TIMING or when internal measurement values
control
are cleared with MSR_RESET.

5-69
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

Using command inputs via I/O terminals

Command input timing


Command input via the I/O terminal is only available in Run mode.

„ Basic flow (an example of real-time command execution)


ON
CMD_CODE (3-0)
Command type
OFF
ON
CMD_PARAM (7-0)
Command parameter
OFF
ON (1)
CST
D A
OFF
ON
BUSY
OFF
ON
ACK (execution (2)
succeeded) B
OFF
ON
NACK (execution (2)
failed) (3)
OFF B
ON
(4)
CMD_READY A: 1 ms or longer
C C B: Common to the STO output time
OFF
ON
C: Within 1 ms
(5) D: 500 µs or longer
READY (Always ON)
OFF

(1) A command input is confirmed at the leading edge of CST.


(2) The result of the command execution (success or failure) can be checked by either ACK or NACK being turned on for STO output ON time.
(3) CMD_READY turns on when ACK or NACK turns off.
(4) When CST is input with CMD_READY turned off, CST is ignored. In this case, neither an ACK nor NACK response is given for CST.
(5) If a command is not based on real-time execution, READY turns off during execution of the command.

„ Timing of commands which are not based on real-time execution


z When no command request is received
ON
TRG
OFF
ON
READY
OFF

z When a command request is received


ON
TRG
OFF
ON
READY 1 µs or longer
OFF

ON
CST
OFF
ON
Loading time Measurement Command
ACK processing time execution time
OFF

Command execution
waiting time
• When a command request is received during processing, the command is executed as soon as measurement processing is completed.
• READY signal does not turn on until the command execution is completed. Therefore, a next trigger input is not accepted until READY signal turns on.

z When no image capture is performed


ON
READY 1 µs or longer
Within 500 µs
OFF
ON
CST
OFF

ON
Command execution time
ACK
OFF

5-70
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

I/O command inputs available on the controller


The I/O command inputs available on the controller series are shown below.
CMD_CODE CMD_PARAM
Value Command name Command detail (IN8 to IN11) (IN0 to IN7)
3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
The same function as the SS command
0 Save Program 0 0 0 0 None
(Page 5-5).
Specify parameter in upper 8 Used to change the existing Program to
1 0 0 0 1 0 to 255
bits above No. 256.
Change inspection program The same function as PW command
2 0 0 1 0 Program number
(SD Card 1) (Page 5-7) (fixed to SD1)
Change inspection program The same function as PW command
3 0 0 1 1 Program number
(SD Card 2) (Page 5-7) (fixed to SD2)
The same function as the EXW
7 Write recipe No. 0 1 1 1 1 to 8: Recipe No.
command (Page 5-8).
The same function as the CE command
8 Clear error 1 0 0 0 None
(Page 5-5).
IN0: Changes data output files when set to 1
IN1: Changes image output folders when set
The same function as the OW command
9 Change Output File/Folder 1 0 0 1 to 1
(Page 5-12).
IN2: Changes simple monitor image output
folders when set to 1
The same function as the TIM command
12 Timing 1 1 0 0 None
(Page 5-8).
The same function as the ZR command IN0: Requests auto zero OFF when set to 0
13 Auto zero 1 1 0 1
(Page 5-9). and requests auto zero ON when set to 1
The same function as the MRS command
14 Reset measured value 1 1 1 0 None
(Page 5-9).
Reset measured value The same function as the RSA command
15 1 1 1 1 None
(All templates) (Page 5-9).
1: ON (short), 0: OFF (open)
• Commands No. 4, 5, 6, 10, and 11 do not exist.
• To confirm a command, input the command to CMD_PARAM0 to 7, CMD_CODE0 to 3 and then turn the CST input on (recognition of the
leading edge).
• ACK output and NACK output ON time is of the same duration as STO output time.
• As the commands based on real-time execution are executed along with the measurement process, execution of that kind of command does not
affect the measurement processing. However, command execution time for this case will take longer than when the command alone is solely
executed.

z 0. Save program z 8. Clear error


Saves the setting. This command clears the error status.

Parameter Parameter
None None

z 1. Specify parameter in upper 8 bits z 9. Change output file/folder


Specifies the upper bits of a parameter used with the change program • When changing a data output file, a new result file is created using the
command. latest date and time.
• When changing an image output folder, a new image output folder is
The specified parameter is held until the next command
created using the latest date and time.
execution or shut down of the controller.
Parameter
Parameter CMD_PARAM1 to 0: Select target. (1: data output file, 2: image output
Specifies the upper 8 bits of the program number that references change folder, 3: both)
program.
z 12. Timing
z 2. Change programs (SD card 1) This command issues the request timing.
Changes the current program to the target program, specified in 16 bits,
on the SD card 1. Parameter
None
Parameter
Program No. 0 to 255 (to select 256 to 999, specify the upper bits 15 to 8 z 13: Auto zero
in the parameter of “1. Specify parameter in upper 8 bits”, and the lower This command issues an auto zero on or off request.
bits 7 to 0 in this parameter.) The auto zero value (the value that calibrates zero) is not
saved. Run the save (SS) command as necessary.
z 3. Change programs (SD card 2)
Changes the current program to the target program, specified in 16 bits,
on the SD card 2. Parameter
CMD_PARAM0: Requests auto zero OFF when set to 0 and requests auto
Parameter zero ON when set to 1
Program No. 0 to 255 (to select 256 to 999, specify the upper bits 15 to 8
in the parameter of “1. Specify parameter in upper 8 bits”, and the lower z 14. Reset measured value
bits 7 to 0 in this parameter.) Requests a measurement reset.

Parameter
z 7. Write recipe numbers None
This command changes to the specified recipe number.

Parameter z 15. Reset measured value (all templates)


CMD_PARAM3 to 0: Recipe No. (1 - 8) This command requests to reset the measured value for all recipes.

Parameter
None

5-71
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

I/O command control procedures


Use the following procedures to operate the controller via the I/O commands.

Example of changing to the program 15 on the SD card 1 using the I/O commands.
ON
CMD_CODE (3-0) (1)
Command type
OFF
ON
CMD_PARAM (7-0) (2)
Command parameter
OFF
ON
(3)
CST
OFF
ON
(4) (5)
CMD_READY
OFF
ON
Prog. No.
OFF
ON
(5)
ACK (NACK)
OFF

(1) Enter the command codes of the change program (SD card 1) command in CMD_CODE0 to 3.
CMD_CODE3: 0 (OFF)
CMD_CODE2: 0 (OFF)
CMD_CODE1: 1 (ON)
CMD_CODE0: 0 (OFF)
(2) Enter the codes of program 15 to which the setting is changed in CMD_PARAM7 to 0.
CMD_PARAM7: 0 (OFF)
CMD_PARAM6: 0 (OFF)
CMD_PARAM5: 0 (OFF)
CMD_PARAM4: 0 (OFF)
CMD_PARAM3: 1 (ON)
CMD_PARAM2: 1 (ON)
CMD_PARAM1: 1 (ON)
CMD_PARAM0: 1 (ON)
(3) Turn the input of CST on.
(4) CMD_READY turns off and program change starts.
(5) When the setting is changed to program 15, ACK turns on for a certain time, and then CMD_READY turns on after ACK falls.

ACK output and NACK output duration time is the same as the time set with STO (default: 10ms).

5-72
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

Outputting judgment values via I/O terminals

Output order Example of output


The data specified in the output settings is output from OUT_DATA0 to 15. If the output settings are as shown below in a mode other than hold mode,
The items and order for output can be specified in “Terminal” (Page the timing chart is as follows.
3-34) of [Output Settings].
• STO output is generated one time even when none of the
output settings is specified.
• When the controller is operating in [Setup] mode or TEST
terminal (Page 5-69) is ON, the judgment values are not
output.
• Only the judgment values are output from the I/O terminals
(measured values or other values cannot be output).

On the output device, read OUT_DATA0 to 15 in synchronization with the


leading edge of STO.
ON
TRG
OFF

ON
OUT_DATA
(1)
0 to 15
OFF

ON
STO
OFF
A A: Output rise time
B B: Output time

(1)

OUT6 [Outer diameter] judged value

OUT7 [Circle diameter] judged value

OUT8 [Logic1] judged value

OUT9 0

OUT10 0

OUT11 0

OUT12 0

OUT13 0

OUT14 0

OUT15 0

OUT16 0

OUT17 0

OUT18 0

OUT19 0

OUT20 0

OUT21 0

For details on how to set A and B in the diagram above, refer to “External
Terminal” (Page 4-4).
If the duration of output cycle via the I/O is longer than the trigger input
cycle, priority is given to measurement processing. Therefore, output delay
may be caused, which will lead to the data being omitted. To avoid this,
set the output cycle time (A + B time) shorter than the trigger input cycle
time.

5-73
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

Timing chart
This section describes at what timing the terminal operates with detailed examples.

Standard operation at startup


• To input a trigger after startup, check READY (READY is ON with trigger input enabled).
• To execute a command after startup, check CMD_READY (CMD_READY is ON with command acceptance enabled).

ON
Power supply
OFF A B A: 20 seconds or longer
ON B: 1 second or longer
BUSY C: 5 ms or longer
OFF D: 50 ms or longer
ON (1) E: 50 seconds or longer
F: 0.5 ms or longer
RUN
E C
OFF
ON
CMD_READY D F
OFF (2)
ON
(3)
READY
OFF
ON
ACK
OFF
ON
NACK
OFF
ON
OUT_DATA[15:0]
OFF
ON
ERROR
OFF
ON
STO
OFF
ON
OR
OFF
ON
MSR_VALID
OFF

(1) When the system enters [Run] mode, the RUN terminal turns on (when the [Startup mode] is [RUN MODE]).
(2) The CMD_READY terminal turns ON and then OFF after startup. After that when it turns ON, command inputs will be accepted.
(3) When READY is ON, trigger input is possible (when [Trigger mode] is [External]).

5-74
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

Standard operation at trigger input


„ Standard operation at external trigger input (image buffer OFF)
• Check that READY is ON and then input the trigger.
• A trigger input when READY is OFF is ignored.

ON
TRG A
OFF
ON
B
READY
OFF

Capture
Measurement processing

: As measurement processing has not completed (READY is OFF), the trigger cannot be accepted.
A: Minimum trigger input time 1 ms or more
B: Response delay to READY fall 1 ms or less

„ Standard operation at internal trigger input (image buffer OFF)


• The trigger is automatically input with the set trigger cycle.
• When internal processing is being performed at the time a trigger is input (when READY is OFF), the input trigger is ignored.

ON
TRG A
OFF
ON
B
READY
OFF

Capture
Measurement processing

: As measurement processing has not completed, the trigger cannot be accepted.


A: Trigger Cycle (1 to 999 ms)
B: Response delay to READY fall

Image Buffer
If [Image Buffer] is ON and the image buffer is empty, READY turns ON and the next trigger can be input even if measurement is being processed.

„ If the image buffer does not become full (external trigger, image buffer ON (once))
If “Trigger input interval > Measurement processing time,” the image buffer does not become full and a trigger can be input even during
measurement processing.

ON

TRG
OFF
ON
READY
OFF
ON

BUSY
OFF

Capture
Measurement processing

„ If the image buffer becomes full (external trigger, image buffer ON (once))
If “Trigger input interval < Measurement processing time,” the image buffer becomes full.

ON

TRG
OFF
ON
(1) (2) (3) (2)
READY
OFF
ON

BUSY
OFF

Capture Capture A Capture B Capture C


Measurement processing Measurement Processing A Measurement Processing B

(1) As the image buffer has empty space, READY turns ON and a trigger can be input.
(2) As the image buffer has no empty space, READY does not turn ON.
(3) As processing of Measure Process A finishes and the image buffer has empty space, READY turns ON and a trigger can be input.

5-75
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

Measurement control (Hold mode)


„ When Hold is OFF
When Hold mode is off, measurement is performed every time trigger input turns on and the measured value is displayed/output.
Even if TIMING input turns ON, nothing happens.
In the following case, OUT/OR output and MSR_VALID are both turned OFF:
• When the power is turned ON
• When the controller is reset (RS command)
• When changing Program numbers
• When measured value reset and auto zero are executed
MSR_VALID is turned OFF in the following case as well:
• When the recipe number is changed
Processing reset
ON
MSR_RESET
(ZERO_ON/OFF)
OFF
ON
TRG
OFF
ON
MSR_VALID
OFF
ON
OUT/OR OFF
OFF
ON
ON
STO
OFF

„ When Hold mode is ON (Peak hold/Bottom hold/Peak-to-peak hold/Average hold/Sample hold/Nearest hold)
The measurement period is from when TIMING input turns ON until the next TIMING input turns ON.
Once TIMING input turns ON, the measured value from the measurement period just before it is output.
In the following case, OUT/OR output and MSR_VALID are both turned OFF:
• When the power is turned ON
• When the controller is reset (RS command)
• When changing Program numbers
• When measured value reset and auto zero are executed
MSR_VALID is turned OFF in the following case as well:
• When the recipe number is changed

Internal measurement value


Peak hold measured value

Judgment standby

Measurement Processing Measurement Measurement


period 1 Measurement period 2 reset period 3 period 4
ON
TIMING
OFF
ON
MSR_RESET
(ZERO_ON/OFF)
OFF
ON
TRG
OFF
ON
MSR_VALID
OFF
ON
OUT/OR OFF
OFF
ON
STO
OFF

5-76
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

„ When Hold mode is ON (Other Tool Reference Hold)


The measurement period is from when TIMING input turns ON until the next TIMING input turns ON.
Once TIMING input turns ON, the measured value from the measurement period just before it is output.
In the following case, OUT/OR output and MSR_VALID are both turned OFF:
• When the power is turned ON
• When the controller is reset (RS command)
• When changing Program numbers
• When measured value reset and auto zero are executed
MSR_VALID is turned OFF in the following case as well:
• When the recipe number is changed

Internal measurement value


Peak hold measured value

Judgment standby

Internal measurement value


Other Tool Reference Hold measured value

Judgment standby

Measurement Processing Measurement Measurement


period 1 Measurement period 2 reset period 3 period 4
ON
TIMING
OFF
ON
MSR_RESET
(ZERO_ON/OFF)
OFF
ON
TRG
OFF
ON
MSR_VALID
OFF
ON
OUT/OR OFF
OFF
ON
STO
OFF

„ About the TIMING, ZERO_ON/OFF, MSR_RESET, and RESET_ALL terminal responsiveness


There is a maximum of 200 ms delay from when TIMING, ZERO_ON/OFF, MSR_RESET, and RESET_ALL turns on until the measured value is updated.
TIMING ON
ZERO_ON/OFF
MSR_RESET OFF
ON
TRG
OFF

Capture Capture Capture

Measurement Measurement Measurement


processing processing Max200ms processing
ON
OUT_DATA[15:0]
OFF

5-77
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

Results output terminal


„ TEST terminal operations for the total status output (OR) when the “OR terminal output mode” is set to “Hold
Status”
The status condition is normally updated for each trigger. However, if the status is NG, the condition is unchanged until input such as TEST is executed.
ON
TRG
OFF

ON
READY
OFF
ON
OUT_DATA[15:0]
OFF

ON
(1)
OR
OFF

ON
STO
OFF

ON
TEST
OFF

(Continued)

ON
TRG
OFF

ON
READY
OFF
ON (2)
OUT_DATA[15:0]
OFF

ON (2) (3)
OR
OFF

ON
STO
OFF

ON (2)
TEST A
OFF

A: Minimum TEST input time (1 ms or longer)

(1) If [Hold Status] is enabled and the last status is NG, the OR output remains NG regardless of an actual status result.
(2) When the TEST input is turned on/off, the hold status is canceled and all terminals are reset to the normal status. The OR output condition will be updated
when the result for the next OR output is output.
(3) As the TEST input is not turned on, if the last status result is NG, the OR output remains NG regardless of an actual status result.

„ Output operations of the total status output (OR) when “OR terminal output mode” is set to “One Shot
Output”
ON
TRG
OFF

Measurement Measurement processing Measurement processing Measurement processing


processing NG judgment NG judgment OK judgment

ON (1) (3)
OR A A (5)
(One Shot Output)
OFF

ON
OR (2) (4)
(Update Every Judge)
OFF

ON
STO (5)
OFF

A: One shot time (1 - 9999 ms)

(1) If the one shot output is enabled, the OR output is in NG state when the measurement processing started by trigger input is NG after the measurement
processing finishes (not synchronized with the STO rise).
(2) When “Update Every Judge” is enabled, the OR output is in the NG state along with the STO rise.
(3) If the one shot output is enabled, the OR output holds the NG state for the specified period of time, and then resets the NG state.
(4) When “Update Every Judge” is enabled, the OR output holds the NG state until the next result output for measurement processing is started. Therefore, if
output results are consecutively judged as NG, the OR output holds the NG state.
(5) If measurement processing is continuously performed with one shot output enabled, the previous NG state may remain at the time of measurement
processing results being finalized by the STO.

5-78
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

Other control terminals


„ RESET terminal operation
This terminal is used to set the output terminals to normal state and clear the measurement results.
When the program is changed, the RESET is performed simultaneously.

z When a trigger has not been input


A

ON
RESET
OFF
ON
READY C B
OFF

ON (1)
BUSY C
OFF

A: Minimum RESET input time is 1 ms or longer (the same applies below)


B: RESET time is 1 s or less (the same applies below)
C: RESET response delay time is 1 ms or less (the same applies below)

(1) RESET processing complete check monitors BUSY fall.

z When a trigger is input


ON
RESET
OFF

ON
TRG
OFF

ON
(2)
READY
OFF

ON
OUT_DATA[15:0] D
OFF

ON
OR D
OFF

ON
STO
OFF

Measurement
Capture processing Processing reset

ON
BUSY
(1)
OFF
D: 0 ms or longer

(1) RESET processing complete check monitors BUSY fall.


(2) The READY terminal forcibly turns OFF during RESET processing and turns ON after the reset operation completes.

z When data is output


ON
RESET
OFF

ON
TRG
OFF

ON
(2)
READY
OFF

ON
OUT_DATA[15:0] (3)
OFF

ON
OR
OFF

ON
STO
OFF

Measurement
Capture processing
Results output Processing reset

ON
(1)
BUSY
OFF

(1) RESET processing complete check monitors BUSY fall.


(2) The READY terminal forcibly turns OFF during RESET processing and all signals turn ON after the reset operation completes.
(3) When the current output for one measurement is completed, the OR and OUT_DATA return to the normal statuses.

5-79
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Input/Output and Control Using the I/O Terminal

„ TEST terminal operation


TEST terminal is used to cancel output operations.
One shot input allows the result output state to be reset to normal state and can suppress output during setting adjustment using the level input.

ON
TRG
OFF

ON
READY
500 µs or less
OFF

ON
(1) (3)
TEST A
OFF

ON
(1)
OUT_DATA[15:0]
OFF

ON
(1)
OR
OFF

ON
(1)
STO
OFF

(2) (3)
Results output Results output
A: Minimum TEST input time (1 ms or more)

(1) While the TEST input is ON, terminal output (OUT_DATA[15:0], OR, STO) is forcibly set to normal state. (The response delay is within 500 µs).
(2) As for output to an SD card, USB HDD, FTP server, non-procedural communication, and a field network, “one output of results” does not stop even when
the TEST terminal turns ON during that “one output of results.”
(3) If the TEST terminal is ON before “one output of results,” all output for that trigger is stopped and results output is not performed even when the TEST
terminal is turned OFF later on.

„ EXT terminal operation


The EXT terminal is used to pause an image capture.
This is useful in case that external trigger inputs and internal trigger acceptances need to be stopped due to setting adjustments.

ON
EXT A
OFF (1)
(2)
ON
B B
READY
OFF
(1) (1)
A: Minimum EXT input time (1 ms)
B: Response delay to READY time (0.5 ms or less)

(1) When the EXT input is ON, the READY output is OFF. At this time, no trigger can be input (all external terminals, field network communication, RS-232C,
and Ethernet). Even if an internal trigger has been selected, when the READY turns off, the image capturing and measurement processing are stopped.
The result of the trigger input accepted before the EXT input has turned ON continues being output regardless of the EXT status.
(2) When the EXT input turns off, the status returns to READY output for triggers to be able to be accepted.

5-80
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual

6
Specifications

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Dedicated monitor for TM-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Extension cable repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Communication expansion unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Measurement area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Temperature Characteristics (examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reference Surface of Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Controller (TM-X5000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Head (TM-X5006 / TM-X5040 / TM-X5065 / TM-X5120) . . . . . . 6-9
Transmitter-to-receiver cable (OP-87033/OP-87034) . . . . . . . . 6-12
Head connection cable (CB-C3R / CB-C5R / CB-C10R) . . . . . 6-12
Repeater for head connection extension (TM-CX10U) /
Head connection extension cable (CB-C10RX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Protective cover (OP-88575/OP-88576/OP-88775) . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Dedicated monitor for TM-X (TM-MP120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Dedicated monitor mount (OP-87262) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Mouse (OP-87506) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

6-1
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Specifications

Specifications
Controller
Model TM-X5000
Number of connectable sensor heads 2
Up to 1000 settings (depending on SD card capacity and setting contents) for SD card 1 and SD card 2 individually.
Number of setting registrations
External switching is possible.
• SD card slot x2
Memory card • Supports OP-87133 (512 MB), CA-SD1G (1 GB: Equipped as standard for SD1 slot), CA-SD4G (4 GB),
CA-SD16G (16 GB)
Number of measurement tools Up to 100 measurement tools and 100 element tools per head *1
Control input 20 (Terminal block: 5, Parallel I/O: 15)
• 28 (Terminal block: 6, Parallel I/O: 22)
Control output
• Photo MOSFET *2
RS-232C Numerical value output and control input/output
Numerical value output and control input/output using Ethernet port
PLC-Link (Cannot be used in conjunction with EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET and EtherCAT;
Compatible models: Mitsubishi Electric PLCs (MELSEC Q Series, L Series, iQ-R Series, iQ-F Series))
• Numerical value output and control input/output
• Connection to KEYENCE dedicated monitor (TM-MP120)
• Connection to KEYENCE PC application software
Ethernet
• Support for FTP client/server functions, BOOTP functions
• 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
• Supports jumbo frames (only the Ethernet port on the controller)
• Connection to KEYENCE dedicated monitor (TM-MP120)
USB • Connection to KEYENCE PC application software
• USB 2.0 only
• Numerical value output and control input/output using the Ethernet port or optional EtherNet/IP unit (CB-NEP20E)
(Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, PROFINET, and EtherCAT)
Interface EtherNet/IP • Supports cyclic communication (max. 1436 bytes) and message communication
• Up to 32 connections (Ethernet port)/1: Exclusive Owner, 4: Input Only (CB-NEP20E)
• Conforms to Conformance Test Version.CT17 (Ethernet port)/CT17 (CB-NEP20E)
• Numerical value output and control input/output using Ethernet port enabled or optional PROFINET unit (CB-
NPN20E) (Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC link, EtherNet/IP™, and EtherCAT)
PROFINET • Supports cyclic communication (max. 1408 byte (Ethernet port) / 1212 bytes (CB-NPN20E))
• Supports non-cyclic communication (recorded data)
• Conforms to Conformance Class A (Ethernet)/C (CB-NPN20E)
• By connecting the optional EtherCAT unit CB-NEC20E, numeric output and control input/output can be performed
(Cannot be used in conjunction with PLC Link, EtherNet/IP, and PROFINET)
• Supports cyclic communication (process data object communication) (input: max. 530 byte/output: max.534 byte)
EtherCAT
• Supports non-cyclic communication (mailbox communication)
• Supports CoE
• Conforms to Conformance Test V2.2.1.0
SNTP Automatic date and time correction when connected to SNTP server
Various data output, including image data, when connecting an HDD (2 TB max.) to dedicated USB port (USB 3.0
USB HDD
support, bus-powered, rated output: 900 mA)
Simple monitor
Analog RGB output, XGA (1024 × 768 (24 bit color, 60 Hz))
output
Minimum display unit 0.01 µm, 0.0001°, 0.0001 mm2
Switchable between English, Japanese, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Korean, Thai, German, French,
Language (Simple monitor output)
Italian, Mexican Spanish, Czech, Hungarian, and Polish.
Power voltage 24 V DC ± 10 %
Rating Current
3.5 A
consumption
Operating ambient
0 to +45°C (when installed on a DIN rail) / 0 to +40°C (when installed on a surface)
Environmental temperature
resistance Operating ambient
85% RH or less (No condensation)
humidity
Weight Approx. 1600 g
*1 Up to 7 master comparison tools (area/contour), 19 pitch measurement tools (distance/angle), 13 foreign particle distance tools (rotating rectangle), 8 foreign
particle distance tools (circle/arc), and 7 contour profiles (depending on SD card capacity and settings).
*2 Positive common connection for NPN input devices and negative common connection for PNP input devices supported.

6-2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Specifications

Head
Model TM-X5006 TM-X5040 TM-X5065 TM-X5120

Transmitter/receiver distance 60 mm 180 mm 270 mm 436.7 mm

High-accuracy
f4 mm f26 mm f40 mm f60 mm
Field of measurement area
view
Measurement area f6 mm f40 mm f65 mm f124 mm
Measuring
range
High-accuracy
2 mm 10 mm 20 mm 20 mm
Depth of measurement area
field
Measurement area 4 mm 20 mm 30 mm 40 mm

Exposure time 25 / 50 / 100 μs (Adjustable 3-stage)

Approx. 24 ms (at “Full” vertical/horizontal measurement range sizes)


Imaging time (Trigger interval)
Approx. 3 ms (at “4/16” vertical/horizontal measurement range sizes)

Light source InGaN Green LED

High-accuracy
±0.2 µm ±1 µm ±1.2 µm ±2.5 µm
Measurement position measurement area
accuracy *1
Measurement area ±0.3 µm ±2 µm ±2.2 µm ±3.5 µm
*2
Repeatability ±0.03 µm ±0.08 µm ±0.1 µm ±0.2 µm
*3
Enclosure rating IP64

Operating ambient
Environmental 0 to 45 °C
temperature
resistance
Operating ambient
85% RH or less (No condensation)
humidity

Material Aluminum Aluminum/PBT

Transmitter Approx. 160 g Approx. 620 g Approx. 1300 g Approx. 5900 g

Weight Receiver Approx. 480 g Approx. 890 g Approx. 1900 g Approx. 7900 g

Base Approx. 210 g Approx. 670 g Approx. 1500 g Approx. 4300 g

*1 E rror when measuring width of KEYENCE standard object (glass calibration scale).
*2 Average value of ±2σ measuring the width of a KEYENCE standard object (glass calibration scale) 16 times in the center of the measurement area.
*3 Excluding connectors and cable boxes.

Dedicated monitor for TM-X Cable


Model TM-MP120 Cable
Type Model Weight
length
Display element TFT LCD
CB-C3R 3m Approx. 250 g
Display color 16 million colors
Head connection cable CB-C5R 5m Approx. 410 g
Number of dots 1024 x 768 (W x H dots)
CB-C10R 10 m Approx. 740 g
LCD panel Effective display
245.7 x 184.3 (W x H mm)
area Head connection
CB-C10RX 10 m Approx. 740 g
extension cable
White LED (not replaceable)
Backlight Life span (At normal temperature OP-87033 1m Approx. 60 g
Transmitter-receiver
and humidity) Approx. 50,000 hours cable
OP-87034 3m Approx. 130 g
Back : 1 port
Ethernet
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Interface
USB*1
Front : 1 port Extension cable repeater
Back : 2 port

Power voltage 24 V DC ± 10 % Model TM-CX10U


Rating
Max. current Number of units 2 units
2.5 A Max.
consumption
connections
Cable length 30 m total (10 m between devices)
Operating ambient
0 to 50 °C
temperature Operating
ambient 0 to 45 °C
Operating ambient Environmental temperature
85% RH or less (No condensation)
Environmental humidity resistance
resistance Operating
85% RH or less (No condensation)
Panel built-in type ambient humidity
Front operating part only is dust-
Mechanism Weight Approx. 60 g
proof, drip-proof
equivalent to IP65f

Weight Approx. 2400 g

*1 Use the OP-35331 (USB cable : 3m) when connecting to the controller.

6-3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Specifications

Communication expansion unit

EtherCAT Unit (CB-NEC20E)


Model CB-NEC20E
Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Communication cycle 500 μs (minimum)
Connection cable STP type cable of category 5e or higher
Distance between nodes 100 m

Communication Communication port RJ-45 x 2


Communication size 530 byte (input) / 534 byte (output)

Supports process data object communication (cyclic communication),


Supported functions
mailbox communication (non-cyclic communication), and CoE

Conformance test
Compliant with V2.2.1.0
version
Power supply Supplied from the controller
Ambient operating 0 to +45°C (DIN rail mounted)/
Environmental temperature 0 to +40°C (Bottom mounted)
resistance Ambient operating
85% RH or less (No condensation)
humidity
Weight Approx. 500 g

EtherNet/IP Unit (CB-NEP20E)


Model CB-NEP20E
Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Communication cycle 1 ms (minimum)
Connection cable STP type cable of category 5e or higher
Distance between nodes 100 m
Communication
Communication port RJ-45 x 2
Communication size 1436 byte
Supports cyclic communication (Implicit message) and message communication (Explicit message) UCMM and Class3,
Supported functions
supports DLR (Device Level Ring)
Conformance test
Compliant with Version.CT17
version
Power supply Supplied from the controller
Ambient operating 0 to +45°C (DIN rail mounted)/
Environmental temperature 0 to +40°C (Bottom mounted)
resistance Ambient operating
85% RH or less (No condensation)
humidity
Weight Approx. 500 g

PROFINET Unit (CB-NPN20E)


Model CB-NPN20E
Compliant standard IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
Communication speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Communication cycle 1 ms (minimum)
Connection cable STP type cable of category 5e or higher
Distance between nodes 100 m
Communication Communication port RJ-45 x 2
Communication size 1212 byte
Supported functions Supports data I/O communication (cyclic communication) and recorded data communication (non-cyclic communication)
Applicable protocol LLDP, DCP, MRP, SNMP
Conformance test Compliant with
version Conformance Class C V2.34
Power supply Supplied from the controller
Ambient operating
0 to +45°C (DIN rail mounted)/0 to +40°C (Bottom mounted)
Environmental temperature
resistance Ambient operating
85% RH or less (No condensation)
humidity
Weight Approx. 500 g

6-4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Characteristics

Characteristics
Measurement area
The illustrations below show the measurement areas that satisfy the
measurement accuracy for each head.

Measurement area

z TM-X5006 z TM-X5065
45 High-accuracy
(30) (30) 8 Measurement area measurement area

±1.2µm
±2.2µm φ40 φ65
40±0.2

High-accuracy
Measurement area measurement area

±0.2µm 20
φ4 φ6 30
±0.3µm

2
4

z TM-X5040
82±0.6
High-accuracy
Measurement area measurement area

±1µm (150) 10
±2µm φ26 φ40 160 (110)
270

10
20
z TM-X5120
High-accuracy
Measurement area measurement area
65.5 ± 0.3

±2.5µm
(80) 10 ±3.5µm
90 (90)
φ60 φ124
180

20
40
156±1.0

49 (171) 49

220 (216.7)

436.7

6-5
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Characteristics

Temperature Characteristics (examples)


Examples of the temperature characteristics are shown below.

z TM-X5006 z TM-X5065
Temperature -5 °C 5°C 15°C 25°C 35°C 45°C Temperature -5 °C 5°C 15°C 25°C 35°C 45°C

Drift (µm) 0.60 0.50 0.30 0.00 -0.15 -0.20 Drift (µm) -2.0 -1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

* When measuring with the quartz chart (width 1 mm) placed in the center * When measuring with the quartz chart (width 10 mm) placed in the
of measurement range (25 °C standard) center of measurement range (25 °C standard)

z TM-X5040 z TM-X5120
Temperature -5 °C 5°C 15°C 25°C 35°C 45°C Temperature -5 °C 5°C 15°C 25°C 35°C 45°C

Drift (µm) -0.5 -0.2 0.0 0.0 -0.5 -0.6 Drift (µm) 7.50 5.00 2.50 0.00 -2.50 -5.00

* When measuring with the quartz chart (width 10 mm) placed in the * When measuring with the quartz chart (width 20 mm) placed in the
center of measurement range (25 °C standard) center of measurement range (25 °C standard)

Reference Surface of Head


The portion (shaded area) indicated with the arrows are the references of the surfaces.

z TM-X5006

z TM-X5040

6-6
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Characteristics

z TM-X5065

z TM-X5120

6-7
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Dimensions

Dimensions
Controller (TM-X5000)
122
118 19.3 141.6

DIN-rail mounts
168

35.9
83.3
65.3
6

(90) 124.6

4×M4 Depth: 6

12.5
93

94
12.1 Unit : mm

When the communication expansion unit (CB-NEC20E/NEP20E/NPN20E) is installed


153.9
149.9
118 19.3 141.6

DIN-rail mounts
168

35.9
83.3
65.3
6

(90) 124.6 Unit : mm

6-8
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Dimensions

EtherCAT unit (CB-NEC20E), EtherNet/IP unit (CB-NEP20E), PROFINET unit (CB-NPN20E)


12.4 31.9

DIN-rail
mounts
168

35.9
83.3
65.3
6

124.6

2×M4
Depth: 6

22.1

94 12.1 Unit : mm

Head (TM-X5006 / TM-X5040 / TM-X5065 / TM-X5120)

TM-X5006
4xφ4.5 cut
25 25 φ8 Depth 4.5
4xM4
15 15
24
26
36
18 ±0.2

6
5

27 2xφ4 Measurement 2xφ4


M3 Mounting hole area (30) (30) M3 Mounting hole
9
4 13.2
6
56

56
40 ±0.2
46

46
8.2

(74)
18
4
4

(3) 8
15
48 39.5 3.5 25

120 45 38 32
(235)
Cable length
650±35

4xM4
5
26

115 45 2xφ3.6
109.3
98

129 70 Mounting hole


(199) Thickness 6
20

22

3.5

3.5
2xM4 Depth 6 63 57 47 18 2xM4 Depth 6 19
26 Unit : mm

6-9
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Dimensions

TM-X5040
55 55 4xφ4.5 cut
4xM4 25 φ8 Depth 4.5
25

62

50
6
31±0.3
When pulling When pulling
Measurement area the T-to-R cable upwards the T-to-R cable upwards
3xφ5.5
49.5 3xφ5.5 (80) (80) M5 Mounting hole (24) (38)
30 M5 Mounting hole 20 49.5

φ40
65.5 ±0.3
21.9

(117.5)
97.5

97.5
88

88

Cable length
650±35
5

10 10 2xφ3.6

5
20
(19) 47 6.5 8 (10) Mounting hole

109.3
29 Thickness 6

98
58.5
105.5 90 90 84.9

3.5
(370.4) 3.5
19
4xM4 26
6
50

115 115
With the protective cover on
156 161.15
(317.15)

3xM4 Depth 6 3xM4 Depth 6


15.75

15.75
31

31

25 65 65 25
15.75

15.75

47 103 103.5 46.5


Unit : mm

TM-X5065
4xφ5.5 cut
4xM4 115 65 φ9.5 Depth 5.5
35 35
94

70
47±0.6

12

Measurement area
3xφ5.5 When pulling When pulling
80.5 3xφ5.5 (150) (100) M5 Mounting hole the T-to-R cable upwards the T-to-R cable upwards
M5 Mounting hole 76.5 (30)
50 30 (16)
φ65
130.6

120

(150)
115

130
82 ±0.6
28

Cable length
5

10 10
5
20

650±35

(2) 66 9.5 11.5 2xφ3.6


33.5 Mounting hole
109.3

Thickness 6
98

66.5 (4)
143.8 160 110 110.2
(524)
3.5

19
3.5
4xM5 26
12

With the protective cover on


70

200 130
243 195
(438)

3xM4 Depth 6 3xM4 Depth 6


47

47
24.75

24.75
24.75

24.75

25 135 85 25
53 176 131.5 44
Unit : mm

6-10
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Dimensions

TM-X5120
130 130 4xφ10 cut
4xM6 φ16 Depth 8.5
70 70

164

140
82±1.0

12
56 (171) (167.7)

35.8
Measurement area
20 3xM8 3xM8 140
Depth 16mm Depth 16mm
40

φ124
200.5

200.5
238

(258)
238
156±1.0
9
25
31

9
20
(34.2) 142 88.8
149.5 49 49 113.3 (9.9)
9 9
210.5 220 (216.7) 172.3
(819.5)

8xM8

12
With the protective cover on

140
211 179
361 329
379 347
(726)

3xM8 3xM8
42.5 42.5
42.5 42.5
82

82

59.7 160.3 157 59.7

132 234 230.7 103.3 Unit : mm

6-11
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Dimensions

Transmitter-to-receiver cable (OP-87033/ Head connection cable (CB-C3R / CB-C5R


OP-87034) / CB-C10R)
Male side Female side φ7.6

31.4
φ12.5
φ14
φ12

φ12
1000 or 3000
31
Unit : mm 54 L 41

12.7
Unit : mm
Model Cable length (L)
CB-C3R 3m
CB-C5R 5m
CB-C10R 10m

Repeater for head connection extension (TM-CX10U) / Head connection extension cable (CB-C10RX)

TM-CX10U CB-C10RX
112.6 Head side Controller side
φ7.6
105
Controller side Head side
98
φ12.5

φ12.5
φ14

φ14
3.5
26
19

53.9 10000 53.9


3.5

2xφ3.6
Unit : mm
Mounting hole

21
6 11 6 11.5

Unit : mm

TM-CX10U (with the cable inserted)


Controller side (213) Head side

(85) (85)

Unit : mm

Protective cover (OP-88575/OP-88576/OP-88775)

OP-88575 (for TM-X5040) OP-88576 (for TM-X5065)

M3 Mounting hole x4
M3 Mounting hole x4
63.8
54.5

83.6
95.8

42.8 25
45 The slot that the projection
60.6 on the head side goes into
63
Unit : mm 25
67.6 The slot that the projection
92.6 on the head side goes into
Unit : mm

6-12
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Dimensions

OP-88775 (for TM-X5120)

The projection is on the top


M4 Mounting hole
162.8
127

63.6
120.4
161.6
The convex part that goes into
the concave part on the head side Unit : mm

Dedicated monitor for TM-X (TM-MP120)


301.2 With the mounting bracket (included) installed
52.9

Panel thickness
29.8

312.3 1.6 to 4.0 mm


245.7 Mounting bracket
7.2 136.2 136.2
(Effective display area) Mounting screws
(Mounting bracket)
128.3
(Effective display area)
245.3
184.3

227.2

(Mounting bracket)
121.3
6 50.9
35.1
37

6.4

31.4
75 4xM4 Panel cutout When the panel is installed (front)
Effective screw depth:9
75

+1
0
227.5
1.5

88.3

12.4

103.2 301.5 +1
0

58.6
85.4

10

116.1

17.4 Unit : mm

6-13
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Dimensions

Dedicated monitor mount (OP-87262)


151.5

315 315 334.3


20°
187.5 5°

200

5 4 x 2 x R2.5

8 85

45
250

260 Unit : mm

Mouse (OP-87506)

57.9

31.2
φ12.4

φ3.3

39.2

1860.0 ±85 113.7

Unit : mm

6-14
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual

7
TM-X Navigator

TM-X Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2


Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Installation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Start the Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Differences Between the Controller and Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Folder configuration on the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
CAD Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

7-1
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual TM-X Navigator

TM-X Navigator
TM-X Navigator is a PC application for the TM-X5000 Series.
Connecting TM-X Navigator to the controller enables the same operations to be performed as the dedicated display.
In addition, by using the simulator function, the controller measurement content can be simulated on a PC and measurement settings can be created and/or
changed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)
(5)

(1) Connect to the controller (terminal function)


Clicking this button connects the application to the controller.
For details about operations after the application is connected, refer to “Basic Operation” (Page 3-2).
[Send to Excel] is a function only available on TM-X Navigator (it is not available on the dedicated display).

(2) Simulator
Clicking this button displays the list of workspaces and starts the selected workspace simulator.
New workspaces can be created and controller settings can also be transferred (uploaded, downloaded, imported, and exported).
To download settings from the controller, first delete the reference images for the Program numbers to be downloaded to the workspace.

(3) Connection
Configure the settings to connect to the controller (USB or Ethernet).
To connect via Ethernet, specify the controller IP address and port number.
(4) Language
Select the language to be displayed on TM-X Navigator and the simulator.
(5) Update
Updates the controller firmware.

7-2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Operating Environment

Operating Environment
To use TM-X Navigator, the environment must meet the requirements shown below.

z Main PC system specifications


Microsoft Windows 10 Home/Pro/Enterprise, Windows 11 Pro
Supported operating systems • The OS supports English, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean, Thai, German, French, Italian,
Mexican Spanish, Czech, Hungarian, and Polish.

Free hard disk space 2 GB or more (an area for saving image data is required separately)

Display resolution Minimum: 1366 × 768 pixels or higher; recommended: 1920 × 1080 pixels or higher

• In order to prevent a decrease in performance, it is recommended that software other than TM-X Navigator are closed when using
this application.
• Do not use multiple instances of TM-X Navigator at the same time. Additionally, do not start the same workspace at the same time.
• To use the simulator, “Activation” (Page 7-3) is required.

Installation method
Run the TM-X Navigator installation file (setup.exe) downloaded from the TM-X5000 Series user’s support site (www.keyence.com/tmxus) and follow the
instructions displayed on the screen.

• If the PC being installed to does not have the necessary runtime components used by this software, it will be asked to install those components.
Install all the necessary components at that time.
• Installation must be performed by a user with Administrator privileges.
• The USB driver is also stored in “[Installation_folder]\TM-X Navigator\driver”.
• To uninstall the application, click the Windows [Start] menu → [KEYENCE TM-H1X] → right-click [TM-X Navigator], and then select [Uninstall].

Activation
To use the simulator function, the activation code issued by KEYENCE is required.
The procedure to obtain the activation code is as follows.

1 Click [Simulator] to start the simulator.


The [Input activation code] dialog box will appear.

2 Take note of the displayed user ID (8-digit alphanumeric characters) and save it. It will be required for input later.
Clicking the [Copy] button enables the user ID to be copied.

3 Access the simulator use registration (activation code issuance) page from the TM-X5000 Series user’s support site (www.
keyence.com/tmxus).
To issue a request for the activation code, perform the user registration on the KEYENCE website.

4 Enter the user ID displayed in step 2 into the [User ID] field, and then click [Next].
KEYENCE will send an “Activation code” to the registered email address within one business day.

5 Enter the activation code in the activation code input screen.


• The activation code is only valid for the User ID specified when the activation code was requested.
• Keep the activation code in a safe place for backup purposes.
• When using the TM-X Navigator simulator feature with multiple users logged in on the same PC, activation must be performed for
each user. (The activation code issued can be used for all users.)

To prevent input errors, copy and paste the activation code from the e-mail that is received.

7-3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Simulator

Simulator
Start the Simulator Differences Between the Controller and
Simulator
1 Click [Simulator]. Select the workspace displayed on the
screen, and then click [Start simulator].
The main screen and image strip start.
Useful functions unique to the simulator

2 Drag the images to be simulated to the image strip


and enter a trigger from the trigger buttons to run a
„ Special trigger functions
Image strip trigger buttons and trigger input on the keyboard can be used,
which are unique triggers to the simulator.
simulation.
Omitted images (1/X omissions) can also be loaded and used z Image strip
in simulations.
First execute button Last execute button
If an omitted image is used for measurement, the values will
not match the measured values of the original image.
Reverse execute button Forward execute button
Simulator screen Image strip
Continuous trigger
Re-execute button
button

z Keyboard
Forward execution
Press the “T” key.
trigger

Reverse execution Press the “F” + “T” keys


trigger (Press the “F” key while pressing the “T” key.)

Press the “S” + “T” keys.


Re-execute trigger
(Press the “S” key while pressing the “T” key.)

Cycle execution
Press the “T” key for 0.3 seconds or longer.
trigger

Clicking a thumbnail on the image strip also enables


execution.

Trigger buttons
Differences between the controller and simulator
z Measurement time/capture time
As the hardware configuration is not the same on the PC and controller,
the measurement time is different even for the same process.

z Difference in measurement results


Due to the differences in the computing hardware on the PC and controller,
there may be differences in the measurement results.

z Differences in head settings


• The head settings will not function.
• In Run mode, the internal trigger does not operate.
• When executing from the image strip, the trigger interval can be set
independently in [Trigger interval settings] (set by right-clicking the
image strip).
Although other items can be set, the operation differs from the controller.

z Program Operation
• When Programs are copied, the images registered on the image strip
are also automatically copied.
• Programs cannot be backed up nor restored.
• CAD data (DXF files) can be loaded using [CAD Import] to create
Programs.

z Display of system information


Only the controller version, serial number, MAC address, and connection
device details (version and serial numbers) are displayed.

z Output of images and image processing results


Output is not possible to any devices other than the SD card and USB
HDD.

z Items that cannot be set


• Date/time

z Items that cannot be used


• Reboot
• Communication commands for control

7-4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Simulator

Folder configuration on the PC


The folder configuration on the PC when using the TM-X Navigator simulator is shown below.

Base path (initial value) C:\Users\Public\Documents\KEYENCE\TM-H1X

Workspace1 (stores workspace1 files)

Note: The folders inside the dotted line are equivalent to one
controller.
SD1

tm-x

setting

HeadAlignAdj *1

Tolerance_Table *2

000 (stores the Program file for SD1 setting 000)

SimImage

HEAD-A (stores Head A image data)

HEAD-B (stores Head B image data)

001

Headdata (stores adjustment values for each head)

SD2

Workspace2 (stores workspace2 files)

capture *3

save_image

*1 Stores head-to-head adjustment data when using head-to-head adjustment.


*2 The tolerance table is stored if the tolerance table is saved with the screw tool.
*3 Connecting to the controller with TM-X Navigator and clicking the button generates the “capture” folder and saves the screen image.

To use the simulator function, an environment must be created in which the simulator operates on the PC. This is called a “Workspace” and the
folder that stores the workspace is called a “Base path”.

7-5
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Simulator

CAD Import
CAD data (DXF files) can be loaded to create Programs that include CAD elements.

• To use [CAD Import], a USB key for CAD import TM-H1C (sold separately) is required.
• The DXF file versions that you can import are AutoCAD Versions 2.5 to 2018.
• Only figures drawn with continuous lines can be extracted.
• Only figures drawn in the model space can be extracted. Figures drawn only in the paper space cannot be extracted.
• [CAD Import] is a TM-X Navigator function and it is not available on the dedicated display.
• If it is not a closed shape (if there is a gap in the CAD line), it cannot be filled correctly.
• The tolerance created as dimension allowance deviation will be applied to the upper and lower limit settings (tolerance entered as
simple text will not be applied).
• Dimension lines and elements may not be correctly linked and applied depending on the CAD data to be imported.

1 Select [Program Operation] → [CAD Import]. 4 Perform [Create image] and then click [Next].
When two heads are connected, data is imported to the
connected head. To import to a different head, select the
other head, and select [CAD Import].

2 Open the CAD data (DXF file) to be loaded.

3 Perform [Range] and then click [Next].


Specify the region to be captured (view range) from the CAD data.
View toolbar

5 Perform [Generate elements] and then click [Complete].


If [Import CAD contour data] is set to ON, the CAD contour
data will be used as the reference for the [Master Difference
(Contour)] and [Profile] tools.

View range View settings


z View toolbar
Buttons to operate the preview display are displayed.
Changes the display magnification of the main
screen.
Display the imported CAD data (DXF file) at a
magnification that displays all the data in the
preview screen. The CAD data (DXF file) is imported.
Displays the imported CAD data (DXF file) at
a zoom ratio with which all of the view range is
displayed on the preview screen.
All the drawing elements included in the imported
CAD data (DXF file) are displayed in the preview
screen.
The lines that can be imported as “the CAD data
elements (contour lines) of the target” in the
imported CAD data (DXF file) are displayed as red
lines.

z View settings
Scale Specify the scale of the view range to be displayed
specification on the preview screen.
Rotation/ Rotate or mirror the CAD data (DXF file) displayed
Mirroring in the preview display.
Specify whether to handle the data (numerical
Unit
values) of the CAD data (DXF file) in millimeters
specification (mm) or inches (in).

7-6
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual

Appendix

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2


System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Normal errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

A-1
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Error Messages

Error Messages
System error messages
Errors that occur within the controller can either be hardware (head connection errors, etc.), or software related (improper settings, etc.). While the controller
operates in RUN mode, any error occurrence can be detected via the ERROR terminal which turns on in the event of an error.

Head connection
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

An error occurred in the connection with the head. The head is being used
No head has been found.
beyond its rating.
10001 Please turn off the controller and connect to Head A, then
(For example, the ambient temperature of the head is beyond the
reboot the controller.
specification, or a non-supported head cable is being used.)

10002 Head B is not connected. An unconnected head is specified in the tool settings.

Undetected head is connected.


10003 A head which is not supported by the controller is connected.
Turn off the controller and check the head model.

No head can be recognized.


• No heads are connected.
10004 Please turn off the controller and connect to Head A, then
• The head connection cable is disconnected.
reboot the controller.

Only Head B is connected.


• A head is connected to Head Connector B only.
When using only one head, Head A should be used.
10005 • A head is connected to Head Connector A as well, but the head connection
Please turn off the controller and connect to Head A, then
cable is disconnected.
reboot the controller.

An old head version is connected. Unsupported functions will An old head version is connected and functions that are not compatible with
10030
be disabled. that head are set.

External unit
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

An external unit that cannot be recognized is connected.


10105 Turn off the controller and check the model of the external An external unit that is not supported by the controller is connected.
unit.

System File
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

The last used (saved) Program file is corrupt or has been deleted.
Unable to load the selected program file. The program will be
11001 The Program that was exported using the Program backup does not contain
started with initialized settings.
the open Program.

• The resources memory or the image memory for the program file loaded at
Failed to load because the image memory of the program is startup is full.
11002
beyond the size. Some settings will be initialized. • The program being loaded exceeds the available resources memory or
image memory.

• The system settings loaded at startup is from a incompatible version.


Failed to load the global setting. The global setting will be
11003 • The system settings file has a checksum error.
started with initialized settings.
• The system settings file loaded at startup is corrupt.

Unable to load the program file due to unsupported version.


11004 The data in the specified Program was created with an incompatible version.
The program will be started with initialized settings.

Unable to load the program file due to checksum errors. The


11005 The specified Program file has a checksum error.
program will be started with initialized settings.

Unable to load the program file due to damage. The program


11006 The data in the specified Program file is corrupt and cannot be used.
will be started with initialized settings.

Failed to load because the resource memory of the program • Resource memory is full in the program setting file loaded at startup.
11011
is beyond the size. • The Program being loaded exceeds the available resources memory.

If hold mode is turned off, the function to trigger multiple


times is not available.
11031 Hold mode is turned off when multiple trigger is enabled.
The device will start with the function to trigger multiple times
disabled.

In the check when going into operation mode, there is a circular reference in
11032 Dependency between tools is cycling.
the dependency between tools.

A-2
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Error Messages

SD Card
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

12001 Failed to access SD Card 1. • A problem occurred while trying to access the SD memory card.
• There is a problem accessing the SD memory card.
• The controller could not recognize the format of SD memory card.
12002 Failed to access SD Card 2. • An unsupported SD memory card is being used.

12003 SD Card 1 is full.


The SD memory card is full.
12004 SD Card 2 is full.

• No SD memory card is in the SD1 slot.


12005 Insert SD Card 1.
• An unsupported SD memory card is being used.

• No SD memory card is in the SD2 slot.


12006 Insert SD Card 2. • An unsupported SD memory card is being used.
• Execute "SD Card2 Extraction” and then insert it again.

Cannot find SD Card 1.


12007 SD Card 1 was removed while the power was ON.
Be sure to keep the SD card 1 inserted during the power on.

Execute the eject operation before removing the SD Card 2.


12008 The SD card was removed without using the [Remove SD Card 2] function.
The SD card and files may be damaged.

12009 SD Card 1 is write-protected. The write-protect switch on SD Card 1 is enabled.

12010 SD Card 2 is write-protected. The write-protect switch on SD Card 2 is enabled.

12012 Unable to export to SD Card 2 due to a full output buffer. SD Card 2 output buffer is full.

Please turn off the power and reboot after having inserted the
12014 No firmware SD card is in the slot.
firmware SD card.

• No USB HDD is connected to the USB HDD connector.


12101 Connect the USB HDD.
• A USB HDD that is not supported by the controller is being used.

• A problem occurred while trying to access the USB HDD. There is a


problem with access to the USB HDD.
12102 Failed to access the USB HDD.
• A USB HDD that is not supported by the controller is being used.
• The destination file is set to read-only.

12103 Unable to output to the USB HDD due to a full output buffer. The output buffer for output to the USB HDD is full.

12104 The USB HDD is full. There is not enough free space on the USB HDD.

12105 The USB HDD is write-protected. The write-protect switch on the USB HDD is enabled.

Execute the Remove USB HDD operation before removing


12106 the USB HDD. The USB HDD was removed without using the [Remove USB HDD] function.
The USB HDD and files may be damaged.

An unsupported USB device was connected. A device other than mass storage class devices, such as a mouse, is
12107
Please remove the connected USB device. connected to the USB 3.0 connector.

The format of the USB HDD is incorrect.


12108 The controller could not recognize the format of the USB HDD.
Please format it.

RS-232C
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

RS-232C communication has been down for 60 or more seconds with data
13101 An RS-232C communication time out error has occurred.
output via the RS-232C port specified in the output settings.

13102 Unable to output to RS-232C due to a full output buffer. The controller output buffer for outputting via the RS-232C port is full.

Ethernet
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

An error occurred with the Ethernet cable when data output via the Ethernet is
13201 Ethernet cable is not connected.
specified in the output settings.

Ethernet communication has been down for 10 or more seconds when data
13202 An Ethernet communication time out error has occurred.
output via the Ethernet is specified in the output settings.

An error occurred with the Ethernet communication when data output via
13203 Failed in the Ethernet (Non-Procedural) communication.
Ethernet is specified in the output settings.

13204 Unable to output to Ethernet due to a full output buffer. The controller output buffer for outputting via the Ethernet port is full.

A-3
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Error Messages

PLC-Link
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

An error occurred in the PLC-Link communication connection with the [Field


13301 Failed to establish a link with the PLC.
network] settings in [Global] set to [PLC-Link].

The controller output buffer for outputting via PLC-Link is full.


13302 Unable to output to the PLC-Link due to a full output buffer.
(Image First)

The delay of the handshake control causes skipping of the As the amount of data output overflows the buffer, data output is suspended
13303
PLC communication result output. partially.

Terminal I/O
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

13401 Unable to make the terminal output due to a full output buffer. The output buffer for output via the terminal is full.

The delay of the handshake control causes skipping of the I/ As the amount of data output overflows the buffer, data output is suspended
13402
O terminal output. partially.

FTP
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

• The FTP server is not operating.


13501 Failed to connect to FTP server. • An error occurred in the LAN connection with the FTP server.
• The IP address for the FTP server is incorrect.

13502 Failed to log in to FTP server. The user ID and/or password for logging in to the FTP server is incorrect.

The controller logged in and began writing a file but was unable to complete
13503 Timeout error occurred during output to FTP server.
the process within the specified time.

The controller was able to log into the FTP server, but was not able to create
13504 Failed to output the file to FTP server.
a file.

The output buffer for output via FTP is full.


Reduce the amount of data to be output, so that the data for each
13510 FTP output failed due to a full buffer. measurement is output at a slower rate than they are output to the FTP. Or,
extend the time between triggers/processing to allow for data to be output.
Note: Results data are not written when the buffer is full.

EtherNet/IP
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

An error occurred in the EtherNet/IP communication connection with the [Field


13601 Ethernet/IP communication failed.
network] settings in [Global] set to [EtherNet/IP].

13602 Ethernet/IP output failed due to a full buffer. The controller output buffer for outputting via the EtherNet/IP port is full.

The delay of the handshake control causes skipping of the As the amount of data output overflows the buffer, data output is suspended
13603
EtherNet/IP communication result output. partially.

EtherNet/IP unit was not recognized and the controller cannot use EtherNet/
13604 The EtherNet/IP unit cannot be recognized.
IP communication.

PROFINET
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

An error occurred in the PROFINET communication connection with the [Field


13701 PROFINET communication failed.
network] settings in [Global] set to [PROFINET].

13702 PROFINET output failed due to a full buffer. The output buffer for output via PROFINET is full.

The delay of the handshake control causes skipping of the As the amount of data output overflows the buffer, data output is suspended
13703
PROFINET communication result output. partially.

The PROFINET unit is not recognized and the controller cannot use
13704 The PROFINET unit cannot be recognized.
PROFINET communication.

A-4
TM-X5000 Series User’s Manual Error Messages

EtherCAT
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

Communication was interrupted. (When recovery is possible, recovery occurs


13801 EtherCAT communication has failed.
automatically.)

13802 EtherCAT output failed due to a full buffer. The controller output buffer for outputting via EtherCAT is full.

The delay of the handshake causes skipping of the EtherCAT When the EtherCAT handshake is on, a delayed handshake caused results
13803
communication result output. output via EtherCAT to be skipped.

The EtherCAT unit is not recognized and the controller cannot use EtherCAT
13804 EtherCAT unit is not recognized.
communication.

Processing Memory
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

14001 Insufficient processing memory. Processing memory space available is insufficient.

Firmware
Error
Error Message Cause
Number

The controller was booted using an unsupported firmware. The controller was started with a firmware version not supported by the
14301
Please turn off the power once and then update the firmware. controller.

Communication expansion unit n* is not found. • Please turn off the power temporarily and check the connection of the
Please turn off the power temporarily and check the connection expansion units.
14501
of the expansion units. • If this error cannot be solved, malfunction of the expansion unit is
*n: communication expansion unit number (1 to 16) considered. Please contact a local KEYENCE office.

• Please turn off the power temporarily and check the connection of the
Expansion unit initialization failed.
expansion units.
14502 Please turn off the power temporarily and check the connection
• If this error cannot be solved, malfunction of the expansion unit is
of the expansion units.
considered. Please contact a local KEYENCE office.

The internal temperature of the controller is high. As this may


14503 cause a breakdown, please check the installation condition and
ambient temperature. There is a problem with the controller installation, or the ambient temperature
The internal temperature of the controller has exceeded the has exceeded the rated value.
prescribed value. (e.g.: Ventilation holes are blocked.)
14504
Please turn off the power temporarily and check the installation
condition and ambient temperature.

• A device that consumes large current is connected to the USB host (the
Overcurrent was detected on the connected USB device.
14506 maximum rating is USB 2.0: 500 mA and USB 3.0: 900 mA).
Please check the device connected to the USB.
• The cable is short-circuited.

The configuration of the connected expansion units is invalid.


14507 Please turn off the power temporarily and check the An expansion unit that cannot be used on the controller is connected.
configuration of the expansion units.

Normal errors

General
Error
Error Message
Number

30006 IP address collision has occurred between the controller and other system on the network.

Execution Errors
Error Error
Error Message Error Message
Number Number

20003 Detect line failed. 20051 The maximum detectable limit has been exceeded.

20004 Circle/arc detection failed. 20052 There is no reference image.

20005 Point detection failed. 20053 No contours were found that match the base contour.

20006 Standard model line detection failed. 20054 Fitting failed.

20008 The timeout error has occurred. 20090 No measurements were performed in the measurement period.

20018 The settings of the tool to be referenced are invalid. The measurement result of the referenced tool is invalid
20091
(ALARM).
20034 Not measurable.
20099 Tool execution error has occurred.
20042 Pitch detection failed.
20112 Position adjustment failed.
20050 Contour detection failed.

A-5
Revision history

Revision history Edition number Revision details

April 2021 Revised 1st edition Ver. 1.1. supported.

September 2021 2nd revision Revisions in accordance with the release of Ver. 1.2.
1st edition

February 2022 3rd revision Revisions in accordance with the release of Ver. 1.3.
1st edition

January 2023 4th revision Revisions in accordance with the release of Ver. 1.5.
1st edition
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year
from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would
necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans,
for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise.
Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no
responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or
damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE
COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY
MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS,
EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S
CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing
warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.

BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:


If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide
such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information
provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2023 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 218083GB 2023-1 D64GB Printed in Japan

Common questions

Powered by AI

Mask regions play a crucial role in edge detection, especially when dealing with complex shapes. They allow certain areas to be excluded from measurement, which is vital when the target has a complicated shape or when specific areas need to be ignored to prevent interference in the detection process. Up to four mask regions can be specified, improving accuracy by focusing only on the relevant parts of the image . Mask regions help reduce the effects of noise and reflections which might otherwise cause false edge detections in intricate designs . By excluding these from edge detection, the measurement can be more precise, ensuring high accuracy even in environments where exterior factors could affect the results .

Cyclic communication under EtherNet/IP ensures a continuous and synchronized exchange between devices. It involves predefined intervals ensuring real-time data updates, which is essential for maintaining operational coherence and responsiveness. This approach minimizes latency, leading to real-time control and monitoring. Errors such as data buildup in the output buffer are minimized through careful configuration, ensuring efficient and reliable data flow necessary for industrial control tasks .

Choosing between maximum or minimum edge detection affects how peak lines and circles are identified. Maximum edge detection targets the most extreme points, creating peak lines that pass through the largest edges in the scan direction. Conversely, minimum edge detection focuses on the smallest edges. The choice impacts the resultant circle or line fitting drastically, as it alters the anchor points for geometric calculations and subsequent analyses, therefore directly influencing the precision of the measured outcome .

Setting a measurement pattern in dimensional assessment is crucial as it ensures consistency and reliability in results. Using standardized patterns allows for comparison and analysis over time, reducing the impact of external factors like ambient temperature or vibrations which may cause measurement fluctuations . Statistical tools, such as trend graphs and histograms, help in visualizing these patterns and detecting any deviations from expected results, which could indicate errors in the measurement process or instrument malfunction . Therefore, standardized measurement patterns contribute significantly to achieving accurate and dependable measurement outcomes.

Moving averages are significant in processing settings as they help in minimizing measurement fluctuations caused by environmental factors such as vibration and atmospheric motions. By averaging multiple readings, the influence of transient anomalies is reduced, leading to more stable and accurate measurements . Additionally, using a moving average can reduce the sensitivity to noise, ensuring that only significant variations are detected and thus enhancing accuracy . Increasing the number of moving averages can further improve measurement accuracy by compensating for vibrational influences .

Configuring exclusion areas ensures accuracy by preventing specific unwanted regions from affecting measurement results. This is especially critical in precision applications where including irrelevant data can degrade the quality of the measurement by introducing unnecessary variability or errors in the data. Having the ability to exclude these areas focuses on the measurement's target features exclusively, ensuring more precise and reliable outputs .

Adjusting the lower limit of edge sensitivity specifies the minimal contrast variation required for detection, which impacts outcomes by selectively ignoring insignificant edges. In noisy environments, raising the lower limit suppresses detection of noise-induced edges, thus enhancing the robustness and accuracy of the edge detection process. However, too high a threshold may also miss relevant low-contrast features, requiring an optimal balance to maintain measurement integrity .

Removing defects aims to eliminate edge points away from the main edge trail as abnormal points, which can occur due to burrs or contamination. This enhances accuracy as errors from these irrelevant points are excluded from calculations for fitting lines, leading to more precise determination of the target's true edge. Using a stronger setting for defect removal can also minimize the impact of small gaps mistaken as valid edges .

Adjusting segment size and filter width is crucial for balancing sensitivity and noise. Increasing segment size reduces detection sensitivity but decreases noise interference, useful in high-noise environments. Conversely, expanding the filter width can decrease false detections caused by noise. This trade-off requires strategic adjustment based on specific application contexts to optimize edge detection reliability without compromising detail accuracy .

The edge direction settings available are [Both], [Light to Dark], and [Dark to Light]. Choosing [Both] allows detection of edges that change from dark to light or light to dark. [Light to Dark] focuses on detecting edges transitioning from lighter to darker areas, while [Dark to Light] detects the opposite transition. Selecting the appropriate edge detection direction can affect the accuracy and relevance of the edges detected based on the specific application and the nature of the target image area .

You might also like